Canon iPF750 series, iPF760 Series, image Prograf iPF780 Series, image Prograf iPF785 Series Service Manual

Service Manual

iPF780/760/750 series

iPF785

Mar 27 2014

Application

This manual has been issued by Canon Inc. for qualified persons to learn technical theory, installation, maintenance, and repair of products. This manual covers all localities where the products are sold. For this reason, there may be information in this manual that does not apply to your locality.

Corrections

This manual may contain technical inaccuracies or typographical errors due to improvements or changes in products. When changes occur in applicable products or in the contents of this manual, Canon will release technical information as the need arises. In the event of major changes in the contents of this manual over a long or short period, Canon will issue a new edition of this manual.

The following paragraph does not apply to any countries where such provisions are inconsistent with local law.

Trademarks

The product names and company names used in this manual are the registered trademarks of the individual companies.

Copyright

This manual is copyrighted with all rights reserved. Under the copyright laws, this manual may not be copied, reproduced or translated into another language, in whole or in part, without the written consent of Canon Inc.

COPYRIGHT © 2001 CANON INC.

Printed in Japan

Caution

Use of this manual should be strictly supervised to avoid disclosure of confidential information.

Symbols Used

This documentation uses the following symbols to indicate special information:

Symbol Description

Indicates an item of a non-specific nature, possibly classified as Note, Caution, or Warning.

Indicates an item requiring care to avoid electric shocks.

Indicates an item requiring care to avoid combustion (fire).

Indicates an item prohibiting disassembly to avoid electric shocks or problems.

Indicates an item requiring disconnection of the power plug from the electric outlet.

Memo

Indicates an item intended to provide notes assisting the understanding of the topic in question.

Indicates an item of reference assisting the understanding of the topic in question.

REF.

Provides a description of a service mode.

Provides a description of the nature of an error indication.

Introduction

Introduction

The following rules apply throughout this Service Manual:

1. Each chapter contains sections explaining the purpose of specific functions and the relationship between electrical and mechanical systems with reference to the timing of operation.

In the diagrams, represents the path of mechanical drive; where a signal name accompanies the symbol , the arrow direction of the electric signal.

indicates the

The expression "turn on the power" means flipping on the power switch, closing the front door, and closing the delivery unit door, which results in supplying the machine with power.

2. In the digital circuits, '1'is used to indicate that the voltage level of a given signal is "High", while '0' is used to indicate "Low".(The voltage value, however, differs from circuit to circuit.) In addition, the asterisk (*) as in "DRMD*" indicates that the DRMD signal goes on when '0'.

In practically all cases, the internal mechanisms of a microprocessor cannot be checked in the field. Therefore, the operations of the microprocessors used in the machines are not discussed: they are explained in terms of from sensors to the input of the DC controller PCB and from the output of the

DC controller PCB to the loads.

The descriptions in this Service Manual are subject to change without notice for product improvement or other purposes, and major changes will be communicated in the form of Service Information bulletins.

All service persons are expected to have a good understanding of the contents of this Service Manual and all relevant Service Information bulletins and be able to identify and isolate faults in the machine."

Contents

Contents

Chapter 1 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION

1.1 Product Overview .......................................................................................................................................1- 1

1.1.1 Product Overview .................................................................................................................................................... 1- 1

1.2 Features .....................................................................................................................................................1- 2

1.2.1

Features .................................................................................................................................................................. 1- 2

1.2.2 Printhead ................................................................................................................................................................. 1- 2

1.2.3 Ink Tank................................................................................................................................................................... 1- 2

1.2.4 Cutter....................................................................................................................................................................... 1- 3

1.2.5 Roll Holder............................................................................................................................................................... 1- 3

1.2.6 Stand (ST-34) .......................................................................................................................................................... 1- 4

1.2.7 Hard Disk Drive ....................................................................................................................................................... 1- 7

1.2.8

Consumables........................................................................................................................................................... 1- 7

1.3 Product Specifications ................................................................................................................................1- 8

1.3.1 Product Specifications ............................................................................................................................................. 1- 8

1.4 Detailed Specifications ...............................................................................................................................1- 9

1.4.1 Interface Specifications ........................................................................................................................................... 1- 9

1.5 Names and Functions of Components .....................................................................................................1- 11

1.5.1 Front ...................................................................................................................................................................... 1- 11

1.5.2 Side ....................................................................................................................................................................... 1- 12

1.5.3 Top Cover (Inside)................................................................................................................................................. 1- 13

1.5.4 Roll Unit Cover (Inside) ......................................................................................................................................... 1- 14

1.5.5

Carriage................................................................................................................................................................. 1- 14

1.5.6 Ink Tank Cover (Inside) ......................................................................................................................................... 1- 15

1.5.7 Stand (ST-34) ........................................................................................................................................................ 1- 16

1.6 Basic Operation ........................................................................................................................................1- 17

1.6.1

Operation Panel..................................................................................................................................................... 1- 17

1.6.2 Display................................................................................................................................................................... 1- 18

1.6.3 Menu...................................................................................................................................................................... 1- 19

1.7 Safety and Precautions ............................................................................................................................1- 39

1.7.1 Safety Precautions ................................................................................................................................................ 1- 39

1.7.1.1 Moving Parts .......................................................................................................................................................................... 1- 39

1.7.1.2 Adhesion of Ink ...................................................................................................................................................................... 1- 40

1.7.1.3 Electric Parts.......................................................................................................................................................................... 1- 41

1.7.2 Other Precautions.................................................................................................................................................. 1- 42

1.7.2.1 Printhead................................................................................................................................................................................ 1- 42

1.7.2.2

Ink Tank ................................................................................................................................................................................. 1- 43

1.7.2.3 Handling the Printer ............................................................................................................................................................... 1- 43

1.7.3

Precautions When Servicing Printer...................................................................................................................... 1- 45

1.7.3.1 Notes on the Data Stored in the Printer ................................................................................................................................. 1- 45

1.7.3.2

Confirming the Firmware Version .......................................................................................................................................... 1- 45

1.7.3.3 Precautions against Static Electricity ..................................................................................................................................... 1- 45

1.7.3.4 Precautions for Disassembly/Reassembly............................................................................................................................. 1- 45

1.7.3.5 Self-diagnostic Feature .......................................................................................................................................................... 1- 45

1.7.3.6 Disposing of the Lithium Battery ............................................................................................................................................ 1- 46

Chapter 2 TECHNICAL REFERENCE

2.1 Basic Operation Outline..............................................................................................................................2- 1

2.1.1 Printer Diagram ....................................................................................................................................................... 2- 1

2.1.2 Print Signal Sequence ............................................................................................................................................. 2- 2

2.1.3

Print Driving ............................................................................................................................................................. 2- 3

Contents

2.2 Firmware .................................................................................................................................................... 2- 5

2.2.1 Operation Sequence at Power-on............................................................................................................................2- 5

2.2.2

Operation Sequence at Power-off............................................................................................................................2- 6

2.2.3 Print Position Adjustment Function ..........................................................................................................................2- 7

2.2.4 Head Management ..................................................................................................................................................2- 7

2.2.5 Printhead Overheating Protection Control ...............................................................................................................2- 7

2.2.6 Pause between Pages .............................................................................................................................................2- 7

2.2.7 White Raster Skip ....................................................................................................................................................2- 7

2.2.8 Sleep Mode..............................................................................................................................................................2- 7

2.2.9

Shut Down Mode .....................................................................................................................................................2- 7

2.2.10 Hard Disk Drive ......................................................................................................................................................2- 8

2.3 Printer Mechanical System......................................................................................................................... 2- 9

2.3.1 Outline......................................................................................................................................................................2- 9

2.3.1.1

Outline...................................................................................................................................................................................... 2- 9

2.3.2 Ink Passage ...........................................................................................................................................................2- 10

2.3.2.1

Ink Passage ........................................................................................................................................................................... 2- 10

2.3.2.2 Ink Tank Unit.......................................................................................................................................................................... 2- 11

2.3.2.3 Carriage Unit.......................................................................................................................................................................... 2- 13

2.3.2.4 Printhead................................................................................................................................................................................ 2- 17

2.3.2.5 Purge Unit .............................................................................................................................................................................. 2- 18

2.3.2.6

Maintenance Cartridge........................................................................................................................................................... 2- 23

2.3.2.7 Air Flow .................................................................................................................................................................................. 2- 24

2.3.3

Paper Path .............................................................................................................................................................2- 26

2.3.3.1 Outline.................................................................................................................................................................................... 2- 26

2.3.3.2

Paper Path ............................................................................................................................................................................. 2- 27

2.3.3.3 Cutter Unit.............................................................................................................................................................................. 2- 29

2.4

Printer Electrical System .......................................................................................................................... 2- 30

2.4.1

Outline....................................................................................................................................................................2- 30

2.4.1.1 Overview ................................................................................................................................................................................ 2- 30

2.4.2

Main Controller.......................................................................................................................................................2- 32

2.4.2.1 Main controller PCB components .......................................................................................................................................... 2- 32

2.4.2.2

Connectors and Pin Arrangement of Main controller PCB..................................................................................................... 2- 34

2.4.2.3 HDD expansion PCB components......................................................................................................................................... 2- 41

2.4.3

Carriage Relay PCB...............................................................................................................................................2- 41

2.4.3.1 Carriage PCB components .................................................................................................................................................... 2- 41

2.4.3.2

Connectors and Pin Arrangement of Carriage PCB .............................................................................................................. 2- 42

2.4.4 Maintenance Cartridge Relay PCB ........................................................................................................................2- 46

2.4.4.1

Maintenance cartridge relay PCB components...................................................................................................................... 2- 46

2.4.5 Power Supply.........................................................................................................................................................2- 47

2.4.5.1 Power supply block diagram .................................................................................................................................................. 2- 47

2.4.5.2 Connectors and Pin Arrangement of Power supply PCB....................................................................................................... 2- 48

2.5 Detection Functions with Sensors ............................................................................................................ 2- 49

2.5.1 Covers....................................................................................................................................................................2- 49

2.5.2 Ink passage system ...............................................................................................................................................2- 50

2.5.3 Carriage system.....................................................................................................................................................2- 53

2.5.4 Paper path system .................................................................................................................................................2- 55

2.5.5

Others ....................................................................................................................................................................2- 57

Chapter 3 INSTALLATION

3.1 Transporting the Printer.............................................................................................................................. 3- 1

3.1.1 Transporting the Printer ...........................................................................................................................................3- 1

3.1.1.1 Transporting the Printer ........................................................................................................................................................... 3- 1

3.1.2 Reinstalling the Printer.............................................................................................................................................3- 6

3.1.2.1 Reinstalling the Printer............................................................................................................................................................. 3- 6

Chapter 4

DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY

Contents

4.1 Service Parts ..............................................................................................................................................4- 1

4.1.1 Service Parts ........................................................................................................................................................... 4- 1

4.2 Disassembly/Reassembly...........................................................................................................................4- 2

4.2.1

Disassembly/Reassembly ....................................................................................................................................... 4- 2

4.3 Points to Note on Disassembly and Reassembly .......................................................................................4- 2

4.3.1 Note: Items that should never be disassembled...................................................................................................... 4- 2

4.3.2 Moving the carriage manually.................................................................................................................................. 4- 2

4.3.3 Units requiring draining of ink .................................................................................................................................. 4- 3

4.3.4 External Covers ....................................................................................................................................................... 4- 4

4.3.5 Drive Unit............................................................................................................................................................... 4- 15

4.3.6 Cutter..................................................................................................................................................................... 4- 19

4.3.7

Purge Unit.............................................................................................................................................................. 4- 21

4.3.8 Ink Tank Unit ......................................................................................................................................................... 4- 25

4.3.9 Ink Tube Unit ......................................................................................................................................................... 4- 29

4.3.10

Waste Ink Collection Unit..................................................................................................................................... 4- 33

4.3.11 Multi Sensor......................................................................................................................................................... 4- 38

4.3.12 Linear Encoder .................................................................................................................................................... 4- 39

4.3.13 Head Management Sensor.................................................................................................................................. 4- 44

4.3.14

PCBs.................................................................................................................................................................... 4- 45

4.3.15 Opening/Closing the Ink Supply Valve ................................................................................................................ 4- 46

4.3.16 Draining the ink.................................................................................................................................................... 4- 47

4.4 Applying the Grease .................................................................................................................................4- 48

4.4.1

Applying the Grease .............................................................................................................................................. 4- 48

4.5 Adjustment and Setup Items ....................................................................................................................4- 52

4.5.1 Adjustment Item List .............................................................................................................................................. 4- 52

4.5.2 Procedure after Replacing the Carriage Unit or Multi Sensor ............................................................................... 4- 52

4.5.3 Procedure after Replacing the Feed Roller or Feed Roller Encoder ..................................................................... 4- 52

4.5.4 Procedure after Replacing the Head Management Sensor................................................................................... 4- 52

Chapter 5 MAINTENANCE

5.1 Periodic Replacement Parts .......................................................................................................................5- 1

5.1.1 Periodic Replacement Parts .................................................................................................................................... 5- 1

5.2 Consumable Parts ......................................................................................................................................5- 1

5.2.1 Consumable Parts ................................................................................................................................................... 5- 1

5.3

Periodic Maintenance .................................................................................................................................5- 3

5.3.1

Periodic Maintenance .............................................................................................................................................. 5- 3

Chapter 6 TROUBLESHOOTING

6.1 Troubleshooting..........................................................................................................................................6- 1

6.1.1 Outline ..................................................................................................................................................................... 6- 1

6.1.1.1 Outline of Troubleshooting....................................................................................................................................................... 6- 1

6.2

Error Code ..................................................................................................................................................6- 1

6.2.1 Outline ..................................................................................................................................................................... 6- 1

6.2.1.1 Outline...................................................................................................................................................................................... 6- 1

6.2.2

Warning Table ......................................................................................................................................................... 6- 2

6.2.2.1 Warnings.................................................................................................................................................................................. 6- 2

6.2.3

Error Table............................................................................................................................................................... 6- 6

6.2.3.1 Errors ....................................................................................................................................................................................... 6- 6

6.2.4 Sevice Call Table................................................................................................................................................... 6- 17

6.2.4.1 Service Call Errors ................................................................................................................................................................. 6- 17

6.3 Service Software ......................................................................................................................................6- 18

6.3.1 L Printer Service Tool ............................................................................................................................................ 6- 18

6.4

Firmware Update Tool ..............................................................................................................................6- 22

6.4.1

imagePROGRAF Firmware Update Tool .............................................................................................................. 6- 22

Contents

6.5 Service Tools............................................................................................................................................ 6- 24

6.5.1 Tool List .................................................................................................................................................................6- 24

Chapter 7

SERVICE MODE

7.1 Service Mode ............................................................................................................................................. 7- 1

7.1.1

Service Mode Operation ..........................................................................................................................................7- 1

7.1.2 Map of the Service Mode .........................................................................................................................................7- 2

7.1.3 Details of Service Mode .........................................................................................................................................7- 10

7.1.4 e-Maintenance/imageWARE Remote ....................................................................................................................7- 28

7.1.5 Viewing PRINT INF................................................................................................................................................7- 38

7.2 Special Mode............................................................................................................................................ 7- 53

7.2.1 Special Modes for Servicing ..................................................................................................................................7- 53

Chapter 1 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION

Contents

Contents

1.1 Product Overview ..........................................................................................................................................................1-1

1.1.1 Product Overview ........................................................................................................................................................................ 1-1

1.2 Features ..........................................................................................................................................................................1-2

1.2.1 Features ........................................................................................................................................................................................ 1-2

1.2.2 Printhead ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 1-2

1.2.3 Ink Tank ....................................................................................................................................................................................... 1-2

1.2.4 Cutter............................................................................................................................................................................................ 1-3

1.2.5 Roll Holder................................................................................................................................................................................... 1-3

1.2.6 Stand (ST-34)............................................................................................................................................................................... 1-4

1.2.7 Hard Disk Drive........................................................................................................................................................................... 1-7

1.2.8 Consumables ................................................................................................................................................................................ 1-7

1.3 Product Specifications....................................................................................................................................................1-8

1.3.1 Product Specifications ................................................................................................................................................................. 1-8

1.4 Detailed Specifications ..................................................................................................................................................1-9

1.4.1 Interface Specifications................................................................................................................................................................ 1-9

1.5 Names and Functions of Components .........................................................................................................................1-11

1.5.1 Front........................................................................................................................................................................................... 1-11

1.5.2 Side ............................................................................................................................................................................................ 1-12

1.5.3 Top Cover (Inside)..................................................................................................................................................................... 1-13

1.5.4 Roll Unit Cover (Inside) ............................................................................................................................................................ 1-14

1.5.5 Carriage...................................................................................................................................................................................... 1-14

1.5.6 Ink Tank Cover (Inside)............................................................................................................................................................. 1-15

1.5.7 Stand (ST-34)............................................................................................................................................................................. 1-16

1.6 Basic Operation............................................................................................................................................................1-17

1.6.1 Operation Panel.......................................................................................................................................................................... 1-17

1.6.2 Display ....................................................................................................................................................................................... 1-18

1.6.3 Menu .......................................................................................................................................................................................... 1-19

1.7 Safety and Precautions .................................................................................................................................................1-39

1.7.1 Safety Precautions...................................................................................................................................................................... 1-39

1.7.1.1 Moving Parts .................................................................................................................................................................................................1-39

1.7.1.2 Adhesion of Ink.............................................................................................................................................................................................1-40

1.7.1.3 Electric Parts .................................................................................................................................................................................................1-41

1.7.2 Other Precautions....................................................................................................................................................................... 1-42

1.7.2.1 Printhead .......................................................................................................................................................................................................1-42

1.7.2.2 Ink Tank ........................................................................................................................................................................................................1-43

1.7.2.3 Handling the Printer ......................................................................................................................................................................................1-43

1.7.3 Precautions When Servicing Printer .......................................................................................................................................... 1-45

1.7.3.1 Notes on the Data Stored in the Printer.........................................................................................................................................................1-45

1.7.3.2 Confirming the Firmware Version ................................................................................................................................................................1-45

1.7.3.3 Precautions against Static Electricity ............................................................................................................................................................1-45

1.7.3.4 Precautions for Disassembly/Reassembly.....................................................................................................................................................1-45

1.7.3.5 Self-diagnostic Feature..................................................................................................................................................................................1-45

1.7.3.6 Disposing of the Lithium Battery..................................................................................................................................................................1-46

Chapter 1

1.1 Product Overview

1.1.1 Product Overview

0031-2476

This printer is capable of printing on A4- to A0-size cut sheets and its maximum print width is 36 inches. This printer is a desktop large-format printer five-colors

(dye- and pigment-based colors) printer that can be used to print CAD and office documents as well as handy POP and posters.

[3] [14]

[15]

[1]

[2]

[3]

[4]

[6]

[5]

[13]

[16]

[6]

[7]

[9] [8]

[12] [11] [10]

[1] Roll media cover

[2] Media loading slot

[3] Roll media temporary table

[4] Release lever

[5] Operation panel

[6] Ink tank cover

[7] Media alignment line

[8] Maintenance cartridge cover

F-1-1

[9] Maintenance cartridge

[10] Cutter unit

[11] Cutter rail

[12] Paper eject slot

[13] Output guide

[14] Upper cover

[15] Width guide

[16] Stand

1-1

Chapter 1

1.2 Features

1.2.1 Features

0031-2477

- High resolutions of 2,400 x 1,200 dpi maximum, coupled with the exceptionally light-fast, water-proof and ozone-proof five-color pigment inks of Y, M, C, PBK and MBK, deliver high-quality photographic picture quality.

- Black ink suitable for the selected media type is automatically selected from two types of black ink, "black ink" for vivid and glossy printing and "matte black ink" for matte and high-quality printing.

- A 160-by-128-dot-large LCD

- One-inch wide printhead having 2,560 nozzles per color, which are as many as the those of the existing models. High-density printhead technology "FINE" that can satisfy both of beautiful and fast printing requirements of a high order is employed for accurate ejection of ultrasmall 4-pl drops of ink to the target positions.

Prints with 2,400 x 1,200 dpi resolution can be made at a high speed.

- Imaging processor "L-COA" incorporated for high-speed image data processing. High-speed processing of 5-color, 12-bit large-size images and printer control for high-accuracy operation of high-density head can be performed with a single chip.

- Standard support for 10Base-T/100Base-TX/1000Base-T and USB 2.0 Hi-Speed.

- Borderless printing on and auto cutting of roll media.

- The hard disk is installed for better print job management.

- All operations such as loading the roll media and cassette paper can be carried out at the front (top) of the printer.

- The printer can be installed with its back in touch with the wall, requiring no installation space at the back of the printer.

- A subtank mounted at the ink port allows you to replace the ink tank during printing.

- The pressure of suction from the borderless printing ink catch groove changes automatically with the media size, preventing shift of media edges and staining of the backside of the media.

- A printhead having nozzles (I-shaped nozzle) with a new shape reduces ink mist, ensuring superfine printing.

- Data scanned using CanoScan can be easily printed on large-size paper just like a dedicated copier. Just pressing the Start button allows you to blow up an original of up to A3 size in collaboration with Canon Image RUNNER.

- Compatibility with e-maintenance/imageWARE Remote allows centralized management of customers' printer information.

Functional enhancements new to this model include:

- Compatible with a large-capacity 300-ml ink tank in addition to the existing 130-ml ink tank.

1.2.2 Printhead

The printhead that mounts on the carriage is an integrated six-color disposable printhead.

It has 5,120 nozzles for MBK and 2,560 nozzles for each additional color arranged in a staggered pattern.

If print quality remains unimproved even after a specified cleaning operation, replace the printhead.

0013-2741

F-1-2

1.2.3 Ink Tank

The ink tank is disposable.

There are four dye-based ink colors (black, cyan, magenta, and yellow) and one pigment-based ink color (matte black).

The two types of ink tanks (130 ml and 300 ml ink tank) are available for each color.

This printer features a mechanism by which only the correct color ink tank will fit in the given slot.

When the message that ink tank is empty is displayed, replace the ink tank with a new one.

0031-2479

F-1-3

1-2

1.2.4 Cutter

The cutter attached to the cutter unit is a round cutter.

Chapter 1

0023-1309

F-1-4

1.2.5 Roll Holder

The roller holder accepts paper tubes having inside diameters of both 2 and 3 inches. It is furnished with attachments for 2- and 3-inch diameter paper tubes.

The roll holder clamps the paper tube of a roll not exceeding 150 mm in outside diameter from the inside.

0023-1308

[2-inch paper tube attachment]

[3-inch paper tube attachment R]

F-1-5

F-1-6

F-1-7

[3-inch paper tube attachment L]

F-1-8

1-3

Chapter 1

1.2.6 Stand (ST-34)

0027-2228

The stand [1] is equipped with casters so that the printer can be easily moved. The output stacker [2] included with stand can use by the three ways of the regular position or two extended positions.

[1]

[2]

F-1-9

MEMO:

- When delivering the printing to the output stacker: Use the position [A].

- When not using the output stacker or moving the printer: Use the position [B]. When moving the printer, raise the auxiliary rod to the position of extended position.

The output stacker may touch the floor and be soiled or damaged.

[A]

[B]

F-1-10

[Regular position]

F-1-11

1-4

[Extended position A]

F-1-12

- Changing from the regular position to extended position A.

1) Raise the auxiliary rod [1] to the position [A] of the illustration to change to the extended position A.

[A]

[1]

F-1-13

2) Pull out the switching stopper [1] when using roll paper that is A1 size or has a width of 24 inches.

F-1-14

[1]

[Extended position B]

F-1-15

Chapter 1

1-5

Chapter 1

- Changing from the regular position to extended position B.

1) Grasp the output stacker handle [1] to set the guide as shown in the following illustration.

[1]

2) Open the output stacker ejection guides [1] toward the front.

F-1-16

[1]

F-1-17

- Changing from the extended position B to regular position.

1) Close the output stacker ejection guides [1] and pull the output stacker release lever [2] forward to release the lock, and then grasp the output stacker handle [3] to return the guide.

[2]

[1]

[3]

F-1-18

1-6

Chapter 1

1.2.7 Hard Disk Drive

0017-8472

Each print job received from the host computer is saved to the hard disk drive(serial ATA connection) attached to the printer, so the printer can print the job repeatedly as needed, without having to wait for its retransmission from the host computer.

Saving print jobs will offer the following benefits:

- Eased computer workload

A print job may be automatically preserved to the hard disk when printing or may be preserved to the hard disk without printing. A print job preserved can be printed in as many copies as needed without having to use the host computer.

- Reprinting after error occurrence

If the printer encounters errors, such as paper out, while printing a print job, it can resume the print operation as soon as the errors are cleared, without needing its retransmission from the host computer.

- Higher print work efficiency

Print jobs can be printed selectively or in a specified number of copies without using a host computer. Multiple print jobs can be printed batched. Unattended print operations in the nighttime are also possible.

1.2.8 Consumables

Printhead

The consumable printhead is the same as that supplied with the printer.

0031-2480

F-1-19

Ink Tanks

The consumable ink tanks are available in five colors (matte black, black, cyan, magenta and yellow).

F-1-20

Maintenance Cartridge

The consumable maintenance cartridge is the same as that supplied with the printer.

F-1-21

1-7

Chapter 1

1.3 Product Specifications

1.3.1 Product Specifications

Type

Feeding system

Feeding capacity

Delivery method

Sheet delivery capability

Cutter

Type of media

Supported thickness

Media size (Roll media)

Media size (Cut sheet)

Printable area (Roll media)

Printable area (Cut sheet)

Printing recommendation area

(Roll media)

Printing recommendation area

(Cut sheet)

Memory

Hard disk drive

Firmware

Interface

Bubble jet large-sized paper printer (stand model)

Roll media: manual feed from top

Cut sheet: manual feed from top

- Roll media: 1 roll madia (Outer diameter of roll: 150 mm or less/Inner diameter of paper tube: 2 or 3 inches)

- Cut sheet: 1 sheet

Forward delivery, face up

Stacking to the output stacker of the stand

- 1 sheet: when using in the regular position

- approximate 20 sheets: when using in the extended position (However, it has the following restrictions.)

when using in the extended position/extended position A: paper length

A0/36"X48" or A1/24"X36" size plain paper or recycled paper

when using in the extended position B: paper length A1/36"X24" or A2/

24"X18" size plain paper or recycled paper

Automatic cross-cutter (round blade)

Roll Media:

Plain Paper, Plain Paper (High Quality), Plain Paper (High Grade),

Coated Paper, Heavyweight Coated Paper, Premium Matte Paper,

Premium Glossy Paper 200, Premium Semi-Glossy Paper 200, Premium

Glossy Paper 280, Premium Semi-Glossy Paper 280, Back Light Film,

Economy Bond Paper, Universal Bond Paper, Matte Coated Paper

170gsm, Premium RC Photo Luster, Durable Backlit Film, High

Resolution Coated Paper, Matte Coated Paper 90gsm, Glossy

Photographic Paper 190gsm, Glossy Photographic Paper 240gsm, Satin

Photographic Paper 240gsm, Glossy Photographic Paper 270gsm, Satin

Photographic Paper 270gsm, HW Glossy Photo Paper, HW Satin Photo

Paper, Commercial Proofing Paper, Standard Paper1569B 80g, Standard

Paper1570B 90g, Matt Coated Paper 9171, Matt Coated Paper 7215,

Matt Coated Paper 140g, Opaque Paper White, Hi Res Graphic Paper, Hi

Res Barrier Paper, Photo Realistic Paper 210g, Photo paper Pearl 260g,

Glossy Proofing Paper 195g, Semiglossy Proofing Paper 195g,

Semiglossy Proofing Paper 255g

Cut Paper:

Plain Paper, Plain Paper (High Quality), Plain Paper (High Grade),

Coated Paper, Premiun Matte Paper, Premium Glossy Paper 280,

Premium Semi-Glossy Paper 280, High Resolution Paper, Matte Photo

Paper, Glossy Photo Paper GP-501, Photo Paper Plus Glossy 2, Photo

Paper Pro Platium, Photo Paper Plus Semi-Gloss, Universal Bond Paper,

Premium RC Photo Luster, High Resolution Coated Paper, Matt Coated

Paper 7215, Matt Coated Paper 140g

0.07mm to 0.8mm

Width: 254.0mm (10") to 914.4mm (36")

Length: 203.2mm (8") to 18m (709") *1

Outer diameter of roll :150mm or less

*1: The maximum amount of length may vary by the using operating system or the applications.

Width: 203.2mm (8") to 917.0mm

Length: 279.4mm (11") to 1600mm (63") *1

*1: The maximum amount of length may vary by the using operating system or the applications.

Internal area, excluding a 3-mm top, bottom and left and right margins.

Borderless printing: 0 mm from the leading edge, trailing edge, and left and right edges.

* The printable area may vary with each type of paper media used.

Width of media allowing borderless printing:

36"(914.4mm), A0(841.0mm), B1(728.0mm), 24"(609.6mm),

A1(594.0mm), B2(515.0mm), 17"(431.8mm), A2(420.0mm),

14"(355.6mm), 300mm, A3(297.0mm), B4(257.0mm), 10"(254mm)

Internal area, excluding a 3-mm top margin, a 23-mm bottom margin and

3-mm left and right margins.

* The printable area may vary with each type of paper media used.

Internal area, excluding a 20-mm top margin, a 5-mm bottom margin and

5-mm left and right margins.

Internal area, excluding a 20-mm top margin, a 23-mm bottom margin and 5-mm left and right margins.

256MB

Increase of memory: none

320GB (2.5inch, 5,400rpm)

Flash ROM (update from USB or Ethernet)

- Printer description language

GARO (Graphic Arts language with Raster Operation), HP-GL/2, HP-

RTL

USB2.0 Hi-Speed

Network (10Base-T/100Base-TX/1000Base-T)

1-8

0031-2496

Operation panel

Printhead/Ink Tank type

Printhead

Ink tank

Detection functions (Cover system)

Detection functions (Ink passage system)

Detection functions (Carriage system)

LCD (160 X 128 dots), 13 keys, 5 LEDs

- Panel language

English

- Message language

English, German, French, Italian, Spanish, Chinese, Korean, Russianand and Japanese

Printhead and separate ink tanks

PF-04

Structure: Integrated six-color assembly

Number of nozzles: 5,120 for MBK, 2,560 for other each color

[PFI-107/8107] MBK, BK, C, M, Y

[PFI-207/8207] MBK, BK, C, M, Y

Ink type: Pigment ink (MBK)

Dye ink (BK, C, M, Y)

Ink tank capacity: [PFI-107/8107] 130 ml

[PFI-207/8207] 300 ml

(Ink tanks supplied with the printer contain 90 ml of each color.)

Upper cover open/closed detection: Yes

Ink tank cover open/closed detection: Yes

Ink tank presence/absence detection: Yes

Remaining ink level detection (dot count and electrode): Yes

Maintenance cartridge presence/absence detection: Yes

Used ink tank full detection: Yes

Ink supply Valve open/closed detection: Yes

Printhead presence/absence detection: Yes

Carriage position detection: Yes

Carriage home position detection: Yes

Printhead temperature detection: Yes

Printhead height detection: Yes

Non-discharging nozzle detection: Yes

Non-discharging nozzle backup feature: Yes

Ambient temperature/humidity detection: Yes

Detection functions (Paper path system)

Operating noise

Paper presence/absence detection: Yes

Paper width detection: Yes

Skew detection: Yes

Paper leading edge and trailing edge detection: Yes

Release lever position detection: Yes

Remaining roll media detection: Yes

Feed roller rotation detection: Yes

Roll holder rotation detection: Yes

Cutter position detection: Yes

Operating: Approx. 48dB (A) or less

Standby: Approx. 35dB (A) or less

Operating environment

Print quality guaranteed environment

Temperature: 15 to 30 degrees centigrade

Humidity: 10% to 80%RH without dew condensation

Temperature: 15 to 30 degrees centigrade

Humidity: 10% to 80%RH

Power supply

100-240 VAC (50/60 Hz)

Power consumption (Maximum)

During printing: Max. 140 W

Power consumption

Printer unit dimensions

(WxDxH)

In power save (sleep) mode:

4W or less

During standby: 0.5W or less

1304mm(W) x 887mm(D) x 1062mm(H) (with ST-34 stand and opening the output stacker)

1304mm(W) x 1100mm(D) x 1062mm(H) (with ST-34 stand and setting to the extended position B)

Weight

Approx. 68.1 kg (with stand and without printhead and ink tank)

1.4 Detailed Specifications

1.4.1 Interface Specifications a. USB (standard)

(1) Interface type

USB 2.0 Hi-Speed (Full speed (12 Mbits/sec), High speed (480 Mbits/sec))

(2) Data transfer system

Control transfer

Bulk transfer

(3) Signal level

Compliant with the USB standard.

(4) Interface cable

Twisted-pair shielded cable, 5.0 m max.

Compliant with the USB standard.

Wire materials: AWG No.28, data wire pair (AWF: American Wire Gauge)

AWG No.20 to No.28, power distribution wire pair

(5) Interface connector

Printer side: Series B receptacle compliant with USB standard

Cable side: Series B plug compliant with USB standard

b. Network (standard)

(1) Interface type

Interface compliant with IEEE802.3

(2) Data transfer system

IEEE802.0 10Base-T, IEEE802.3u 100Base-TX/Auto-Negotiation, IEEE802.3ab 1000Base-T/Auto-Negotiation, IEEE802.3x Full Duplex

(3) Interface cable

Chapter 1

0023-2577

1-9

Chapter 1

Category 5 (UTP or FTP) cable, 100 m or shorter

Compliant with ANSI/EIA/TIA-568A or ANSI/EIA/TIA-568B

(4) Interface connector

Printer side: Compliant with IEEE802.3, ANSI X3.263, ISO/IEC60603-7

(5) Protocol

IPX/SPX (Netware4.2(J), 5.1(J), 6.0(J)), SNMP, TCP/IP(IPv4/IPv6), AppleTalk, HTTP

1-10

1.5 Names and Functions of Components

1.5.1 Front

[3] [14]

[15] [1]

[2]

[3]

[4]

[6]

[5]

[13]

[16]

[6]

[7]

[9] [8]

[12] [11] [10]

F-1-22

[1] Roll media cover

Open this cover, and then load roll media.

[2] Media loading slot

Insert media in this slot to load it.

[3] Roll media temporary table

When loading roll media, place the roll holder here and then insert the media in the roll holder slot.

[4] Release lever

When releasing the paper retainer, press this lever backward.

[5] Operation panel

Use this panel to operate the printer or check the printer status.

[6] Ink tank cover

Open this cover to replace the ink tank.

[7] Media alignment line

This orange line is used to align media.

[8] Maintenance cartridge cover

Open this cover to replace the maintenance cartridge.

[9] Maintenance cartridge

This cartridge absorbs the ink used for maintenance. (Replace it when it becomes full of ink.)

[10] Cutter unit

This cutter with a round blade is used to cut roll media automatically.

[11] Cutter rail

The cutter unit moves on this rail to cut media.

[12] Paper eject slot

All printouts are ejected from this slot.

[13] Output guide

A printout is ejected along this guide.

[14] Upper cover

Open this cover to install the printhead or remove the media jammed inside the printer.

[15] Width guide

When loading cassette paper, move this guide according to the paper size.

[16] Stand

Install the printer on this stand. This stand has casters for easy relocation.

Chapter 1

0031-2505

1-11

Chapter 1

1.5.2 Side

[1]

0031-2506

[4]

[2]

[3]

[5]

[4] [4]

F-1-23

[1] Manual pocket

Store the printer manual in this pocket.

[2] Ethernet connector

Connect the Ethernet cable to this connector. The lamp lights when the Ethernet cable is connected properly and the printer is ready to communicate accordingly.

[3] USB port

Connect the USB cable to this port. This port is compatible with the high-speed USB.

[4] Carrying handles

Three carrying handles provided at the left, right, and back allows three persons to carry the printer.

[5] Power receptacle

Plug the power cord into this receptacle.

1-12

1.5.3 Top Cover (Inside)

[7]

Chapter 1

0031-2507

[1]

[2]

[3]

[4]

[6]

[5]

F-1-24

[1] Carriage

The carriage moves the printhead. It is an important component used for printing.

[2] Carriage shaft

The carriage moves on this shaft.

[3] Paper retainer

This is an important component used to feed paper. It retains paper.

[4] Platen

The printhead moves on this component to perform printing. Suction holes are provided on the platen surface to prevent media from floating.

[5] Borderless printing ink catch groove

Ink flowed out of the paper edges enter in this groove during borderless printing.

[6] Linear scale

This is an important component used to detect the carriage position. Never touch it when cleaning the parts or removing jammed media inside the upper cover.

[7] Cleaner brush

Use this brush to remove paper dust off the platen when cleaning the parts inside the upper cover.

1-13

Chapter 1

1.5.4 Roll Unit Cover (Inside)

[3] [4]

[4] [3]

[1]

[2]

[1] Roll holder

Load roll media in this holder.

[2] Holder stopper

Use this part to secure roll media to the roll holder.

[3] Slide guide

Move the roll holder along this guide.

[4] Roll holder slot

Fit the roll holder in this slot.

1.5.5 Carriage

F-1-25

[4] [1]

0031-2508

0023-1267

1-14

[3] [2]

F-1-26

[1] Slant adjusting lever

This lever is used to fine adjust slant of rules lines.

[2] Printhead

The printhead has nozzles. It is an important component used to perform printing.

[3] Printhead fixer lever

This lever is used to lock the printhead fixer cover.

[4] Printhead fixer cover

This cover is used to secure the printhead.

1.5.6 Ink Tank Cover (Inside)

[Left Ink Tank Unit]

[1]

[3]

[4]

[2]

[Right Ink Tank Unit]

F-1-27

[1]

[3]

[4]

[2]

F-1-28

[1] Ink tank lock lever

This lever is used to protect and lock the ink tank. Open/close this lever when replacing the ink tank.

[2] Ink color label

Load each ink tank according to the label color and name.

[3] Ink tank lamp (red)

When the ink tank is opened, the ink tank lamp illuminates as follows:

- Stays lit

The ink tank is loaded properly.

- Not lit

No ink tank is loaded or the remaining ink detection function is disabled.

- Blinking slow

Only a small amount of ink remains in the ink tank.

- Blinking fast

No ink remains in the ink tank.

[4] Ink tank

This is a cartridge containing ink of each color.

Chapter 1

0031-2509

1-15

Chapter 1

1.5.7 Stand (ST-34)

0027-2234

[2]

[6]

[5]

[1]

[8]

OFF

[7]

[3]

[4]

ON

F-1-29

[1] Accessory pocket

Store the printer accessories.

[2] Output stacker

Ejected printouts are collected in this output stacker.

[3] Lockable caster

This caster can be locked.

When relocating the printer, be sure to unlock all four casters. Moving the printer with the casters locked can damage the floor.

[4] Switching stopper

Pull out depending on the paper size when using the output stacker in the extended position A.

[5] Paper guide

This guide is used to lead the ejected printout to the output stacker.

[6] Output stacker handle

This handle is grasped and supports the sliding output stacker when putting the output stacker into extended position B and returning it to the regular position.

[7] Output stacker release lever

Pull this lever towards you to release extended position B.

[8] Output stacker ejection guide

This guide supports the paper that is output when using the output stacker in extended position B.

1-16

Chapter 1

1.6 Basic Operation

1.6.1 Operation Panel

This section explains the functions of the buttons and the meanings of the LEDs on the operation panel.

[1]

[15]

[14]

[13]

[12]

[11]

[10]

Data

Message

Load Feed Cut

Power

Menu

Back

OK

Stop

Navigate

[9]

[2]

[3]

[4]

[5]

[6]

0031-2510

[8]

[7]

F-1-30

[1] Display

Printer menus, statuses, and messages are shown on this display.

[2] Data reception lamp (green)

- Blinking: When the printer is making prints, this lamp indicates that a print job is being received or processed. When the printer is not making prints, this lamp indicates that the print job is suspended or the firmware data is being received.

- Not lit: This lamp indicates that there is no print job.

[3] Message lamp (orange)

- Stays lit: A warning message is being displayed.

- Blinking: An error message is being displayed.

- Not lit: The printer is normal or not powered.

[4] [Power] button (green)

Use this button to turn on or off the printer.

When the printer is powered or in the sleep mode, the [Power] button lamp stays lit.

[5] [Stop] button

Use this button to stop execution of a job or drying ink.

[6] [Navi] button

Use this key to confirm the procedures for loading/unloading media, replacing an ink tank, and replacing the printhead.

[7] Direction buttons

- button: Pressing this button on the [tab selection screen] moves the tab. When a menu requiring you to enter a value is selected, pressing this button allows you to move to the left-hand digit.

- button: Pressing this button in a menu displays the upper item or setting value.

- button: Pressing this button on the [tab selection screen] moves the tab. When a menu requiring you to enter a value is selected, pressing this button allows you to move to the right-hand digit.

- button: Pressing this button in a menu displays the lower item or setting value.

[8] [OK] button

Pressing this button on the [tab selection screen] displays the menu for the displayed tab.

In the menu for a tab, pressing this button at the item preceded by [+] allows you to move to the bottom layer of menu items, where you can execute a menu item or set values. Also press this button when a message asking you to press the [OK] button is shown on the display.

[9] [Back] button

Pressing this button displays the preceding screen.

[10] [Menu] button

Pressing this button displays the [tab selection screen] screen.

[11] [Media Change] button

Press this button when loading/replacing media.

[12] [Media Feed] button

When roll media is loaded, pressing this button allows you to change the media position.

[13] [Media Cut] button

When roll media is loaded, pressing this button cuts the media.

[14] [Cut Sheet] lamp (green)

This lamp stays lit when cut sheet is selected as a media type.

[15] [Roll Media] lamp (green)

This lamp stays lit when roll media is selected as a media type.

MEMO:

When the printer is in the sleep mode, pressing any button other than the [Power] button wakes up the printer.

1-17

Chapter 1

1.6.2 Display

When the printer starts, the [tab selection screen] appears on the display.

There are four types of tabs on which the relevant printer status, menu, and error information are displayed.

The tab appears as the icon to the top field of display. The tab moves by key or key.

[1]

[2] [3] [4]

0023-1271

[A]

[B]

[C]

F-1-31

[1] Media tab

This tab shows the printer status and menu related to media. When this tab is shown in reverse video, pressing the [OK] button displays the [Media] menu.

-[A] Top field of display: Shows the media icon in reverse video.

-[B] Middle field of display: Shows the printer status and a menu name.

-[C] Bottom field of display: Shows the media type in the first row and the media size in the second row.

[2] Ink tab

This tab shows the printer status and menu related to ink. When this tab is shown in reverse video, pressing the [OK] button displays the [Ink] menu.

-[A] Top field of display: Shows the ink icon in reverse video.


-[C] Bottom field of display: Shows the remaining ink levels of the ink tanks loaded in the printer.

[3] Job tab

This tab shows the printer status and menu related to the print job. When this tab is shown in reverse video, pressing the [OK] button displays the [Job] menu.

-[A] Top field of display: Shows the job icon in reverse video.


[4] Setup/Adjustment tab

This tab shows the printer status and menu related to setup/adjustment. When this tab is shown in reverse video, pressing the [OK] button displays the [Setup/

Adjustment] menu.

-[A] Top field of display: Shows the setup/adjustment icon in reverse video.


-[C] Bottom field of display: Shows the remaining ink level of the maintenance cartridge.

1-18

Chapter 1

1.6.3 Menu

0031-2511

The printer has a Main menu which includes a menu related to maintenance such as adjustment of ink ejection position of each nozzle and head cleaning, a menu related to printing settings such as auto cutting and ink drying time, and a menu related to parameters such as a message language.

1. Menu Operation a) Displaying menu on each tab

Press the key or key on the [Tab Selection] screen to select a tab, and press the [OK] key.

A menu associated with each tab is displayed.

Press the key or key to select a menu and press the [OK] key.

The menu is selected and menu items are displayed.

Select a menu with [+] on the left side and press the [OK] key to navigate to lower level menus.

b) Setting menu items

Press the key or key to select an item to set and press the [OK] key.

The item is checked on the left side check box to confirm that it is set.

After 2 seconds, the menu that is one level above is displayed.

c) Setting numeric value for a menu item

Proceed as follows to set a numeric value for an item such as network settings.

1. Press the key or key to move the underscore to the field you want to enter a numeric value.

2. Press the key or key to enter a numeric value.

3. Repeat steps 1 and 2 and press the [OK] key when finished.

1-19

Chapter 1

2. Main Menu

The structure and settings of the main menu is as follows. The asterisk mark "*" is default setting.

[Paper Menu]

First Level

[Load Paper]

Second Level

[Roll Paper]

[Cut Sheet]

Third Level

[Eject Paper]

[Chg. Paper Type]

[Chg. Paper Size]

[ManageRemainRoll]

[Pap. Detail Set]

Fourth Level

[Roll Paper]

[Cut Sheet]

[Cut Sheet Size]

(The paper type is displayed here.)


(The size of paper is displayed here.)

[CustomPaperSize]

(Set the length) [Roll Length]*1

[Off]*

[On]


[Head Height]

[Crooked Chk Lv.]

[Cutting Mode]

[Cut Speed]

[Trim Edge First]

[CutDustReduct.]

[VacuumStrngth]

(Set the length)

[Automatic]*

[Highest]

[High]

[Standard]

[Low]

[Lowest]

[High Accuracy]

[Standard]*

[Loose]

[Off]

[Automatic]

[Eject]*

[Manual]

[Fast]

[Standard]

[Slow]*

[Automatic]*

[Off]

[On (Preset Len)]

[On (Input Length)]

[Manual]

[Off]*

[On]

[Automatic]*

[Strongest]

[Strong]

[Standard]

[Weak]

[Weakest]

Fifth Level

1-20

First Level

[Paper Details]

[Pap. Detail Print]

[Keep Paper Type]

Second Level


Third Level

[Scan Wait Time]

[Roll DryingTime]

[NearEnd RollMrgn]

[NearEnd Sht Mrgn]

[BordlessOversize]

[Width Detection]

[Return Defaults]

Fourth Level

[Dry time]

Fifth Level

[Off]*

[1 sec.]

[3 sec.]

[5 sec.]

[7 sec.]

[9 sec.]

[Entire area]*

[Leading edge]

[Area]*16

[Off]*

[30 sec.]

[1 min.]

[3 min.]

[5 min.]

[10 min.]

[30 min.]

[60 min.]

[3mm]*

[20mm]

[3mm]*

[20mm]

[Standard]*

[Reduced]

[Off]

[On]*

[Off]*

[On]

Chapter 1

1-21

Chapter 1

[Ink Menu]

First Level

[Rep. Ink Tank]

[Head Cleaning A]

[Job Menu]

First Level

[Print Job]*14

[Stored Job]*14

Second Level Third Level Fourth Level Fifth Level

[Job Log]

[Print Job Log]

[Pause Print]

[HDD Information]*14

(Mailbox List is displayed here.)

Second Level Third Level

(Job List is displayed here.) (Select Print Job.)

(Enter a password if one has been set.)

Fourth Level

[Delete]

[Preempt Jobs]*3

[Job List]

[Print Job List]

(Choose from information about the latest three print jobs.)

[Document Name]

[User Name]

[Page Count]

[Job Status]

[Print Start Time]

[Print End Time]

[Print Time]

[Print Size]

[Media Type]

[Interface]

[OK]

[CANCELED]

[yyyy/mm/dd hh:mm:ss]

[yyyy/mm/dd hh:mm:ss]

[xxxsec.]

[xxxxxxxxsq.mm]

[USB]

[Network]

[HDD]*14

(Indicates the ink color.) [Ink Consumed]

[Print settings]

[Head Height]

[Temp./Humidity]

[Adjustment reg.]

[Off]*

[On]

(Total capacity and Box free space are displayed here.)

[Print]

[Delete]

Fifth Level

[xxx.xxx ml]

1-22

[Set./Adj. Menu]

First Level

[Test Print]

[Adjust Printer]

[Maintenance]

[GL2 Replot]*15

[GL2 Buffer Clear]*15

Second Level

[Nozzle Check]

[Status Print]

[Interface Print]

[GL2 Set Print]

[Pap. Detail Print]

[Print Job Log]

[Menu Map]

[Color Palette]

[Head Posi. Adj.]

[Head Inc. Adj.]

[Feed Priority]

Third Level

[Auto(Standard)]

[Auto(Advanced)]

[Manual]*4

[Adj. Priority]

[Adj. Quality]*5

[Adjust Length]*6

Fourth Level

[Automatic]*

[Print Quality]

[Print Length]

[Auto(GenuinePpr)]

[Auto(OtherPaper)]

[Manual]

[AdjustmentPrint]

[Change Settings]

[Head Cleaning]

[Nozzle Check]

[Replace P.head]

[Repl. maint cart]

[Head Info]

[Head Cleaning A]

[Head Cleaning B]

The "ProductName" and "s/ n" and "Days elapsed" and

"Count [Mdot]" are displayed here.

Fifth Level

[A:High]

[B:Standard/Draft]

[A:High]

[B:Standard/Draft]

Chapter 1

1-23

Chapter 1

First Level

[GL2 Settings]

Second Level

[Quality Manager]

[Paper Manager]

Third Level

[Color Mode]

[Print Quality]

[Input Resolution]

[Print (Economy)]

[Paper Source]

[Margin]

[Oversize]

[Conserve Paper]

[Auto Rotate]

[Enlarge/Reduce]

[Print centered]

[Standard cut]

[Nesting]*14

Fourth Level

[Monochrome]

[Color (CAD) 1]*

[Color (CAD) 2]

[Color (CAD) 3]

[Color (CAD) 4]

[Color (CAD) 5]

[Draft]

[Standard]*

[High]

[600dpi]*

[300dpi]

[Off]*

[On]

[Automatic]*

[Roll Paper]

[Cut Sheet]

[3mm(Standard)]*

[5mm]

[Off]

[On]*

[Off]*

[On]

[Off]*

[On]

[Off]*

[Specify scaling]

[Fit to paper]

[Off]*

[On]

[Off]*

[On]

[Use Nesting]

[Nesting WaitTime]*7

[Cut Lines]*7

Fifth Level

[Off]*

[On]

[xx min.]

[Off]*

[On]

Sixth Level

1-24

First Level

[GL2 Settings]

Second Level

[Line&Pen Manager]

Third Level

[Enable merge]

[Pen Setup]

[ProcessingOption]

[Smoothing]

[ThickenFineLines]

[AdjustFaintLines]

[Ln Wdth correct]

[Warning]

[On-the-Fly]*14

[Detect img size]

Fourth Level

[Off]*

[On]

[Select Palette]

[Define Palette]

Chapter 1

Fifth Level Sixth Level

[Software]*

[Palette A]

[Palette B]

[Factory]

[Palette A]

(Choose a pen number.)

[Palette B]


(Indicates Width, Color, and

Line Attributes.)

[Width]

(Indicates the Width value.)

[Color]

0-255

[Line Attributes]-[No

Setting]/[Circle Setting]

(Specify the values of

Width, Color, and Line

Attributes.)

[Factory]


(Indicates Width, Color, and

Line Attributes.)

[All Palette]

[Palette A]

[Palette B]

[Reset Palette]

[Software]*

[Smooth]

[Off]*

[On]

[Off]

[On]*

[Black/gray]

[Color]

[Off]*

[On]

[Off]*

[On]

[Off]*

[Command priority]

[Detected size]

(Set the correcting value of line width.)

(Set the correcting value of line width.)

[GL2 Set Print]

1-25

Chapter 1

First Level

[Interface Setup]

Second Level

[EOP Timer]*12

[TCP/IP]*12

Third Level

[10 sec.]

[30 sec.]

[1 min.]

[2 min.]

[5 min.]

[10 min.]*

[30 min.]

[60 min.]

[IPv4]

[IPv6]

Fourth Level Fifth Level Sixth Level

Seventh

Level

[IPv4 Mode]

[Protocol]*8

[IPv4 Settings]*13

[DNS Settings]*13

[Automatic]

[Manual]*

[DHCP]

[BOOTP]

[RARP]

[IP Address]

[Subnet Mask]

[Default G/W]

[DNS Dync update]

[Pri. DNS SrvAddr]

[Sec. DNS SrvAddr]

[DNS Host Name]

[On]*

[Off]

[On]

[Off]*

[On]

[Off]*

(Set the Address.)

(Set the Address.)

(Set the Address.)

[On]

[Off]*

(Set the Address.)

(Set the Address.)

(Set the DNS host name.)

[DNS Domain Name] (Set the DNS domain name.)

[Supported] [IPv6 Support]

[Not Supported]*

[IPv6 StlessAddrs]*17 [Use]*

[DHCPv6]*17

[DNS Settings]*13*17

(Choose whether if using the DNS Settings of IPv4.)

[Do Not Use]

[Use]

[Do Not Use]*

[DNS Dync update] [Statefull Addr]

[Stateless Addr]

[On]

[Off]*

[On]

[Off]*

[Pri. DNS SrvAddr]

[Sec. DNS SrvAddr]

[DNS Host Name]

(Set the Address.)

(Set the Address.)

(Set the DNS host name.)

[DNS Domain Name] (Set the DNS domain name.)

1-26

First Level

[Interface Setup]

[System Setup]

Second Level

[Ethernet Driver]*12

Third Level

[Auto Detect]

[Comm.Mode]*10

[Ethernet Type]*10

[Spanning Tree]

[MAC Address]

Fourth Level

[On]*

[Off]

[Half Duplex]*

[Full Duplex]

[10Base-T]*

[100Base-TX]

[1000Base-T]

[Not Use]*

[Use]

(The MAC address is displayed here.)

[Interface Print]*12

[Return Defaults]*12

[Sleep Timer]

[Shut Down Timer]

[Buzzer]

[Contrast Adj.]

[Date & Time]*12

[Date Format]

[Language]

[5 min.]*

[10 min.]

[15 min.]

[20 min.]

[30 min.]

[40 min.]

[50 min.]

[60 min.]

[210 min.]

[Off]

[5 min.]

[10 min]

[30 min]

[1 hour]

[4 hours]

[8 hours]*

[12 hours]

[Off]

[On]*

-4,-3,-2,-1,0*,+1,+2,+3,+4

[Date] [yyyy/mm/dd]*11

[Time]

[yyyy/mm/dd]*

[dd/mm/yyyy]

[mm/dd/yyyy]

[English]

[Japanese]

[Francais]

[Italiano]

[Deutsch]

[Espanol]

[Portuguese]

[Russian]

[Chinese] (simplified)

[Korean]

[hh:mm]

Fifth Level

Chapter 1

1-27

Chapter 1

First Level

[System Setup]

Second Level

[Time Zone]*12

[Length Unit]

[Detect Mismatch]

[Paper Size Basis]

[Keep Paper Size]

[TrimEdge Reload]

[Rep.P.head Print]

Third Level

[0:London(GMT)]

[+1:Paris,Rome]

[+2:Athens,Cairo]

[+3:Moscow]

[+4:Eerevan,Baku]

[+5:Islamabad]

[+6:Dacca]

[+7:Bangkok]

[+8:Hong Kong]

[+9:Tokyo,Seoul]

[+10:Canberra]

[+11NewCaledonia]

[+12:Wellington]

[-12:Eniwetok]

[-11:Midway is.]

[-10Hawaii(AHST)]

[-9:Alaska(AKST)]

[-8:Oregon (PST)]

[-7:Arizona(MST)]

[-6:Texas(CST)]

[-5:NewYork(EST)]

[-4:Santiago]

[-3:Buenos Aires]

[-2:CenterAtlantic]

[-1:Cape Verde]

[meter]*

[feet/inch]

[Pause]

[Warning]

[None]*

[Hold Job]*14

[Roll Selection 1]

[Roll Selection 2]

[Off]*

[On]

[Automatic]

[Off]*

[On]

[Off]

[On]*

Fourth Level

[ISO A3 (297mm)]*

[300mm Roll]

[10in. (254mm)]*

[JIS B4 (257mm)]

Fifth Level

1-28

First Level

[System Setup]

Second Level

[Nozzle Check]

Third Level

[Frequency]

[Warning]

Fourth Level

[Standard]*

[1 page]

[10 pages]

[Off]

[Off]*

[On]

[Use USB]*12

[Use Ethernet]*12

[Use RemoteUI]*12

[Use]*

[Do Not Use]

[Use]*

[Do Not Use]

[Use]*

[Do Not Use]

[Reset PaprSetngs]*12

[Erase HDD Data]*14

[Output Method]*14

[Print After Recv]*14

[Save: Common

Box]*12*14

[Show Job Log]*12

[High Speed]*12

[Secure High Spd.]*12

[Secure]*12

[Print]*

[Print (Auto Del)]

[Save: Box XX]

[Off]*

[On]

[Off]

[On]*

[Off]

[On]*

[Prep.MovePrinter] [Standard]

[Limited]

[Chg.Admin.Pswd]*13 [Admin. Menu]*12 (The screen for setting the password is displayed)

[Printer Info]

[Init.Admin.Pswd]*13

[Paper Info]

[Ink Info]

[Head Info]

[System Info]

[Error Log]

[Use Situation] [Tot. Print Area]

[Duty Counter]

*1: Available only if ManageRemainRoll is On.

*2: Available only if Width Detection is set to Off.

*3: Print Anyway is displayed when a job being held is selected.

*4: Available after Auto(Advanced) in Head Posi. Adj. has been used once.

*5: Available when you have specified Feed Priority > Adj. Priority > Automatic or Print Quality.

*6: Available when you have specified Feed Priority > Adj. Priority > Automatic or Print Length.

*7: Available only if Use Nesting is set to On.

*8: Not shown if you have set IPv4 Mode to Manual.

*9: Not shown if you have set NetWare to Off.

*10: Not shown if you have set Auto Detect to On.

*11: Follows the setting in Date Format.

*12: Viewing and configuration is possible for administrators, and only viewing for other users.

*13: Viewing and configuration is possible for administrators only.

*14: Displayed only on models equipped with HDD.

*15: Displayed only on models not equipped with HDD.

*16: Leading edge is not available as a setting option in the Paper Detailed Settings dialog box of the printer driver.

*17: Not displayed if IPv6 Support is Not Supported.

Fifth Level

Chapter 1

1-29

Chapter 1

3. Main menu during printing

The structure of the main menu during printing is as follows.

Second Level First Level

[Adj. Fine Feed]

[Printer Info] [Paper Info]

[Ink Info]

[Head Info]

[System Info]

[Error Log]

[Other Counter]

Third Level Fourth Level Fifth Level

1-30

Chapter 1

4. Main Menu Settings

Main menu items are described in the following tables.

[Paper Menu]

Setting Item

[Load Paper]

[Eject Paper]

[Chg. Paper Type]

[Chg. Paper Size]

[ManageRemainRoll]

[Pap. Detail Set]


[Head Height]

[Crooked Chk Lv.]

[Cutting Mode]

[Cut Speed]

[Trim Edge First]

[CutDustReduct.]

[VacuumStrngth]

[Scan Wait Time]

[Roll DryingTime]

[NearEnd RollMrgn]

[NearEnd Sht Mrgn]

[Pap. Detail Print]

[Keep Paper Type]

[BordlessOversize]

[Width Detection]

[Return Defaults]

Description/Instructions

Select and load either cut sheet or roll media.

Remove currently loaded paper.

Change currently set paper type.

Change currently set paper size.

Choose On to print a barcode at the end of a roll before you remove it. The printed barcode can be used in managing the amount of roll paper left. ChooseOff if you prefer not to print the barcode.

Adjust the Printhead height.

If you print on the paper that has an irregular width, choose Loose for a higher skew detection threshold, or choose Off to disable skew detection. However, if paper is loaded askew when detection is Off, note that paper jams or Platen soiling may occur.

Select whether to use standard round blade cutter or not.

Select [Automatic] to cut paper after printing. Select [Manual] to print a line at the cut position after printing without cutting. Select [Eject] to prevent the printout from dropping until the ink dries after printing.

Choose the cutting speed. If you use adhesive paper, choosing Slow helps prevent adhesive from sticking to the cutter and keeps the cutter sharp.

If a roll is loaded, the end of the paper will be cut.

Choose On to reduce the amount of debris generated when cutting film and similar media by printing a line at the cut position. This option reduces the amount of debris given off after cutting. It also helps prevent adhesive from sticking to the cutter and keeps the cutter sharp if you use adhesive paper.

Specify the level of suction that holds paper against the Platen.

Specify the time to wait for the ink to dry between each scan in bidirectional printing, in consideration of how quickly the ink dries. Note that printing will take longer if you specify a wait time.

Specify the time to wait for the ink to dry for each sheet.

Specify the minimum margin at the leading edge of roll paper to ensure better printing quality at the leading edge.

Note that if you choose 3mm, it may lower the printing quality at the leading edge and affect feeding accuracy. The printed surface may be scratched, and ink may adhere to the leading edge. It may also cause the Platen to become soiled.

Specify a margin at the leading edge of sheets to ensure better printing quality at the leading edge.

Note that if you choose 3mm, it may lower the printing quality at the leading edge and affect feeding accuracy. The printed surface may be scratched, and ink may adhere to the leading edge.

Select the margin during borderless printing.

Set to print from desired position such as when printing inside a frame.

Select [Off] to disable paper width and skew detection. If paper is loaded askew, paper may jam or platen soiling may occur.

Choose OK to restore Paper Details to the factory default values.

Print the paper settings set with [Paper Details].

Select [On] to continue using the same type of paper.

1-31

Chapter 1

[Ink Menu]

Setting Item

[Rep. Ink Tank]

[Head Cleaning A]


When replacing the Ink Tank, choose Yes and follow the instructions on the screen.

Specify Printhead cleaning options.

Execute Head Cleaning A if printing is faint, oddly colored, or contains foreign substances.

[Job Menu]

[Print Job]

[Stored Job]

[Job Log]

[Print Job Log]

[Pause Print]

[Job List]

Setting Item

(Select Print

Job.)

[Mailbox List] (Enter a password if one has been set.)

(Choose from information about the latest three print jobs.)

[Document Name]

[User Name]

[Page Count]

[Job Status]

[Print Start Time]

[Print End Time]

[Print Time]

[Print Size]

[Delete]


Delete the current job or queued jobs.

[Preempt Jobs] Print the job first after the current print job is finished printing.

[Job List]-

[Print]

Print a saved job.

[Job List]-

[Delete]

Delete a saved job.

[Print Job List] Print a list of saved jobs.

Display the name of the document in the most recently printed job.

Display the name of the user who has transmitted the job.

Display the number of sheets of the job.

Display the result of processing of the job.

Display the time at which the job started printing.

Display the time at which the job finished printing.

Display the time spent printing the job.

Display the size of the paper used for printing the job.

[HDD Information]

[Media Type]

[Interface]

[Ink Consumed]

[Print Settings]

[Head Height]

[Temp./Humidity]

[Adjustment reg.]

Display the type of the paper used for printing the job.

Display the interface of the job.

Display the amount of ink consumed for printing the job.

Display the job print settings.

Display the head height when jobs were printed.

Display the temperature and humidity when jobs were printed.

Display the adjustment conditions applied to jobs.

Print the print job information such as paper type, size, and ink consumption. Ink consumption is the approximate amount of ink used to print one sheet.

Select [On] to stop printing.

Display the total size of the HDD and the remaining box size.

1-32

Chapter 1

[Set./Adj. Menu]

[Test Print]

[Adjust

Printer]

Setting Item

[Nozzle Check]

[Status Print]

[Interface Print]

[GL2 Set Print]

[Pap. Detail Print]

[Print Job Log]

[Maintenance] [Head Cleaning]

[GL2 Replot]

[Menu Map]

[Color Palette]

[Head Posi.

Adj.]

[Auto(Standard)]

[Auto(Advanced)]

[Head Inc. Adj.]

[Feed Priority] [Adj. Priority] [Automatic]

[Nozzle Check]

[Head Info]

[GL2 Buffer Clear]

[Manual]

[Adjust

Length]

[Replace P.head]

[Repl. maint cart]

[Print Quality]

[Print Length]

[Adj. Quality] [Auto(Genuin ePpr)]

[Auto(OtherPa per)]

[Manual]


Print a nozzle check pattern.

Print the printer information.

Print the interface settings.

Print the GL2 settings.

Print the paper settings set with [Paper Details].

Print print job information such as paper type, size, and ink consumption. Ink consumption is the approximate amount of ink used to print one sheet.

Print the menu list.

Print the GL2 color list.

Print and read a test pattern for the automatic adjustment of Printhead alignment relative to the printing direction.

Print and read a test pattern for the automatic adjustment of Printhead alignment relative to the nozzle and printing direction.

Print a test pattern for adjustment of Printhead alignment relative to the printing direction. Enter the adjustment value manually based on the resulting pattern.

Print an adjustment pattern for adjusting the inclination of the printhead.

Set the priority feed precision. Normally select [Automatic]. Select [Print Quality] to print at high quality. Select [Print Quality] to reduce horizontal streaks. Select [Print Length] to accurately control the feed amount. However, selecting [Print Length] may cause colors to become slightly uneven in the carriage scan direction.

Set when using paper described in the paper reference guide.

A pattern to adjust the paper feed amount is printed, and the feed amount is automatically adjusted from the printed result.

Set when using paper not described in the paper reference guide.

A pattern to adjust the paper feed amount is printed, and the feed amount is automatically adjusted from the printed result.

This takes longer than [Auto (GenuinePpr)] to print and consumes more ink.

Select for paper that cannot be adjusted by [Auto(GenuinePpr)] or [Auto(OtherPaper)], such as highly transparent paper.

Print a pattern to adjust the paper feed amount according to the type of paper.

Print a test pattern for adjustment relative to paper stretching or shrinkage, after which you can enter the amount of adjustment.

[AdjustmentPr int]-[A:High]/

[B:Standard/

Draft]

[Change

Settings]-

[A:High]/

[B:Standard/

Draft]

Display when [Print Length] is selected as [Adj. Priority] for [Feed Priority].

Adjust the expansion rate of the currently loaded paper.

Enter the result adjusted with [AdjustmentPrint] or the difference with your own measurement in %.

Increase the adjustment value to increase the feed amount for paper that tends to expand, and reduce it for paper that tends to shrink.

Specify Printhead cleaning options.

Choose Head Cleaning A if printing is faint, oddly colored, or contains foreign substances.

Choose Head Cleaning B if no ink is printed at all, or if printing is not improved by Head

Cleaning A.

Print a nozzle check pattern.

Not displayed during a warning message that the remaining Maintenance Cartridge capacity is low.

When replacing the Printhead, choose Yes and follow the instructions on the screen.

When exchanging the maintenance cartridge, choose Yes and follow the instructions on the screen.

Display the Printhead informations.

Print again the last data printed on the GL2.

Delete the print data of the replot buffer.

1-33

Chapter 1

[GL2 Settings] [Quality

Manager]

Setting Item

[Color Mode] [Monochrome

]

[Color (CAD)

1]

[Print Quality]

[Input Resolution]

[Print (Economy)]

[Color (CAD)

2]

[Color (CAD)

3]

[Color (CAD)

4]

[Color (CAD)

5]

[Paper

Manager]

Print by the monochrome.

Print by the standard color.

Print by the bright color.


Print by the color emulated the Canon iPF500/iPF600/iPF700/iPF510/iPF610/iPF710/iPF605/ iPF720/iPF810/iPF820.

Print by the color emulated the HP Designjet 500/800.

Print by the color emulated the HP Designjet 1000.

[Paper Source]

[Margin]

[Oversize]

[Conserve Paper]

[Auto Rotate]

[Enlarge/Reduce]

[Print centered]

[Standard cut]

[Nesting]

Select the print quality.

Choose the printer input resolution from between [600dpi] and [300dpi].

Print with a lower grade of print than normal, but with less ink consumption. Select [ON] to economize on inks.

Select how to feed paper for printing on the HP-GL/2.

Set the top/bottom and left/right margins of the paper. For cut-sheet, the trailing edge margin is

23mm.

However, if the leading edge margin is set with [Paper Details], that value has priority.

Set the positions of the margins.

Select [On] to adds the margins to the outer edge of the rendering region set by the [Detect img size] function. (This corresponds to the case where the [PaperSizeProcess 1] function in the old menu is set to Off)

Select [Off] to sets the margins inside the rendering region taking the size set by the [Detect img size] function as the rendering region. Areas that overlap with the margin are not printed.

(This corresponds to the case where the [PageSizeProcess 1] function in the old menu is set to

On)

Print by economizing on paper.

If a document has its long side shorter than the roll width, the page rotates by 90 degrees automatically to economize on paper. If a document contains horizontally long data such that it has its long side longer than the roll width and its short side shorter than the roll width, the page rotates 90 degrees to print within the boundaries of the paper.

HP RTL cannot rotate.

In case of HP RTL image, the image may be truncated or a blank paper may be ejected because the image cannot be rotated even if the paper size is rotated by 90 degrees. In that case, set [Auto

Rotate] to [Off].

Set the enlargement or reduction.

Select [Off] to enlargement and reduction are not executed.

Select [Specify scaling] to prints at the specified magnification. You can specify the magnification in the range of 25 to 400%.

Select [Fit to paper] to print at enlargement or reduction ratio to fit the paper size.

Set the printing position on the paper.

Select [On] when printing on roll paper, prints in the center of the width of the roll paper. When printing on cut paper, prints in the center of the paper.

Select [Off] to print at the top left of the paper.

Select [On] to print depending on the standard paper size.

[Use Nesting] Select [On] to print pages when they are tiled fully to the roll width, instead of printing them one by one.

Set the time to elapse before printing.

[Nesting

WaitTime]

[Cut Lines] Select [On] to print perforated lines between pages.

1-34

Chapter 1

Setting Item

[GL2 Settings] [Line&Pen

Manager]

[Enable merge]

[Pen Setup] [Select

Palette]

[Smoothing]

[Define

Palette]

Set [Width], [Color], and [Line Attributes] for the palette's [Pen Number]. Select [Factory] to check the value when [Factory] is selected for [Select Palette].

For [Line Attributes], select the shape of line end and joint between lines as [No Setting] or

[Circle Setting].

[Reset Palette] Return the [Define Palette] settings to factory settings.

[ThickenFineLines]

[AdjustFaintLines]

Choose whether to draw an arc with a smooth curve or with a polygon.

Select [On] to print thin lines clearly.

[Ln Wdth correct]

If thin lines print in a tint of color varied from other patterns, selecting [Off] may provide the print result as intended, though the thin lines may print, interrupted, depending on the color.

Correct the width of lines. (The basic line width is set using the [Pen Setup] funstion)

Select [Black/gray] to correct the width of lines whrere all of the RGB values are the same

(except when R=G=B=255). The setting value can be set in the range of -20 to +20, with the setting value given in units of correction of 0.025mm. When set to -20, lines become 0.5mm thinner, and when set to +20, lines become 0.5mm thicker.

Select [Color] to correct the width of lines that are not [Black/gray]. The setting value can be set in the range of -20 to +20 with the setting value given in units of correction of 0.025mm.

When set to -20 lines become 0.5mm thinner, and when set to +20 lines become 0.5mm thicker

[Detect img size]


When lines overlap, set whether to merge or overwrite the colors of the overlapping lines.

Select [Off] to overwrite with the line printed later. Select [On] to merge all overlapping colors.

Select the value related to pen from [Software], [Palette A], [Palette B], or [Factory].

Select [Software] to print according to the application side instruction. Select [Palette A] or

[Palette B] to print with value set by [Define Palette].

[ProcessingOp tion]

[GL2 Set Print]

[Warning]

[On-the-Fly]

Set the method for selecting the rendering region.

Select [Off] to use the value from the PS command in the input data. If there are no PS commands, prints using the maximum size (maximum roll paper width X (maximum roll paper width X 1.5)). This reduces the printing time compared with the cases whrere [Command priority] or [Detected size] are set because the data analysis finishes in a shorter period of time.

Select [On] to display warnings during GL2.

In printing data consisting solely of HP RTL, if the data is slow to print, select [On] to expedite the time at which the data starts printing. Verify the print result to make sure that images are not chipped in this case.

Print the GL2 settings.

1-35

Chapter 1

[Interface

Setup]

[EOP Timer]

[TCP/IP]

[Ethernet

Driver]*12

[Comm.Mode]

[Ethernet Type]

[Spanning Tree]

[MAC Address]

[Interface Print]

[Return Defaults]

Setting Item

[IPv4] [IPv4 Mode]

[IPv6]

[Protocol] [DHCP]/

[BOOTP]/

[RARP]

[IPv4 Settings] [IP Address]/

[Subnet Mask]/

[Default G/W]

[DNS Settings] [DNS Dync update]

[Pri. DNS

SrvAddr]/[Sec.

DNS SrvAddr]

[IPv6 Support]

[IPv6 StlessAddrs]

[DNS Host

Name]

[DNS Domain

Name]

[DHCPv6]

[DNS Settings] [DNS Dync update]-[Statefull

Addr]/[Stateless

Addr]

[Pri. DNS

SrvAddr]/[Sec.

DNS SrvAddr]

[DNS Host

Name]

[DNS Domain

Name]

[Auto Detect]


Specify the timeout period before cancellation of print jobs that cannot be received by the printer.

Choose whether the printer IP address is configured automatically or a static IP address is entered manually.

Specify the protocol used to configure the IP address automatically.

Specify the printer network information when using a static IP address.

Enter the IP address assigned to the printer, as well as the network subnet mask and default gateway.

Specify whether DNS server registration is updated automatically.

Specify the DNS server address.

Specify the DNS host name.

Specify the DNS domain name.

Set whether to support IPv6 connection.

Set whether to use IPv6 stateless address.

Set whether to use DHCPv6 setting.

Specify whether DNS server registration is updated automatically.

Specify the DNS server address.

Specify the DNS host name.

Specify the DNS domain name.

Specify the communication method. To apply your changes, choose Register

Setting.

Choose On for automatic configuration of the LAN communication protocol.

Choose Off to use settings values of Comm.Mode and Ethernet Type.

Choose the LAN communication method.

Choose the LAN transfer rate.

Choose whether spanning-tree packets are supported over the LAN.

Display the MAC address.

Print the interface settings.

Select [OK] to return the [Interface Setup] settings to factory default.

1-36

[System Setup]

Setting Item

[Sleep Timer]

[Shut Down Timer]

[Buzzer]

[Contrast Adj.]

[Date & Time] [Date]

[Date Format]

[Language]

[Time Zone]

[Length Unit]

[Time]

[Detect Mismatch]

[Paper Size

Basis]

[Roll Selection

1]

[Roll Selection

2]

[Keep Paper Size]

[TrimEdge Reload]

[Rep.P.head Print]

[Nozzle Check]

[Use USB]

[Use Ethernet]

[Use RemoteUI]

[Reset PaprSetngs]


Specify the period before the printer enters Sleep mode.

Specify the period the printer shuts down after entering Sleep mode.

Set the buzzer. Choose On for the buzzer to sound once for warnings and three times for errors.

Adjust the Display Screen contrast level.

Set the current date.

Set the current time. This can be set only when [Date] is set.

Specify the date format.

Specify the language used on the Display Screen.

Specify the time zone. Time zone options indicate a main city in this time zone and the difference from Greenwich Mean Time.

Choose the unit of measurement when roll length is displayed. You can switch the unit displayed for the remaining paper amount.

Set the printing behavior when the paper type and size set with the printer menu does not match the paper type and size set with the printer driver.

Select [Pause] to pause printing. Select [Warning] to print a warning and continue printing.

Select [None] to continue printing without displaying a warning. Select [Hold Job] to queue the job with different paper type and size in a job queue on the hard disk.

When the size of roll paper is detected, select which roll width to use if the roll width is between

[ISO A3 (297mm)] and [300mm Roll].

When the size of roll paper is detected, select which roll width to use if the roll width is between

[10inch (254mm)] and [JIS B4 (257mm)].

Select [On] to give priority to paper size. If the margin set with the printer driver is less than the margin set with the printer menu, the margin set with the printer menu has priority and text and images extending beyond the margins are truncated.

Select [Off] to give priority to margin settings. If the margins set with the printer driver and the margins set with the printer menu are different, the larger settings are used for printing.

Select whether cut the leading edge of the paper when the paper at the standby position has loaded. Cut it when the roller trace at the standby position attract attention. Choose On to cut it everytime when the paper at the standby position has loaded. Choose Automatic to cut it when the paper at the standby position during two days or more has loaded.

Select [On] to automatically perform [Adjust Detail] after replacing the Printhead.

Set with [Frequency] the timing to check for nozzle clogging after printing. Select [Standard] to adjust the checking timing according to the nozzle usage.

Select [1 page] or [10 pages] to check every one page or 10 pages.

Select [On] for [Warning] to display a warning when the print head nozzle is clogged while printing.

Select [Off] to disable the function of the USB connection.

Select [Off] to disable the function of the ethernet connection.

Select [Off] to disable access from RemoteUI and enable setting only from the operation panel.

Restore settings that you have changed with Media Configuration Tool to the factory default values.

Chapter 1

1-37

Chapter 1

[System Setup]

[Prep.MovePrinter]

Setting Item

[Erase HDD

Data]

[Output

Method]


[High Speed] Delete the file management information of the saved data in the HDD.

[Secure High

Spd.]

Overwrite the random data in the whole of the hard disk drive.

[Secure]

[Print]

[Print (Auto

Del)]

[Save: Box

XX]

Overwrite 00 and FF and random data in the whole of the hard disk drive once at a time.

Execute the verify check whether the data has written correctly to the hard disk drive.

Select the output method of jobs sent from software other than the printer driver. This can be set from the printer if you are using a printer driver.

Select [Print] to print normally. Select [Print (AutoDel)] to print and delete the data in hard disk.

Select [Save: Box XX] to save to box without printing.

[Print After Recv]

[Save: Common Box]

[Show Job Log]

[Standard]

[Limited]

Setting of jobs sent from software other than the printer driver. This can be set from the printer if you are using a printer driver. Select [On]to print after saving.

Select [Off] to print without saving to a common box.

Selecting off prevents display of the log in Job Menu > Job Log. Additionally, the log is not printed if you choose Job Menu > Print Job Log. Note that because job logs are not collected, the Status Monitor accounting functions will not work correctly.

Select when moving the printer. Follow the instruction on the screen and perform the necessary process.

This is not displayed when displaying a warning message about the amount remaining maintenance cartridge.

[Admin. Menu] [Chg.Admin.Pswd]

[Printer Info]

[Init.Admin.Pswd]

[Paper Info]

[Ink Info]

[Head Info]

[System Info]

[Error Log]

[Use Situation]

Set a password to restrict displaying/setting of menus as follows. Allowed value is from 0 to

9999999.

- Allow only administrator to display/set

[IPv4]

[Change Password]

[Init.Admin.Pswd]

- Allow administrator to display/set and non-administrator to display only

[Interface Setup] (exclude [IPv4])

[Date & Time]

[Date Format]

[Time Zone]

[Use RemoteUI]

[Reset PaprSetngs]

[Save: Shared Box]

Press [OK] to return the [Administrator Menu] password to factory default.

Display the currently set paper type, size and printer settings.

Display ink levels and maintenance cartridge capacity.

Display the Printhead information.

Display the firmware version, serial number, and interface information.

Display the most recent error messages (up to 5).

Display the total area and duty counter printed.

1-38

Chapter 1

1.7 Safety and Precautions

1.7.1 Safety Precautions

1.7.1.1 Moving Parts

0023-1446

Moving parts of the printer include the carriage unit driven by the carriage motor, the carriage belt, the ink tube, the flexible cable, the feed roller driven by the feed motor, the pinch roller, and the purge unit driven by the purge motor.

To prevent accidents, the upper cover of the printer is locked during printing. If the top cover is opened in the online/offline mode, the carriage motor, feed motor, and other driving power supplies are turned off.

Carriage Motor

Feed Motor

Roll Media Drive Unit

Pinch Roller

Flexible Cable

Carriage

Ink tube

Purge Unit

Feed Roller

Cutter Unit

Carriage Height

Adjustment Unit

Cutter

F-1-32

1-39

Chapter 1

1.7.1.2 Adhesion of Ink

(1) Ink passages

Be careful not to touch the ink passages of the printer to prevent the printer, workbench, ands, and clothes from being stained with ink.

The ink flows through the ink tank unit, carriage unit, purge unit, maintenance cartridge, and the ink tubes that relay ink to individual units.

Platen

Ink Tank Unit

Carriage

0023-1463

Maintenance Cartridge

Purge Unit

Ink Tank Unit

Head Management Sensor

F-1-33

- Although the ink is not harmful to the human body, it contains organic solvents.

Ink may contaminate the surrounding parts. Carry out the work with due caution. If your hands are stained with ink, wash them with a plenty of water.

Be careful not to allow the ink to get into your mouth or eyes.

If the ink gets into your eyes, flush them with water well and see a doctor.

In case of accidental ingestion of a large quantity of ink, see a doctor immediately.

- It is also effective to use gloves to prevent ink from adhering when working.

- Since this ink contains pigment, stains will not come out of clothing.

(2) Ink Mist

Since the printhead prints by squirting ink onto the media, a minute amount of ink mist is generated in the printing unit during printing. The generated ink mist is collected in the printer by the airflow. However, uncollected ink mist may stain the platen, carriage unit, exterior, and purge unit.

These stains may soil the print media or hands and clothes when servicing the printer. Wipe them off carefully with a soft, well-wrung cloth.

Upper Cover

Purge Unit

Platen/Carriage/Main Rail

F-1-34

1-40

Chapter 1

1.7.1.3 Electric Parts

0023-1464

The electric parts of the printer are activated when the printer is connected to the AC power supply.

At the rear and left/right side of the printer are the main controller, power supply, HDD, and interface connector. The carriage PCB is incorporated in the carriage unit, and the operation panel is on the upper right top cover.

When serving the printer with the cover removed, be extremely careful to avoid electric shock and shorting electrical devices.

Operation Panel

Carriage PCB

Power Supply PCB

Hard Disk Drive

Main Controller PCB

AC Inlet

Interface Connector

F-1-35

1-41

Chapter 1

1.7.2 Other Precautions

1.7.2.1 Printhead

0020-1924

1. How to Handle the Printhead

Do not open the printhead package until you are ready to install the head.

When installing the printhead in the printer, hold the knob and then remove the protective cap 1 and protective cap 2 in that order.

Do not reattach the protective cap to the printhead because the cap may damage the nozzles.

To prevent the nozzles from getting clogged with foreign matter or dried ink, install the printhead immediately after you remove the protective caps.

Also make sure to press down the locking lever of the printhead until you feel a click.

In addition, to prevent clogging of the nozzles with foreign matter and improper supply of ink, never touch the nozzles or ink port, or wipe it with tissue paper or anything else.

Do not touch Electriacl contact.

Also, never attempt to disassemble/reassemble the printhead or wash it with water.

MEMO:

If the nozzles are clogged or an ink suction problem occurs, white lines can appear on the printout a constant frequency or color dulling can occur. If this problem is not resolved by cleaning operations, replace the printhead with a new one.

[6]

[1]

[4]

[2]

[3]

[5]

[1] Knob

[2] Protective cap 1

[3] Protective cap 2

F-1-36

[4] Nozzles

[5] Electrical contact

[6] Ink port

2. Capping

The printer will perform the capping operation when printing has ended or during standby due to an error, in order to protect the printhead and avoid ink leakage.

If the power cord is accidentally unplugged, turn off the Power button, reconnect the power cord, and then turn on the Power button. Confirm that the printer starts up properly and enters to the "Online" or "Offline" status, and then power off the printer using the Power button.

Improper "capping operation" may cause clogged nozzles due to dried ink or ink leakage from the printhead.

3. When the printer is not used for a long time

Keep the printhead installed in the printer even when it is not used for an extended period of time.

If the printhead is left uninstalled, a printing failure may arise from closed nozzles due to depositing of foreign matter or dried ink when it is reinstalled.

Even if the head remains installed, the nozzle may dry out and cause a printing failure if the ink is drained for transport.

4. Conductivity of Ink

The ink used in this printer is electrically conductive. If ink leaks to into the mechanical unit, wipe clean with a soft, well-wrung damp cloth. If ink leaks onto electrical units, wipe them completely using tissue paper. If you cannot remove ink completely, replace the electrical units with new ones.

If electrical units are powered with ink leaked onto them, the units may damage.

Never connect the power cord when ink has leaded onto the electrical units.

1-42

Chapter 1

1.7.2.2 Ink Tank

0023-1466

1. Unpacking the Ink Tank

Do not unpack the ink tank until you are ready to install it.

When installing the ink tank, be sure to shake it slowly 1 to 2 times before unpacking it. Otherwise, the ink ingredients may precipitate and degrade the print quality.

To prevent foreign matter from entering the ink port, install the unpacked ink tank in the printer immediately.

2. Handling the Ink Tank

To prevent foreign matter from entering the ink flow path and causing ink suction and printing problems, never touch the ink port and contacts of the ink tank.

When you press down the ink tank cover, the needle enters the ink port, allowing ink to flow between the printer and ink tank.

Do not raise or lower the ink tank cover except when replacing the ink tank.

[2]

[1]

[4]

[3]

F-1-37

[1] Ink tank

[2] Ink tank lock lever

[3] Contacts

[4] Ink port

1.7.2.3 Handling the Printer

0031-3152

1. Precautions against Static Electricity

Certain clothing may generate static electricity, causing an electrical charge to build up on your body. Such a charge can damage electrical devices or change their electrical characteristics.

In particular, never touch the printhead contacts.

[2]

[1]

F-1-38

[1] Carriage unit

[2] Printhead contacts

2. Fixing the Carriage

After completion of printing, the carriage is mechanically locked by the lock pin in the purge unit at the same moment the printhead is capped.

1-43

Chapter 1

3. Contact of Linear Scale/Carriage Shaft

Do not touch the linear scale and carriage shaft when the upper cover is opened, for maintenance.

Touching the linear scale and carriage shaft might cause abnormal movement of the carriage and produce defective prints.

[2]

[1]

[1] Linear Scale

[2] Carriage Shaft

F-1-39

Don't apply the grease to the linear scale and carriage shaft. It may cause abnormal operations and defective prints.

4. Replacing the maintenance cartridge

When the maintenance cartridge detects that the tank is full, the "Repl. Maint. C" error appears. In this case the maintenance cartridge must be replaced.

The printer will not operate until the error is cancelled.

Be careful that the waste ink does not splash when you remove the used maintenance cartridge from the printer.

MEMO:

This printer has an EEPROM in the maintenance cartridge and the maintenance cartridge status is controlled by the main controller PCB which reads and writes the contents of that EEPROM. Therefore, initializing the counter information will not be needed when the maintenance cartridge is replaced.

5. Refilling the ink

After draining the ink from the printer according to the automatic or manual ink draining procedure for disassemble, reassemble, or transport/ship the printer, refill the ink as soon as possible upon completion of those tasks.

Dried remaining ink on the surface of some components, may cause damage or abnormal operations.

1-44

Chapter 1

1.7.3 Precautions When Servicing Printer

1.7.3.1 Notes on the Data Stored in the Printer

0013-5942

This printer counts the print length, number of ink tank replacements, carriage driving time, number of cleaning operations, number of cutter operations, and so on and stores them in the main controller's EEPROM as a COUNTER in Service mode.

COUNTER provides important information about the printer usage status.

You can check this information by printing it in the service mode or displaying it on the display.

Follow the precautions below when servicing the printer.

(1) Repairing/replacing the PCB

When replacing the main controller, follow the specified replacement procedure.

For the main controller replacement procedure, see "DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY" > "Points to Note on Disassembly and Reassembly" > "PCBs".

(2) After replacing the carriage unit

The information about the carriage driving time resides in the carriage unit. After replacing the carriage unit, select [INITIALIZE] > [CARRIAGE] in the service mode to initialize the information about the carriage driving time.

(3) After replacing the purge unit

The information about the number of cleanings resides in the purge unit. After replacing the purge unit, select [INITIALIZE] > [PURGE] in the service mode to initialize (clear) the information about the number of cleanings.

(4) On replacement of supplies

After supplies have been replaced, execute [INITIALIZE] > [PARTS COUNTER] > [PARTS xx] in service mode to initialize (clear) the parts counter information.

For the consumable parts, see "MAINTENANCE" > "Periodic Replacement Parts".

You cannot check the counter information once it is initialized (cleared). Be careful not to initialize the counter information before checking it.

You cannot modify the counter information from the operation panel.

1.7.3.2 Confirming the Firmware Version

Firmware has been downloaded to the main controller.

When you have replaced the main controller, check that the firmware is the latest version. If not, update it to the latest version.

Reference:

For instruction on how to update the main controller, refer to "TROUBLESHOOTING" > "Version Up".

1.7.3.3 Precautions against Static Electricity

Certain clothing may generate static electricity, causing an electrical charge to build up on your body. Such a charge can damage electrical devices.

To prevent this, discharge any static buildup by touching a grounded metal fitting before you start disassembling the printer.

1.7.3.4 Precautions for Disassembly/Reassembly

The precautions for disassembly/reassembly are described in "DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY".

1.7.3.5 Self-diagnostic Feature

The printer has a self-diagnostic feature to analyze hardware problems.

The self-diagnosis result is shown on the display and indicated by lamps.

For detailed information, see "ERROR CODE".

0013-5945

0013-5947

0013-5948

0013-5950

1-45

Chapter 1

1.7.3.6 Disposing of the Lithium Battery

The main controller PCB of this printer is equipped with a lithium battery to back up various data.

Risk of explosion if battery is replaced by an incorrect type.

Dispose of used batteries according to the instructions.

"For CA, USA Only

Included battery contains Perchlorate Material-special handling may apply. See http://www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate/ for detail."

0013-5952

1-46

Chapter 2 TECHNICAL REFERENCE

Contents

Contents

2.1 Basic Operation Outline.................................................................................................................................................2-1

2.1.1 Printer Diagram............................................................................................................................................................................ 2-1

2.1.2 Print Signal Sequence .................................................................................................................................................................. 2-2

2.1.3 Print Driving ................................................................................................................................................................................ 2-3

2.2 Firmware ........................................................................................................................................................................2-5

2.2.1 Operation Sequence at Power-on................................................................................................................................................. 2-5

2.2.2 Operation Sequence at Power-off ................................................................................................................................................ 2-6

2.2.3 Print Position Adjustment Function............................................................................................................................................. 2-7

2.2.4 Head Management ....................................................................................................................................................................... 2-7

2.2.5 Printhead Overheating Protection Control................................................................................................................................... 2-7

2.2.6 Pause between Pages.................................................................................................................................................................... 2-7

2.2.7 White Raster Skip ........................................................................................................................................................................ 2-7

2.2.8 Sleep Mode .................................................................................................................................................................................. 2-7

2.2.9 Shut Down Mode ......................................................................................................................................................................... 2-7

2.2.10 Hard Disk Drive......................................................................................................................................................................... 2-8

2.3 Printer Mechanical System ............................................................................................................................................2-9

2.3.1 Outline.......................................................................................................................................................................................... 2-9

2.3.1.1 Outline.............................................................................................................................................................................................................2-9

2.3.2 Ink Passage................................................................................................................................................................................. 2-10

2.3.2.1 Ink Passage....................................................................................................................................................................................................2-10

2.3.2.1.1 Overview of Ink Passage.......................................................................................................................................................................2-10

2.3.2.2 Ink Tank Unit ................................................................................................................................................................................................2-11

2.3.2.2.1 Structure of Ink Tank Unit ....................................................................................................................................................................2-11

2.3.2.3 Carriage Unit.................................................................................................................................................................................................2-13

2.3.2.3.1 Functions of Carriage Unit....................................................................................................................................................................2-13

2.3.2.3.2 Structure of Carriage Unit .....................................................................................................................................................................2-14

2.3.2.4 Printhead .......................................................................................................................................................................................................2-17

2.3.2.4.1 Structure of Printhead............................................................................................................................................................................2-17

2.3.2.5 Purge Unit .....................................................................................................................................................................................................2-18

2.3.2.5.1 Functions of Purge Unit ........................................................................................................................................................................2-18

2.3.2.5.2 Structure of Purge Unit .........................................................................................................................................................................2-21

2.3.2.6 Maintenance Cartridge ..................................................................................................................................................................................2-23

2.3.2.6.1 Maintenance Cartridge ..........................................................................................................................................................................2-23

2.3.2.7 Air Flow ........................................................................................................................................................................................................2-24

2.3.2.7.1 Air Flow ................................................................................................................................................................................................2-24

2.3.3 Paper Path .................................................................................................................................................................................. 2-26

2.3.3.1 Outline...........................................................................................................................................................................................................2-26

2.3.3.1.1 Overview of Paper Path.........................................................................................................................................................................2-26

2.3.3.2 Paper Path......................................................................................................................................................................................................2-27

2.3.3.2.1 Structure of Feed Roller Unit ................................................................................................................................................................2-27

2.3.3.3 Cutter Unit.....................................................................................................................................................................................................2-29

2.3.3.3.1 Structure of Cutter Unit.........................................................................................................................................................................2-29

2.4 Printer Electrical System..............................................................................................................................................2-30

2.4.1 Outline........................................................................................................................................................................................ 2-30

2.4.1.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................................................................................................2-30

2.4.2 Main Controller.......................................................................................................................................................................... 2-32

2.4.2.1 Main controller PCB components.................................................................................................................................................................2-32

2.4.2.2 Connectors and Pin Arrangement of Main controller PCB ..........................................................................................................................2-34

2.4.2.3 HDD expansion PCB components ................................................................................................................................................................2-41

2.4.3 Carriage Relay PCB................................................................................................................................................................... 2-41

2.4.3.1 Carriage PCB components ............................................................................................................................................................................2-41

2.4.3.2 Connectors and Pin Arrangement of Carriage PCB......................................................................................................................................2-42

2.4.4 Maintenance Cartridge Relay PCB............................................................................................................................................ 2-46

Contents

2.4.4.1 Maintenance cartridge relay PCB components............................................................................................................................................. 2-46

2.4.5 Power Supply ............................................................................................................................................................................. 2-47

2.4.5.1 Power supply block diagram......................................................................................................................................................................... 2-47

2.4.5.2 Connectors and Pin Arrangement of Power supply PCB ............................................................................................................................. 2-48

2.5 Detection Functions with Sensors ............................................................................................................................... 2-49

2.5.1 Covers ........................................................................................................................................................................................ 2-49

2.5.2 Ink passage system..................................................................................................................................................................... 2-50

2.5.3 Carriage system.......................................................................................................................................................................... 2-53

2.5.4 Paper path system ...................................................................................................................................................................... 2-55

2.5.5 Others......................................................................................................................................................................................... 2-57

Chapter 2

2.1 Basic Operation Outline

2.1.1 Printer Diagram

Shown below is a printer diagram.

Power Supply PCB

CN2 J1801

Main Controller PCB

IC301/IC302

SDRAM

IC601-IC604

SDRAM

IC701

FLASH ROM

IC802

EEPROM

IC1

ASIC

HDD

J104/

J105

HDD Expansion PCB

IC201

HDD Controller

J101

IC803

RTC

BATS801

Lithium Battery

Linear

Encoder

Sensor

J202

Carriage PCB

USB

LAN

IC2501

LAN Controller

Printhead

IC401

Multi

Sensor

J501

IC503

IC504

J101/J102

J201

J3401/J3601

J3602

J2801/J2951

J3001/J3201

J3301/J3901

J4102/J4501

Sensor/Switch

Feed Roller HP Sensor

Feed Roller Encoder Sensor

Lift Cam Sensor

Paper Detection Sensor

Pump Cam Sensor

Pump Encoder Sensor

Ink Detection Sensor (L)/(R)

Temperature/Humidity Detection Sensor


Cutter HP Sensor

Cutter Left Position Sensor

Ink Supply Valve Open/Closed Detection Sensor (L)/(R)

Shutter HP Sensor

Carriage HP Sensor

Roll Encoder Sensor

Release Lever Lock Sensor

Pinch Roller Pressure Release Switch

Ink Tank Cover Switch (L)/(R)

Upper Cover Lock Switch

IC2

ASIC

IC4101/IC4200

IC4300/IC4401

Motor Driver

J101

Operation Panel PCB


Relay PCB


ROM PCB

J2601

Ink Tank

J3303

J3201

J3301

Ink Tank ROM PCB

J3001

J4501

Solenoid

Upper Cover Lock Solenoid

Release Lever Lock Solenoid

J2951

J4501

Fan

J2701/J2801

J2951/J3001

J4101/J4201

J4501

Platen Suction Fan

Mist Fan

Motor

Carriage Motor

Feed Motor

Lift Motor

Purge Motor

Valve Motor (L)/(R)

Shutter Motor

Cutter Motor

Roll Motor

F-2-1

0031-2530

2-1

Chapter 2

2.1.2 Print Signal Sequence

The signal sequence from when the printer receives the print signals until printing starts is shown in the following figure.

Host computer

Printer driver a a

:

:

:

:

:

:

:

Image data

Mask pattern data

Heat pulse

Command data

PCI bus

Data bus

Universal sirial bus

Interface unit

USB LAN

0025-9730

i

EEPROM c

DDR-SDRAM

SDR-SDRAM

FLASH ROM e d b b

ASIC (IC1/L-COA)

Image processing unit f f g

Printhead

EEPROM

Carriage PCB

Latch IC e,h e e i h

Ink tank

EEPROM

ASIC (IC2) i

Operation panel i

Sensor and drive unit

Main controller

F-2-2 a) The printer driver on the host computer transmits print data, including command data, to the printer after compressing the image data, without resolution, color and 12-color binarization conversion.

To achieve high-quality image output, the image processing table data used for image data color conversion and binarization conversion are generated as command data to meet the Media Type and other specifications of the printer driver.

b) This printer receives print data from the individual interfaces on the main controller, transmitting the received print data to ASIC (IC1).

c) The main controller decompresses the print data transmitted to the ASIC and gets it through resolution, color and 5-color binarization conversion while loading the data into DDR-SDRAM from time to time.

It also converts the print data to 5-color binary equivalents of image and command data.

d) The ASIC (IC1) generates image data synthesized with mask data within the ASIC in sync with the discharge time while loading the data into DDR-SDRAM from time to time.

e) The ASIC (IC2) collects printhead information from EEPROM mounted on the printheads and the printer temperature from the latch IC on the carriage board and transmit them to the ASIC (IC1).

The ASIC (IC1) also receives mask pattern data from the firmware installed in flash ROM.

f) The ASIC (IC1) converts the image data synthesized with the mask pattern to data associated with the printhead information and the printer temperature, transmitting the data to the printheads as a print signal. It transmits heat pulses to the printheads at the same time to optimize head driving.

g) The printheads convert the received print signal from a serial signal to a parallel signal for each row of nozzles and then the signal is composed with the heat pulses to perform the printing.

h) The ASIC (IC1) controls the general aspects of image processing and print drive control by detecting the status of the individual printer components with reference to the adjustment values stored in EEPROM. SDR-SDRAM is used as work memory.

i) The ASIC (IC2) controls the general aspects of drive control by controlling button actuations and message displays on the basis of the firmware installed in flash

ROM.

2-2

Chapter 2

2.1.3 Print Driving

0012-6491

Print and control signals are transferred via the carriage PCB to the printheads to discharge inks from the nozzle assembly at printing.

Each printhead has 12 trains of nozzles arranged in a zigzag pattern.

This printer uses one printhead.

(In installed state, from left to right, C, M, Y, MBK, MBK, BK)

Print signals directed at each nozzle train are even-numbered nozzle data (Hx-x-DATA-x-EV) and odd-numbered nozzle data (Hx-x-DATA-x-OD). These are transferred in timing with a data transfer clock (Hx-CLK) and data latch pulses (Hx-LT).

The Heat Enable (Hx-x-HE-x) drive control signal enables inks to be discharged from the nozzles.

1. Pint drive control

Each train of nozzles in a printhead has 2,560 nozzles.

Ink discharge nozzles are selected split in 40-, 20- or 10-nozzle blocks according to the Block Enable information in the even-numbered nozzle data and odd-numbered nozzle data.

Each selected block of nozzles is impressed with a Heat Enable signal generated with variable pulse widths according to the head rank, head temperature and printer temperature for optimized ink discharges. The nozzles are driven by heater boards in the nozzles to discharge inks. Optimal nozzle blocks are selected according to the print path.

The diagram below illustrates the relationship between a 40-block nozzle and nozzles driven.

60

61

62

63

56

57

58

59

46

47

48

49

50

51

52

53

54

55

64

65

66

67

68

69

70

71

72

73

42

43

44

45

38

39

40

41

31

32

33

34

27

28

29

30

35

36

37

18

19

20

21

14

15

16

17

22

23

24

25

26

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

5

6

3

4

0

1

2

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 Block No.

2559

The pattern is repeated until 2560 nozzles is reached.

F-2-3

2-3

Chapter 2

2. Print drive timing

Each printhead houses 12 trains of nozzles, which share the same data transfer clock (Hx-CLK) and data latch pulses (Hx-LT).

Even-numbered nozzle data (Hx-x-DATA-x-EV), odd-numbered nozzle data (Hx-x-DATA-x-OD) and the Heat Enable (Hx-x-HE-x) signal are generated for each nozzle train and controlled individually.

Printing is carried out in two ways through reciprocating motion of the carriage.

An encoder sensor mounted on the carriage generates a 150-dpi-pitched linear scale detection signal (ENCODER_A) and a signal (ENCODER_B) shifted 120 degrees in phase. The direction of carriage motion is detected from the status of the ENCODER_B signal relative to the leading edge of the ENCODER_A signal.

The printhead is driven using a 2400-dpi timing signal (internal signal), which is generated by dividing the ENCODER_A signal detected at the 150 dpi timing into

16 equal sections.

Printing in the forward direction is triggered at the leading edge of the detection signal (ENCODER_A).

Printing in the backward direction is carried out the same way as printing in the forward direction but at the trailing edge of the detection signal (ENCODER_A), when the order of heated nozzles is reversed depending on the sequence of transfer of even-numbered nozzle data and odd-numbered nozzle data.

150dpi

Linear scale

ENCODER_A

ENCODER_B

Internal signal

2400dpi

H0_CLK

H0_A_DATA_0_EV

H0_A_DATA_1_EV

H0_A_DATA_0_OD

H0_A_DATA_1_OD

H0_LT

H0_A_HE_1

Data of block 0

Data of block 0

Data of block 0

Data of block 0

Low active

Data of block 2

Data of block 2

Data of block 2

Data of block 2

Data of block 4

Data of block 4

Data of block 4

Data of block 4

2400dpi

Data of block 22

Data of block 22

Data of block 22

Data of block 22

F-2-4

2-4

Chapter 2

2.2 Firmware

2.2.1 Operation Sequence at Power-on

The sequence of printer operations, from power-on to transition to online mode, is flowcharted below. The printer takes less than 1 minute to initialize itself(*).

0012-6310

* Excluding the times spent supplying inks and cleaning the printhead after leaving the printer for extended periods of time.

Power Button ON

Device/resource initializarion

Initialization of software

Initialization of various devices

Engine status check

Printhead/ ink tank check

Engine startup status check

Previous power-off status check,etc.

Printhead installation status check

Ink tank installation status check

EEPROM check

Media feed system initialization

Recovery system initialization

Cassette pick-up unit initialization

Roll feed unit initialization

Roll feed unit initialization

Sensor check

Recovery system return to origin

Sensor check

Carriage motor return to origin

Carriage position initialization

Remaining ink level detection/

Waste ink level detection

Power-on automatic recovery operation

Capping

Waiting for print operation

F-2-5

2-5

Chapter 2

2.2.2 Operation Sequence at Power-off

Turning off the power switch cuts off the drive voltage supply, launching a firmware power-off sequence as shown below.

0012-6311

If the power cord is disconnected from the wall outlet or the upper cover or any other cover is opend, the printer cancels the ongoing operation and shuts down immediately. Since printhead capping may or may not have been carried out properly, reconnect the power cord to the wall out and turn on the power switch. Making sure that the printer has entered online mode, turn off the power switch.

1. Power-off sequence

Power button OFF

Hold down for at least once second

Media ejection

If media remains,it is ejected even

when printing is in progress.

Power-off automatic recovery

Capping

Sensor system power OFF

Backup of various data

Power-off

F-2-6

Writing to EEPROM

2-6

Chapter 2

2.2.3 Print Position Adjustment Function

0012-6313

This printer supports a print position adjustment for the vertical and horizontal print positions, the bidirectional print position of the printhead mounted on the carriage, and the feedrate.

There are two adjustment modes for the print: automatic adjustment, in which print position adjustment patterns printed are detected by the multi sensor attached to the lower left part of the carriage, and manual adjustment, in which print position adjustment patterns that are slightly modified from one another are printed, so that visually verified adjustment values can be set from the operation panel.

To make print position adjustments, A3-or-larger-sized roll media or cut media are needed.

2.2.4 Head Management

0012-6314

This printer supports a nozzle check function to spot non-discharging nozzles in the printhead.

When the printer detects a non-discharging nozzle, it starts cleaning the printhead automatically to correct its discharge failure. If cleaning does not work, the printer backs up the non-discharging nozzle with an alternative nozzle automatically to ensure unfailing print performance.

Detection timings (automatic):

Power-on, carriage cover open detection, print start (check timing variable by selecting Nozzle Check from the system menu).

2.2.5 Printhead Overheating Protection Control

0012-6315

When an abnormal temperature rise in the printhead is detected, overheating protection control launches.

Overheating could occur in the printhead after a period of print operations without the nozzles being filled with inks.

Overheating protection control is implemented on the basis of the temperature detected by the head temperature sensor for each nozzle. When an abnormal temperature is detected in any nozzle train, overheating protection control is exerted at one of two levels according to that temperature.

Protection level 1:

If the head temperature sensor (DI sensor) detects a temperature higher than the protection temperature, it halts the carriage temporarily at the scan end position in the direction of travel according to the carriage scan status.

Printing resumes when the printhead radiates naturally to cool down below a predetermined temperature or when 30 seconds or longer have elapsed since the detection of the higher temperature.

Protection level 2:

If the head temperature sensor (DI sensor) detects a temperature higher than the abnormal temperature, the printer shuts down the print operation immediately, moving the carriage to the home position for capping, with an error indication on the display.

2.2.6 Pause between Pages

0012-6320

An inter-page function is available to prevent ink rubbing, which keeps paper just printed hanging above the platen and waiting for a predetermined period of time before delivery.

The wait time is user-programmable from the print driver. This feature is particularly useful on paper that takes time to dry after printing, such as film.

2.2.7 White Raster Skip

This printer supports a white raster skip function to bypass carriage scanning in a consecutive sequence of voids in print data, for added throughput.

0012-6322

2.2.8 Sleep Mode

0012-6324

The printer has sleep mode to reduce its standby power requirement.

The printer transitions to sleep mode automatically when it has been left idle or no print data has been received for a predetermined period of time while the printer is online or offline.

The printer exits sleep mode when any operation panel key is activated or print data is received from the host computer.

The time to transition to sleep mode is variable from the operation panel (Default: 5minutes).

2.2.9 Shut Down Mode

The power supply of printer turns off automatically to reduce the power consumption when the sleep mode is continued for a predetermined period of time.

The time to transition to shut down mode can be changed by the operation panel (Default: 8 hours).

0031-2532

2-7

Chapter 2

2.2.10 Hard Disk Drive

This printer features a hard disk drive, which provides the following functions.

- Early release of the host computer

- Error recovery

- Job preservation

- Preserved job print

- Job queue handling

0013-9239

1) Early release of the host computer

Each print job received from the host computer is preserved to the hard disk drive attached to the printer, so the printer can proceed with independent printing, releasing the host computer before the print job completes.

2) Error recovery

If a print job aborts as a result of any print problem, such as a paper jam or insufficient paper, the printer reloads the print job stored on the hard disk so it can resume the print job without having to retransmit the job from the host computer to it.

3) Job preservation

Print jobs are in the common box, a place of temporary data storage, and in the personal box, a place of permanent data storage.

Normal print jobs are stored in the common box as they are received. Due to the limited hard disk space available, jobs stored in the common box are deleted from the oldest one in sequence.

Print jobs can be simply stored in the personal box without printing. Print jobs stored in the common box can be moved to the personal box.

4) Preserved job handling

Print jobs stored in the personal box or common box can be printed from the operation panel.

5) Job queue handling

Multiple jobs queued for print can be handled. including the raising priority order of selected jobs in the queue or canceling selected print jobs.

2-8

Chapter 2

2.3 Printer Mechanical System

2.3.1 Outline

2.3.1.1 Outline

0023-1469

The printer mechanism can be broadly divided into two major components: the ink passage and paper path.

The ink passage consists of the ink tank unit, the carriage unit having the printhead, the purge unit, the maintenance cartridge, and the tube unit which are used to supply, circulate, and suck ink.

The paper path consists of the feed roller unit to support one type of media feeding, transport, and ejection.

This section provides an overview of these mechanical components.

Feed Roller

Pinch Roller

Ink Tank Unit

Carriage

Printhead

Ink Tube


F-2-7

Purge Unit

Ink Tank Unit

2-9

Chapter 2

2.3.2 Ink Passage

2.3.2.1 Ink Passage

2.3.2.1.1 Overview of Ink Passage

0031-2533

The ink passage houses the ink tank, printhead, caps, maintenance jet tray, maintenance cartridge, waste ink collector, ink tubes interconnecting the mechanical units, suction pump driven mainly for sucking inks and so on. Its functions include supplying, circulating and sucking inks.

The ink passage (per color) is schematically shown below, along with the ink flow.

Mechanical Drive Unit

Ink Flow

Carriage Unit

Agitation Plate

Ink Tank

Needle(air passage)

Needle(ink supply)

Air Passage

Ink Supply

Valve

Joint

Suction Pump

Printhead

Cap

Subtank Ink Remaining

Detection Needle

Subtank

Waste ink except BK Waste BK ink


F-2-8

a) Supplying inks from the ink tanks to the ink supply valve assembly

The ink tanks each contain ink to feed the printhead.

The ink is supplied from the ink tanks to the subtanks first, then to the ink supply valves.

Air is discharged through the air passage to keep the internal pressure of the ink tanks and subtanks constant.

b) Supplying inks from the ink supply valves to the printhead

The ink stored in an ink tank flows to the printhead when the suction pump is driven with the ink supply valve opened and the head capped.

The ink sucked from the caps flows to the maintenance cartridge.

c) Supplying inks while printing

The ink supply valves is kept open while printing, so that inks is constantly flowing to the printhead under the negative pressure of the nozzle assembly which is caused by the discharging inks.

Furthermore, waste inks sucked in the cleaning operation and inks from the maintenance jet tray flow into the maintenance cartridge.

If all of ink passages are opened (no ink tank is installed, the ink supply valve is opened and the printhead fixer lever is opened) when the ink tube is being filled with ink, the ink in the ink tube may reverse-flow due to the fluid level difference and ink may leak from the hollow needle of the ink tank.

Do not open all of the ink passages at the same time when the ink tube is being filled with ink.

d) Agitation of ink in the ink tank

Ink in the ink tank and the subtank are agitated to prevent precipitation of pigment-based ink in the ink tank and subtank.

This function is implemented by reverse-flowing ink to the ink tank and subtank by opening and closing the ink supply valve in succession. Inside the ink tank is provided with an agitation plate to assist agitation of ink. (The agitation plate is also provided in the dye ink tank.

- Operation timing: When a new ink tank is installed or when 168 hours have lapsed since the previous agitation (the agitation is performed irrespective of the whether the printer is printing or cleaning its head)

- Ink supply valve opening/closing count: 30 times (every 30 seconds)

If 336 or more hours have lapsed, the ink valve opening/closing count and the time until the next agitation are changed according to the length of the tame lapsed.

2-10

Chapter 2

2.3.2.2 Ink Tank Unit

2.3.2.2.1 Structure of Ink Tank Unit

0031-2534

a) Ink tank

Each ink tank contains 130 ml or 300 ml of ink (the starter ink tank supplied with the printer contains 90 ml of ink) for each color. The amount of ink is memorized in the EEPROM mounted to the ink tank.

The amount of the ink remaining in the ink tank is detected as a dot count according to the data memorized in the EEPROM.

When the electrodes mounted to the hollow needle detect a con-conductive state, a message appears on the display to indicate that the ink is nearly empty. If the dot count reaches the prescribed value, the ink tank is considered to be empty.

b) Ink port

When the ink tank lock lever is pressed down, the hollow needle enters the ink port (covered with a rubber plug), establishing an ink passage between the printer and ink tank.

c) Air passage

When the ink tank lever of the printer is pressed down, the hollow needle enters the air passage (covered with a rubber plug) and thus the internal pressure of the ink tank is released, maintaining the internal pressure constant.

d) Notches for preventing incorrect insertion

The ink tanks have notches for preventing incorrect location. Wrong ink tanks cannot be installed in place due to these notches.

The ink tank lock lever can lowered to start ink supply only when the ink tank has been installed in place.

e) Agitation plate

The agitation plate assists the ink agitation which is performed to prevent precipitation of ink.

Notches for Preventing incorrect installation

Air Passage

Ink Port Notches for

Preventing incorrect installation

EEPROM

Notches for preventing incorrect installation

Ink Tank

Agitation

Plate

F-2-9

2-11

Chapter 2

f) Subtank

The subtank installed under each ink tank complements the work of the ink tank, agitating the ink in the tank.

If the ink tank runs out of the ink while printing, the ink stored in the subtank is available, allowing the ink tank to be replaced without having to stop printing.

g) Ink supply valve

The ink supply valve is located between the ink tank and ink tube to prevent ink leakage from occurring when the ink tube on the ink tank side is opened during replacement of the ink tank.

The ink supply valve is opened and closed by the valve open/close mechanism which is driven by the valve motor.

The ink tank unit (Left/Right) consist of tank bases each of which contains ink tanks for three colors and the ink tubes for three colors.

Ink supply valves for all colors are opened and closed at the same time.

Ink Supply Valve

Ink Supply Valve Open/Closed Lever

Subtank

Ink Supply Valve Cam

F-2-10

Valve Motor

Ink Supply Valve Open/Closed Detection Sensor

2-12

Chapter 2

2.3.2.3 Carriage Unit

2.3.2.3.1 Functions of Carriage Unit

0023-1473

a) Printhead mounting function

The carriage mechanically locks the printhead and transmits the print signals to the printhead via the carriage PCB.

b) Control function

The carriage incorporates a carriage PCB that relays the signal from the main controller, a linear encoder that generates a print timing signal based on the detected carriage position, and a multi sensor that detects the media width and skewing to adjust the registration and height.

The carriage PCB and main controller PCB are connected with a flexible cable.

c) Carriage drive function

The carriage motor moves the carriage back and forth on the platen via the carriage belt.

d) Printhead maintenance function

The printer performs the printhead cleaning operation such as printhead wiping and suction at the home position of the carriage.

e) Nozzle check function

The printer detects a non-discharging nozzle using the head management sensor attached to the maintenance jet tray by discharging ink with the carriage stopped at the maintenance jet tray.

f) Media thickness adjustment function

If the gap between the printhead face and the media increases due to the difference in media thickness, cockling, curling, and so on, more ink mist is generated. In reverse, if the gap decreases, the head can touch the media surface more frequently.

To maintain the proper gap, the remote lifter is driven to adjust the head height automatically according to the selected media type, media supply method, printing conditions (borderless/priority print type), environmental conditions (temperature/humidity), and the result of measurement by the multi sensor.

The relationship between media types and head heights (from the platen) is summarized in the table below. Note that the head height is adjusted with priority given to the media gap measured by the multi sensor.

1.0

1.3

1.8

2

2.2

2.6

Head height (mm) Media type (Value in parentheses:mm)*1

(select by the user when using the plain paper)

Photo paper, Synthetic paper, Backlit film

Plain paper, Coated paper

Heavyweight coated paper

Premiun matte paper, Special

Special (at the low humidity or high humidity)

*1: Roll media, borderless printing, standard mode excert for line document

g) Paper leading edge detection function/paper width detection function/skewing detection function

The leading edge, width, and skewing of the paper fed to the platen is detected by the multi sensor mounted at the lower left of the carriage.

h) Auto printing position adjustment function

The adjustment pattern printed on paper is read by the multi sensor mounted at the lower left of the carriage, thus adjusting the printing timings of each printhead automatically.

i) Remaining roll media detection function

The amount of the remaining roll paper can be detected using the multi sensor mounted at the lower left of the carriage by printing a barcode at delivery of the roll media.

j) Internal temperature detection function

The internal temperature around the printhead is detected using the thermistor mounted on the carriage PCB.

2-13

Chapter 2

2.3.2.3.2 Structure of Carriage Unit

0023-2472

a) Printhead mounting unit

The printhead is secured to the carriage by the printhead fixer lever.

When the printhead is secured to the carriage, the signal contact of the carriage PCB touches the signal contact point of the printhead, allowing print signals to be transmitted.

The ink passage from the ink tank is connected to the printhead through the ink tube and joint.

b) Ink port

Ink is supplied to the printhead via an ink tube, which is connected to ink joints, and runs between the tube guides to reach the carriage and follow its movement.

Printhead Fixer Cover

Joint for Ink Supply

Printhead Fixer Lever

Carriage Motor

Terminal

Slant Adjustment Lever

Ink Tube

F-2-11

c) Control unit

The carriage PCB is connected to the main controller PCB with a flexible cable. The flexible cable moves in conjunction with the carriage.

A photo-coupler-type encoder is mounted at the top of the rear of the carriage to detect the slit on the linear scale during carriage movement, thus controlling the print timing.

d) Carriage drive

Mechanical misregistrations in the vertical/horizontal and bidirectional print positions of the printhead mounted can be corrected by selecting Adjust Printer from the main menu to shift the print timing.

A DC-operated carriage motor drives the carriage reciprocally on the platen by way of the carriage belt.

The carriage home position, or the capping position, is detected by the sensor flag on the right side of the carriage and the photointerrupter-based carriage HP sensor on the right side of the printer. When the linear scale position is set as a reference home position for use in subsequent position control operations, the carriage motor is driven by a control signal generated from the main controller PCB.

e) Printhead maintenance unit

This printer cleans the printhead with the carriage halted at its home position.

Wiping takes place through the rotation of the motor.

Wiper blades mounted on the carriage wipe the printhead while the carriage is halted at its home position.

Wet wiping is carried out for added wiping removal performance, whereby the wiper blades are moistened with glycerin as they are pressed against an absorber impregnated with glycerin.

Maintenance jet ejection is carried out on the cap, at the maintenance jet tray.

A suction operation is carried out by a suction cap in the purge unit.

2-14

Chapter 2

Carriage

Slant Adjustment Lever

Spring (for Printhead Height)

Spring (for Printhead Slant)

Slant Adjustment Lever Shaft

Spring (for Printhead Slant)

Carriage Height Changing Cam

Head Holder

Lift Cam Sensor

Lift Motor

F-2-12

f) Carriage height adjustment unit

The head height is adjusted with the carriage halted at its home position.

The lift motor is driven to rotate the carriage height changing cam within the carriage, in sync with which the lift cams on both sides of the carriage move the head holder up and down, thereby varying the separation between the face of the printhead and the paper.

The printhead height is detected from the lift cam sensor within the carriage and the distance of rotation of the lift motor.

g) Slant adjustment unit

The tilting of the head is adjusted with the slant adjustment lever.

The point where the slant adjustment lever axis touches the head holder is offset from the fulcrum of the lever axis. Therefore, the printhead is tilted by moving the slant adjustment lever and moving the position on the right side of the head holder back or forward.

Linear Encoder Sensor

Carriage PCB

Shaft Cleaner

Multi Sensor Reference

Multi Sensor

Shaft Cleaner

Linear Scale

Lift Cam Sensor


Lift Drive Unit

F-2-13

h) Multi Sensor

A photo reflective type multi sensor consists of three red LEDs, one red/blue/green LED array, and three light receiving sensors and is used for media end, skew, and width adjustment, registration adjustment, head height adjustment, and print position adjustment.

The multi sensor reference has three white plates attached to it, so that a reference value can be calculated during carriage height measurement by measuring the intensity of light reflected upon the white plates.

(Service mode: SERVICE MODE>ADJUST>GAP CALIB.)

i) Shaft cleaner units

The shaft cleaners mounted at the left and right of the carriage are used to clean the carriage and apply oil to the shaft.

2-15

Chapter 2

j) Internal temperature detection

A themistor for measuring the internal temperature is mounted on the carriage PCB on the rear of the head holder.

2-16

Chapter 2

2.3.2.4 Printhead

2.3.2.4.1 Structure of Printhead

0013-4821

A printhead incorporates six nozzle arrays. Each nozzle can be controlled individually so that a six-color discharge action can be performed by a single printhead.

a) Nozzle arrays

A total of 2560 nozzles are arranged in a two-column staggered pattern.

In each column, 1280 nozzles are arranged in a staggered pattern at intervals of 600 dpi, forming a 2560-nozzle arranged at intervals of 1200 dpi.

0

2

1

3

0

2

1

3

0

2

1

3

0

2

1

3

0

2

1

3

0

2

1

3

5/600inch

1/1200inch

2556

2558

2557

2559

2556

2558

2557

2559

2556

2558

2557

2559

2556

2558

2557

2559

2556

2558

2557

2559

2556

2558

2557

2559

82/600inch

F-2-14

b) Nozzle structure

Ink supplied from the ink tank is filtered by a mesh ink filter, and the supplied to the nozzles.

Ink is supplied from the shared ink chamber to the nozzles. When the head driving current is applied to the nozzle heater, ink boils and form bubbles so that ink droplets are discharged from the nozzles.

Resin

Sillicon plate

Heater Heater

Shared ink chamber

F-2-15

2-17

Chapter 2

2.3.2.5 Purge Unit

2.3.2.5.1 Functions of Purge Unit

To maintain high print quality, the purge unit performs maintenance of the nozzles of the printhead.

The purge unit supports a capping function, cleaning function, and ink supply function.

Purge Unit

0023-2473

F-2-16

a) Capping function

The capping function presses the cap of the purge unit against the face plate on the nozzle section of the printhead to prevent nozzle drying and dust adhesion.

Capping is performed when printing is complete, at the start of the suction operation, and when switching to the standby state due to an error.

The capping function also establishes the ink passage between the printhead and purge unit.

b) Cleaning function

The cleaning function restores the printhead to the state where ink can be easily discharged from nozzles. This function includes the following three types of operations.

- Wiping operation

This operation is performed to remove paper fibers and dried ink from the face plate.

- Pumping operation

This operation is performed to remove ink from the nozzles and fill the nozzles with fresh ink.

- Maintenance jet operation

This operation is performed to spray ink from the nozzles to the cap, the maintenance jet ink groove of the platen to remove bubbles in the nozzles and dust and other foreign particles.

c) Ink supply function

The suction pump of the purge unit operates together with the ink supply valve to supply ink to the printhead during the initial filling and ink level adjustment.

2-18

Chapter 2

Details of the cleaning function are shown in the table below.

Cleaning mode

Cleaning 1

Cleaning 2

Name of Service mode or

PRINT INF

(Name of Main Menu)

CLN-A-1/CLN-M-1

(Head Cleaning A)

CLN-A-2

Normal cleaning

Operation

Ink level adjustment and cleaning

Cleaning 3

Cleaning 4

Initial filling ink

Ink drainage for head replacement

Cleaning 5

Cleaning 6

Cleaning 7

Cleaning 10

Cleaning 11

Cleaning 15

CLN-A-3

CLN-M-4

(Replace P.head)

CLN-M-5

(Move Printer)

CLN-A-6/CLN-M-6

(Head Cleaning B)

CLN-A-7

CLN-A-10

(Move Printer)

CLN-A-11

CLN-A-15

Ink drainage for secondary transport

Normal (strong) cleaning

Aging

Ink filling after secondary transport

Ink filling after head replacement

Dot count suction

Cleaning 16

Cleaning 17

CLN-A-16

CLN-A-17

Precipitated ink agitation

Cleaning (weak)

Description of cleaning

Removes dried ink from nozzles, thick ink accumulated on the face, and paper particles.

Adjust the ink level in the head by suction, and then performs normal cleaning.

Fills the empty tube (during initial installation) with ink, and then performs normal cleaning.

Drains ink to replace the head (drains only the ink in the head).

Drains ink from the head and tube for secondary transport.

Performs suction stronger than when adjusting the ink filling amount in the head or normal cleaning to unclog nozzles.

Performs idle ejection after replacement of the head.

Fills the empty tube (during installation after secondary transport) with ink, and performs normal cleaning.

Performs normal cleaning after head replacement and ink filling.

Performs suction to remove ink adhered to dried nozzles and thick ink accumulated on the face when the dot count reaches the prescribed value.

Performs the agitation (ink supply valve open/close) operation to prevent the ink ingredient from precipitating.

Performs cleaning weaker than normal cleaning to unclog nozzles.

2-19

Chapter 2

Cleaning operation timings are as follows.

Standby

Power-on

Power off

Before the start of printing

Printing

After the end of printing

Printer status Cleaning operation

Ink consumption

(typ.)*1

5g The following times elapsed since the last section of Cleaning 2, 3, 6, 10.

- Color: At least 720 hours

- Black: At least 3120 to 9360 hours

At initial installation and 96 hours elapsed since the last session of Cleaning 16

Cleaning 6 (Normal

(strong) Cleaning)

Cleaning 16

(Precipitated ink agitation)

-

Wiping + Idle ejection 0.013g

1 hour elapsed capped with a specified number of dots discharged per chip completed after last wiping

At initial installation

Both heads and inks available

The print operation has completed. The following times elapsed since the last section of Cleaning 2, 3, 6,

10.

- Color: At least 720 hours

- Black: At least 3120 to 9360 hours

At least 96 hours elapsed since the last session of Cleaning 16

Cleaning 3 (initial filling ink)

Cleaning 6 (Normal

(strong) Cleaning)

50g

5g

Cleaning 16

(Precipitated ink agitation)

-


Print operation aborted (uncapped) and CR error occurring

At least 1 hour elapsed capped with a specified number of dots discharged per chip completed after last wiping

Up to 72 hours elapsed after an abort

Cleaning 1 (Normal

Cleaning)

Over 72 hours elapsed after an abort Cleaning 6 (Normal

(strong) Cleaning)

Print operation aborted (uncapped) and no CR error occurring Cleaning 11 (ink filling after head replacement)

1g

5g

10g

No heads are available

Specified number of dots discharged per chip completed since the last session of wiping

Less than 168 hours elapsed capped

Before printing in the wake of an error occurrence

Cleaning 10 (ink filling on secondary transport)

60g


Idle ejection

Cleaning 1 (Normal

Cleaning)

0.013g

1g

Before scanning while printing Idle ejection (+Wiping) - (0.013g)

A specified number of dots (color) discharged per chip since the last session of Cleaning 2, 3, 6 or 1 Cleaning 6 (Normal

(strong) Cleaning)

5g

A specified number of dots discharged per chip after the last session of wiping

3 minutes elapsed since the last session of capping

Wiping + Idle ejection

Wiping + Idle ejection

0.013g

0.013g

0.5 to 3 hours elapsed uncapped since the last session of Cleaning 1, 2, 3, 6 or 10

Manual Cleaning (Head Cleaning A)

Manual cleaning (Head cleaning B)

Idle ejection

Cleaning 1 (Normal

Cleaning)

Cleaning 6 (Normal

(strong) Cleaning)

MBK:0.5g(X2)

1g

5g

When the

Head

Cleaning menu choice is executed

When the

Replace

Printhead menu choice is executed

When the

Move Printer menu choice is executed

After and before head replacement

After the Move Printer menu choice is executed

After power-on at secondary installation

Cleaning 4 (ink drainage for head replacement) +

Cleaning 11 (ink filling after head replacement)

Cleaning 5 (ink drainage for secondary transport)

After power-on at secondary installation

20g

10g

60g

*1: Quantities of ink consumption by nozzle train

2-20

Chapter 2

2.3.2.5.2 Structure of Purge Unit

0023-1476

a) Cap unit

The cap unit is used to cap the printhead nozzles during capping and cleaning. The portion that touches the face plate is made from rubber. Two caps are arranged for the printhead (six arrays of nozzles) installed in the carriage.

During cleaning, the caps used for both suction and capping are used to suck ink from the printhead using the suction pump.

During capping, the caps are raised by the purge motor to cover the printhead when the carriage has moved to the home position, thus protecting the nozzles.

Glycerin Tank

Carriage Lock Pin

Wiper Blade

Cap

Pump Cam Sensor

Pump Encoder Sensor

Purge Motor

F-2-17

2-21

Chapter 2

b) Wiper unit

The wiper unit operated by the purge motor wipes the printhead face.

The printer is provided with a pair of wiper blades for better wiping performance.

The wiping operation is performed by a "slide wipe" method by which the purge motor rotates (in the normal direction) to slide the wiper blade via the wiper cam.

It is performed by a constant-speed movement toward the front of the printer as viewed from the printer front.

The wiper blade, which is positioned at right angles to the printhead, wipes the entire printhead face, and then the narrow blade is used to wipe the nozzle arrays.

After wiping, the wipe blades are cleaned before they are set at the wiping position so that the maximum wiping performance is obtained.

During the wiper blade cleaning, the ink removed form the head is rubbed off by the in scraper.

Absorbent material soaked with glycerin is pressed against the wiper blades to enhance the wiping performance. The amount of glycerin used (tank capacity: 50 ml) is managed by counting the number of times the wiper blade is pressed against the absorbent material. When the count reaches the following value, an advance notice of replacement (printing can be continued) or a request for replacement (service call error) is displayed.

Advance notice of replacement

Service call

Glycerin Absorbent Material

Glycerin Tank

Ink Scraper

47,500times

50,000times

Printhead

Wiper Blade

Blade Holder

Cap

Wiper Cam

F-2-18

c) Pump unit

This printer uses tube pumps (suction pumps) that press on the ink tubes using rollers to produce negative pressure, thus sucking ink.

Two rollers are used to press on a single tube one after another to control the amount of ink sucked.

The roller rotation timing is detected by the pump cam sensor, and the amount of rotation is controlled by the driving of the purge motor.

Pump Cam Sensor

Cap

Pump Unit

Suction Pump

Cap

Push Rollers Ink Tubes

To Maintenance Cartridge

Purge Motor

Pump Encoder Sensor

F-2-19

2-22

Chapter 2

2.3.2.6 Maintenance Cartridge

2.3.2.6.1 Maintenance Cartridge

0023-2484

a) Maintenance cartridge

The maintenance cartridge holds as much about 893 ml (part of MBK (pigment) ink: 210 ml/part of dye ink: 683 ml) of used inks.

b) Used maintenance cartridge ink detection

Used maintenance cartridge ink detection is monitored with regard to a dot count.

When the quantity of the used ink reaches about 800 ml (80% of the cartridge capacity), the warning message "Check maint cartridge capacity" is displayed to tell that the maintenance cartridge is nearly full.

Printing may continue even when the warning message is displayed.

When the quantity of the used ink reaches about 893 ml (100% of the cartridge capacity), a replacement prompt error message is displayed, telling that the maintenance cartridge is full.

When the printer determines that the maintenance cartridge is full, it shuts down even while it is printing.

The printer will remain inoperable until the maintenance cartridge is replaced.

MEMO:

The maintenance cartridge houses EEPROM, so that main controller PCB can control the status of the maintenance cartridge by writing to and reading from the

EEPROM content.

There is no need to initialize the counter information, therefore, when the maintenance cartridge is replaced.


F-2-20

2-23

Chapter 2

2.3.2.7 Air Flow

2.3.2.7.1 Air Flow

0023-2485

This printer is equipped with a mist fan to collect the ink mist and a suction fan to suck the media to the platen.

The ink floating in air or spattered from the media during printing passes through the suction port because of the air flow inside the printer and is collected inside the mist fan and mist exhaust duct.

There is a duct below the platen and the ink mist in the duct is collected in the platen suction duct by the platen suction fan.

Platen Shutter

Platen Suction Fan

Mist Fan

Platen Exhaust Duct

F-2-21

Mist Exhaust Duct

There are two ducts below the platen and each is connected to the platen suction fan. One comes from the borderless printing ink receiving grooves and the other comes from the suction port.

The duct from the borderless printing ink receiving grooves has a shutter unit in front of the platen suction fan. This controls the suction pressure from the borderless printing ink receiving grooves according to the paper size and number of print passes with the shutter opening amount of the shutter unit in order to prevent ink flowing and smearing at the edge of paper during borderless printing.

The shutter position (opening) is detected by the shutter HP sensor and the rotation of the shutter motor.

2-24

The shutter is controlled at the following six positions.

To Platen Suction Fan

From borderless printing ink receiving grooves of BP

[1]

[2]

Borderless printing

To Platen Suction Fan

[4]

[5]

[3]

[6]

[2]

Bordered printing

From borderless printing ink receiving grooves of HP

Shutter Motor

Chapter 2

Shutter HP Sensor

Shutter

F-2-22

[2]

[3]

[4]

[5]

[6]

[1]

Shutter position

Shutter opening During borderless printing During bordered printing

Only HP side open Yes (17 inch or shorter media)

Fully open Yes (B2 or larger media)

Fully close

1/4 open

1/2 open

3/4 open

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

2-25

Chapter 2

2.3.3 Paper Path

2.3.3.1 Outline

2.3.3.1.1 Overview of Paper Path

0023-2511

The paper pass comprises an roll unit, a feed roller, a pinch roller pressure drive unit that pressurizes and depressurizes the pinch roller, a roll holder drive unit that drives the roll holder and sensors that detect the transport status of paper to feed paper in one way, and transport and eject the paper.

Multi Sensor

Upper Delivery Guide

Cutter

Pinch Roller

Media

Roll Encoder Sensor

Platen

Feed Roller

F-2-23


2-26

2.3.3.2 Paper Path

2.3.3.2.1 Structure of Feed Roller Unit



Feed Motor

Pinch Roller

Feed Roller


Chapter 2

0023-2512

F-2-24

a) Feed roller Unit

The feed roller unit consists of media feeding mechanisms such as feed rollers driven by the feed motor and the pinch roller unit operating in conjunction with the feed rollers.

While being held flat on the platen, media is fed horizontally under the printhead.

b) Detection Unit

The feed roller unit has a sensor that detects the media feed status and a sensor that detects the status of the mechanisms that constitute the paper path.

2-27

Chapter 2

Release Lever Lock Lever


Release Lever Lock Solenoid

Roll Motor Roll Holder

Release Lever

Roll Media Drive Unit

Roll Encoder Sensor

F-2-25

c) Roll media drive unit

The paper feed unit has a roll media drive unit to prevent sagging and skewing of media when feeding a roll media. The roll media drive unit feeds/rewinds the roll media by rotating the roll holder with the forward/reverse rotation of the roll motor.

The roll encoder sensor of the roll media drive unit detects the rotation of the roll holder during roll media feed, and assumes the end of roll media is reached when the roll holder stops rotating.

d) Release lever unit

The release lever is used to release the pinch roller pressure when setting the media or fixing jam.

The release lever lock solenoid turns ON and locks the release lever with the release lever lock lever so that the pinch roller pressure cannot be released while printing.

The release lever lock status is detected with the release lever lock sensor.

2-28

Chapter 2

2.3.3.3 Cutter Unit

2.3.3.3.1 Structure of Cutter Unit

0023-2516

When a roll media is used, the cutter unit cuts the leading end of the roll on loading and also cuts the roller on paper ejection. Whether cutting takes place or not depends on the relevant printer driver setting in the main menu.

The cutter in the cutter unit stands by at the cutter home position, except when a roll media is cut. Power imparted from the cutter motor to the cutter via a circular belt drives it to travel from right to left for cutting.

Cutter Motor


Cutter

Cutter HP Sensor

Cutter Unit

F-2-26

2-29

Chapter 2

2.4 Printer Electrical System

2.4.1 Outline

2.4.1.1 Overview

0031-2540

The printer electrical system consists of the main controller PCB and power supply PCB and HDD which are mounted on the rear side of the printer, the carriage

PCB and printhead which are mounted in the carriage, and other electrical components such as the operation panel, sensors, and motors.

The main controller PCB manages the image data processing and the entire electrical system, and controls relay PCBs and driver functions.

Main Controller PCB

HDD

Carriage PCB

Operation Panel PCB

F-2-27

Power Supply

2-30

Chapter 2

AC inlet

Linear Encoder

Sensor

Printhead

EEPROM

Multi Sensor

EEPROM

HDD

Power Supply PCB

+26V generation function

+21.5V generation function

Host Computer

HDD Expansion PCB

IC201

HDD Controller

Carriage PCB

IC401

DI Sensor reading control function

Temperature reading control function

Thermistor

IC503/IC504

Multi Sensor control function

Main Controller PCB

IC1501/IC1701

IC1601-IC1603

Power supply control function

BATS801

Lithium Battery

IC803

RTC

IC2501

LAN Controller

IC601-IC604

SDRAM

IC301/IC302

SDRAM

IC1

IC802

EEPROM

Interface control function

Image data control function

Hard Disk Drive control function

Linear Encoder detection function

Heat pulse control function

IC701 FLASH ROM

IC2

Operation panel control function

PWM control function

Remaining ink level detection function

LED control function

EEPROM contol function

Sensor detection function

Solenoid control function

Motor control function

Operation Panel

Fans

Ink Tank ROM PCB


Relay PCB

IC1 EEPROM

Sensors

Solenoids

F-2-28

IC4101/IC4200

IC4300/IC4401

Motor Driver

Motors

2-31

Chapter 2

2.4.2 Main Controller

2.4.2.1 Main controller PCB components

0031-2542

IC803

IC802

BATS801

IC4101

IC4200

IC4300

IC4401

IC2

IC701

IC301

IC1

IC2501

IC604

IC603

IC602

IC601

IC302

F-2-29

a) ASIC (IC1/IC2)

The ASIC (IC1/IC2) with a 32/16-bit internal bus is driven in sync with the 165/66 MHz external clock. It supports the following functions:

Image processing unit

This unit converts the RGB multi-value image data or CMYK multi-value data received from the host computer through the interface connector to the binary image data for the ink colors used.

DMA controller

This controller control DMA transfer of the data transferred through the input interfaces as well as DMA transfer of the data stored in the DIMM.

Image data generation/output function

This function generates image data for color printing from the received image data and the mask pattern (corresponding to print mode) stored in the FLASH ROM, and stored the generated image data in DIMM. It also outputs the generated image data to the carriage PCB.

Interrupt controller

This controller receives and processes internal interrupts and external interrupts from the USB, image processing unit, and expansion card slot.

Timer function

Even when the printer is turned off, the timer function is held on using the RTC(IC803) and lithium battery(BATS801) to assist the cleaning function.

When the power cord is plugged to the outlet, power is supplied to the RTC and therefore the lithium battery power is not consumed.

Heat Enable signal control function

This function uses the pulse width to perform variable control of the time of application of the Heat Enable signal to the nozzle heater board for each printhead nozzle array.

Linear scale count function

This function reads the linear scale when the carriage moves, thus generating the ink discharge timing. It also counts the linear scale timing cycle using the reference clock to measure the carriage moving speed.

Dot count function

This function controls the discharge dots used as the information for Heat Enable signal control, maintenance jet control, cleaning control, and remaining ink level for each nozzle array.

Operation panel control function

This function controls serial communication with the operation panel.

PWM control function

This function controls driving of the suction fan and mist fan as well as the temperature of the printhead.

Remaining ink level detection function

This function detects the remaining level of each color of ink based on the signal received from the hollow needle mounted in the ink tank unit.

LED control function

This function controls the LEDs on the ink tank unit.

I/O port function

This function controls input signals from sensors.

Power ON/OFF control function

This function controls turning on/off of the drive power (26 V and 21.5 V) supplied from the power supply PCB.

Head DI sensor read control function

This function controls read operation by the head DI sensor.

Multi sensor control function

This function controls the LED, adjusts the gain, and controls obtainment of the reading for the multi sensor.

EEPROM control function

This function controls the EEPROMs of individual ink tanks, the maintenance cartridge EEPROM, the EEPROM on the maintenance cartridge relay PCB, and the

2-32

Chapter 2

head EEPROM in addition to the on-board EEPROM.

Motor control function

This function controls the carriage motor, feed motor, valve motor (L)/(R), shutter motor, purge motor, lift motor, roll motor and cutter motor based on the input signals from sensors.

HDD control function

This function controls the hard disk drive.

b) Driver IC (IC4101)

This IC generates a carriage motor control signal based on the control signal from the ASIC.

c) Driver IC (IC4200)

This IC generates a feed motor control signal based on the control signal from the ASIC.

d) Driver IC (IC4300)

This IC generates purge motor and cutter motor control signals based on the control signal from the ASIC.

e) Driver IC (IC4401)

This IC generates roll motor and valve motor (L)/(R) control signals based on the control signal from the ASIC.

f) DIMMs (IC301, IC302, IC601, IC602, IC603, IC604)

The DIMM comprising a 512-MB DDR-SDRAM (IC301/IC302) and 256-MB SDR-SDRAM (IC601/IC602/IC603/IC604) is connected to the 32-bit data bus to be used as a work area.

During print data reception, it is also used as an image buffer.

It cannot be expanded.

g) FLASH ROM (IC701)

A 256-MB flash ROM is connected to the 8-bit data bus to store the printer control program.

h) EEPROM (IC802)

The 256-KB EEPROM stores various setting values, adjustment values, log data, counter values related to the user/servicing.

i) Network control IC (IC2501)

This IC controls the network interface.

MEMO:

After replacement of the main controller PCB, the printer must be started up in the service mode to copy over the setting and adjustment values to the new PCB properly (the service mode will be switched to the PCB replacement mode automatically).

2-33

Chapter 2

2.4.2.2 Connectors and Pin Arrangement of Main controller PCB

J4101

1

J1801

J4102

1

1

1

J4201

1

J3901

1

J3301

1

J4501

1

J3201

1

J2701

1

J2601

J3303 J3001

1 1

J3602

1

J3601

1

J3401

1

5

6

3

4

1

2

J1001 (USB)

Pin Number

VBUS

D-

D+

GND

GND

GND

Signal name

10

11

12

8

9

6

7

4

5

2

3

J2501 (Network)

Pin Number

1

Signal name

NETWK-OUT0-P

NETWK-OUT0-N

NETWK-OUT1-P

NETWK-OUT2-P

NETWK-OUT2-N

NETWK-OUT1-N

NETWK-OUT3-P

NETWK-OUT3-N

3.3V

LED1

LED2

LED0

7

8

9

10

5

6

3

4

1

2

J1801 (Connect to Power supply)

Pin Number Signal name

PW_CONT

VM(+32V)

VM(+32V)

VMGND

VMGND

VH(+32V)

VH(+32V)

VHGND

VHGND

PW_ENB(VH_ENB)

1

J2951 J2801

1

F-2-30

T-2-1

IN/OUT

IN

IN/OUT

-

-

-

IN/OUT

USB VBUS(+5V)

USB data (-)

USB data (+)

USB GND

GND (Connector shell)

GND (Connector shell)

T-2-2

Function

IN/OUT

IN/OUT

IN/OUT

IN/OUT

IN/OUT

IN/OUT

IN/OUT

IN/OUT

IN/OUT

OUT

OUT

OUT

OUT

Ethernet data transmission line (+)

Ethernet data transmission line (-)

Ethernet data reception line (+)



Ethernet data reception line (-)



Power supply (+3.3V)

Link LED (green:1000Mb/s)

Link LED (yellow:10Mb/s)

Link LED (yellow:100Mb/s)

T-2-3

Function

-

IN

-

IN

IN/OUT

OUT

IN

-

IN

-

OUT

Normal/power saving switch signal

Power supply (+32V)

Power supply (+32V)

GND

GND

Power supply (+32V)

Power supply (+32V)

GND

GND

VH power supply ON/OFF signal

Function

J2501

1

1

J1001

2-34

0031-2547

Chapter 2

T-2-4

11

12

13

7

8

9

10

5

6

3

4

1

2

J2601 (Connect to Operation panel)


POWER_ON

GND

+5.1V

BUZZER

PDO

+5.1V

PDI

EX_HDD_LED

PRESET*

GND

PCK

PANEL5V_ON

PCS*

-

OUT

-

OUT

OUT

OUT

OUT

-

IN

IN/OUT

OUT

OUT

OUT

OUT

Power switch signal

GND


Buzzer control signal

Panel IC control signal


Panel IC data signal

N.C

Panel IC reset signal

GND

Panel IC clock signal

LED backlight power supply (+5V)

Panel chip select signal

Function

T-2-5

5

6

3

4

7

1

2

J2701 (Lift motor, Valve motor (R))


+26V_VM

LIFTM_A

LIFTM_AN

LIFTM_B

LIFTM_BN

INKBENM_R_OUTB

INKBENM_R_OUTA

IN/OUT

OUT

OUT

OUT

OUT

OUT

OUT

OUT

Power supply (+26V)

Lift motor drive signal A

Lift motor drive signal AN

Lift motor drive signal B

Lift motor drive signal BN

Valve motor (R) drive signal B

Valve motor (R) drive signal A

Function

T-2-6

17

18

19

20

13

14

15

16

9

10

11

12

7

8

5

6

3

4

1

2

J2801 (Purge motor, Pump encoder sensor, Pump cam sensor, Paper detection sensor, Lift cam sensor, Carriage HP sensor, Pinch roller pressure release switch)

Pin Number Signal name IN/OUT Function

PUMPM_OUTA

PUMPM_OUTB

PUMP_ENCB

SNS5V_FU1

OUT

OUT

IN

OUT

Purge motor drive signal A

Purge motor drive signal B

Pump encoder sensor output signal B

Power supply (+5V)

PUMP_ENCA

GND

SNS3V_FU1

GND

PUMP_HP_SNS*

GND

MEDIA_PE_SNS*

MEDIA5V

-

-

-

IN

OUT

IN

IN

OUT

Pump encoder sensor output signal A

GND


GND

Pump cam sensor output signal

GND

Paper detection sensor output signal

Power supply (+5V)

SNS3V_FU1

GND

LIFT_SNS*

SNS3V_FU1

GND

CR_HP_SNS*

RELEASE_LEV_SNS*

GND

-

IN

-

IN

-

OUT

IN

OUT


GND

Lift cam sensor output signal


GND

Carriage HP sensor output signal

Pinch roller pressure release switch output signal

GND

T-2-7

8

9

6

7

4

5

2

3

J2951 (Head management sensor, Shutter HP sensor, Shutter motor, Platen suction fan)

Pin Number

1 APCCHK

Signal name

IN

IN/OUT Function

Head management sensor unit LED current output detection signal

FUTO_MONITOR(N.C.)

GND

FUTO_CLMP*

FUTO_ON*

-

-

OUT

OUT

N.C

GND

Head management sensor unit clamp signal

Head management sensor unit LED ON/OFF signal

SNS5V

FUTO_CMP*

SNS3V_FU1

GND

OUT

IN

-

OUT

Power supply (+5V)

Head management sensor unit light shading detection signal


GND

2-35

Chapter 2

15

16

17

18

19

11

12

13

14

J2951 (Head management sensor, Shutter HP sensor, Shutter motor, Platen suction fan)

Pin Number

10

Signal name

HUSOKU_HP_SNS* IN

IN/OUT

VM_26V

HUSOKUM_OUTA

HUSOKUM_OUTAX

HUSOKUM_OUTB

HUSOKUM_OUTBX

+26V_VM

PLATEN_FAN_LOCK*

PLATEN_FAN_PWM

GND -

OUT

OUT

OUT

OUT

OUT

OUT

IN

OUT

Shutter HP sensor output signal

Power supply (+26V)

Shutter motor drive signal A

Shutter motor drive signal AX

Shutter motor drive signal B

Shutter motor drive signal BX


Platen suction fan lock signal

Platen suction fan PWM control signal

GND

Function

T-2-8

11

12

13

14

15

7

8

9

10

5

6

3

4

1

2

J3001 (Roll motor, Roll encoder sensor, Release lever lock sensor, Release lever lock solenoid)

Pin Number Signal name IN/OUT

TP_ROLL_TRNSM_AP

TP_ROLL_TRNSM_AM

OUT

OUT

Roll motor drive signal AP

Roll motor drive signal AM

TP_ROLL_TRANSM_BP

TP_ROLL_TRNSM_BM

GND

ROLL_KEI_ENCA

-

OUT

OUT

IN

Roll motor drive signal BP

Roll motor drive signal BM

GND

Roll encoder sensor output signal A

SNS5V_FU1

ROLL_KEI_ENCB

SNS5V_FU1

GND

RELEASE_LEV_MEM_SNS*

VM_26V_SOL

RELEASE_LEV_LOCK_SOL*

N.C.

N.C.

-

-

-

OUT

IN

OUT

IN

OUT

OUT

Power supply (+5V)

Roll encoder sensor output signal B

Power supply (+5V)

GND

Release lever lock sensor output signal


Release lever lock solenoid drive signal

N.C.

N.C.

Function

T-2-9

11

12

13

14

7

8

9

10

15

16

17

18

5

6

3

4

1

2

J3201 (Ink detection sensor (R), Ink supply valve open/closed detection sensor (R), Ink tank cover switch (R), Cutter HP sensor)

Pin Number Signal name IN/OUT Function

SNS_CURRENT1

GND -

OUT Sensor current control signal 1

GND

INKSEL2

INKSEL1

INKSEL0

+3.3V_TANK

OUT

OUT

OUT

OUT

Ink select signal 2

Ink select signal 1

Ink select signal 0


TANK_DAT5

TANK_DAT4

TANK_DAT3

TANK_CLK

SNS3V_FU1

GND

SUPPLY_BEN_R_SNS*

TANK_COVER_SW_R*

GND

SNS3V_FU1

GND

CUTTER_R_SNS*

-

-

-

IN/OUT

IN/OUT

IN/OUT

OUT

OUT

IN

IN

OUT

IN

Ink tank data signal 5



Ink tank clock signal


GND

Ink supply valve open/closed detection sensor (R) output signal

Ink tank cover switch (R) output signal

GND


GND

Cutter HP sensor output signal

T-2-10

8

9

6

7

4

5

2

3

J3301 (Ink detection sensor (L), Ink supply valve open/closed detection sensor (L), Ink tank cover switch (L))

Pin Number

1

Signal name

SNS_CURRENT0

IN/OUT

OUT Sensor current control signal 0

Function

GND

INKSEL2

INKSEL1

INKSEL0

-

OUT

OUT

OUT

GND

Ink select signal 2

Ink select signal 1

Ink select signal 0

+3.3V_TANK

TANK_DAT2

TANK_DAT1

TANK_DAT0

OUT

IN/OUT

IN/OUT

IN/OUT





2-36

11

12

13

14

15

J3301 (Ink detection sensor (L), Ink supply valve open/closed detection sensor (L), Ink tank cover switch (L))

Pin Number

10 TANK_CLK

Signal name IN/OUT

OUT Ink tank clock signal

Function

SNS3V_FU1

GND

SUPPLY_BEN_L_SNS*

TANK_COVER_SW_L*

GND

-

-

OUT

IN

IN


GND

Ink supply valve open/closed detection sensor (L) output signal

Ink tank cover switch (L) output signal

GND

T-2-11

3

4

1

2

J3303 (Connect to Maintenance cartridge relay PCB)


MENT_ROM_SDA

MENT_ROM_SCL

GND

+3.3V_TANK

-

IN/OUT

IN/OUT

OUT

Maintenance cartridge rom control signal (data)

Maintenance cartridge rom control signal (clock)

GND


Function

T-2-12

18

19

20

21

14

15

16

17

22

23

24

25

10

11

12

13

8

9

6

7

4

5

2

3

J3401 (Connect to Carriage PCB J201)

Pin Number

1 VHGND

Signal name

VHGND

VHGND

VHGND

GND

+5V_VM_IC

21V_H1_VHT

VH_SW1_ON

+3.3V_H1

+3.3V_H1

GND

SNS5V

+24V_HV_SW

VH

VH

VH

VH

VH

VH

VH

VH

VHGND

VHGND

VHGND

VHGND

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

IN/OUT

-

-

OUT

OUT

OUT

OUT

OUT

OUT

OUT

OUT

OUT

OUT

OUT

OUT

OUT

OUT

OUT

GND

GND

GND

GND

GND

Power supply (+5V)

Power supply (+21V)

VH control signal



GND

Power supply (+5V)

Power supply (+24V)









GND

GND

GND

GND

Function

T-2-13

10

11

12

13

8

9

6

7

14

15

16

17

4

5

2

3


Pin Number

1

Signal name

FFC_SLANT_DET_SNS2*

COLOR_SNS

GND

GAP_NEAR_SNS

GAP_FAR_SNS

VH_DIS

GND

ENCODER_A

ENCODER_B

GND

H1-B-DATA-3-EV

GND

H1-B-HE-3*

GND

H1-C-DATA-4-EV

GND

H1-C-DATA-5-EV

-

-

-

-

-

-

IN

IN

IN

IN

OUT

IN

IN

IN/OUT

OUT

OUT

OUT

OUT

FFC disconnection detection signal 2

Multi sensor density detection signal

GND

Multi sensor head height (NEAR) detection signal

Multi sensor head height (FAR) detection signal

VH select signal

GND

Carriage encoder output signal A

Carriage encoder output signal B

GND

Even head data signal 3(B)

GND

Head heat enable signal 3(B)

GND

Even head data signal 4(C)

GND


Function

Chapter 2

2-37

Chapter 2

43

44

45

46

39

40

41

42

47

48

49

50

35

36

37

38

31

32

33

34

27

28

29

30

23

24

25

26

19

20

21

22


Pin Number

18 GND

Signal name

H1-C-HE-5*

GND

H1-C-DATA-5-OD

GND

H1-D-DATA-7-OD

GND

H1-D-DATA-6-OD

GND

H1-D-HE-6*

GND

H1-D-DATA-6-EV

GND

H1-D-DATA-7-EV

GND

H1-D-HE-7*

GND

H1-E-DATA-8-EV

GND

H1-E-DATA-9-EV

GND

H1-E-HE-9*

GND

H1-F-DATA-10-EV

GND

H1-F-DATA-11-EV

GND

H1-F-HE-11*

GND

H1-F-DATA-11-OD

GND

IO-ASIC-SDA

FFC-SLANT-DET-SNS1*

26

27

28

22

23

24

25

18

19

20

21

14

15

16

17

10

11

12

13

8

9

6

7

4

5

2

3


Pin Number

1

Signal name

FFC_SLANT_DET_SNS4*

EDGE_SNS

H1-DSOUT2

H1-DSOUT1

GND

H-DASH_LICC2

H1-DATA_LICC2

H1-DLD_LICC2

H1-DASLK_LICC2

GND

H1-C-DATA-4-OD

GND

H1-C-HE-4*

GND

H1-B-DATA-3-OD

GND

H1-B-DATA-2-OD

GND

H1-B-HE-2*

GND

H1-A-DATA-1-OD

GND

H1-A-DATA-0-OD

GND

H1-A-HE-0*

GND

H1-A-DATA-0-EV

GND

2-38

-

OUT

-

OUT

-

OUT

-

OUT

IN/OUT

IN

-

OUT

-

OUT

-

OUT

-

OUT

-

OUT

-

OUT

-

OUT

-

OUT

IN/OUT

-

-

OUT

-

OUT

-

OUT

GND

Head heat enable signal 5(C)

GND

Odd head data signal 5(C)

GND

Odd head data signal 7(D)

GND


GND

Head heat enable signal 6(D)

GND

Even head data signal 6(D)

GND


GND


GND

Even head data signal 8(E)

GND


GND

Head heat enable signal 9(E)

GND

Even head data signal 10(F)

GND


GND

Head heat enable signal 11(F)

GND

Odd head data signal 11(F)

GND

Head ROM control signal (data)


T-2-14

Function

-

OUT

-

OUT

-

OUT

-

OUT

-

-

OUT

-

OUT

OUT

OUT

-

OUT

-

OUT

-

OUT

IN

IN/OUT

IN

IN

-

IN

OUT

OUT


Multi sensor paper edge detection signal

Head temperature output 2


GND

Analogue switch A/D triggar signal

Head analogue switch data signal

Head analogue switch latch signal

Head analogue switch clock signal

GND


GND


GND

Odd head data signal 3(B)

GND


GND


GND

Odd head data signal 1(A)

GND


GND

Head heat enable signal 0(A)

GND

Even head data signal 0(A)

GND

Function

42

43

44

45

38

39

40

41

46

47

48

49

50

34

35

36

37

30

31

32

33


Pin Number

29

Signal name

H1-A-DATA-1-EV

GND

H1-A-HE-1*

GND

H1-B-DATA-2-EV

GND

H1-LT*

GND

H1-CLK

GND

H1-E-HE-8*

GND

H1-F-DATA-10-OD

GND

H1-F-HE-10*

GND

H1-E-DATA-9-OD

GND

H1-E-DATA-8-OD

GND

IO-ASIC_SCL

FFC_SLANT_DET_SES3*

-

OUT

-

OUT

-

OUT

-

IN/OUT

IN

-

OUT

-

OUT

-

OUT

-

OUT

IN/OUT

OUT

-

OUT

-

OUT


GND


GND


GND

Head latch signal

GND

Head clock signal

GND


GND


GND


GND

Odd head data signal 9(E)

GND


GND

Head ROM control signal (clock)


Function

T-2-15

7

8

9

10

11

5

6

3

4

1

2

J3901 (Feed roller encoder sensor, Feed roller HP sensor, Temperature/humidity detection sensor)


GND

LF_ENCA

-

IN

GND

Function

Feed roller encoder sensor output signal A

SNS5V_FU1

LF_ENCB

SNS3V_FU1

GND -

OUT

IN

OUT

Power supply (+5V)

Feed roller encoder sensor output signal B


GND

LF_HP_SNS*

UMF3V

RH2_OUT

GND

TH2_OUT

IN

OUT

-

IN

IN

Feed roller HP sensor output signal

Power supply (+5V)

Temperature/humidity detection sensor output signal

GND

Thermistor output signal

T-2-16

7

8

9

10

11

12

5

6

3

4

1

2

J4101 (Carriage motor)

Pin Number

CR_HWP

CR_HWM

CR_W

CR_HVM

CR_U

GND

CR_V

SNS5V

N.C.

CR_HVP

CR_HUM

CR_HUP

Signal name

-

IN

IN

IN

IN

IN

IN/OUT

OUT

IN

-

OUT

OUT

Function

Carriage motor hole device W-phase + signal

Carriage motor hole device W-phase - signal

Carriage motor W-phase drive signal

Carriage motor hole device V-phase - signal

Carriage motor U-phase drive signal

GND

Carriage motor V-phase drive signal

Power supply (+5V)

N.C

Carriage motor hole device V-phase + signal

Carriage motor hole device U-phase - signal

Carriage motor hole device U-phase + signal

T-2-17

J4102 (Upper cover lock switch)

Pin Number

1 +32V_VM

Signal name

2 +32V_CRM

IN/OUT

OUT

IN

Power supply (+32V)

Upper cover lock switch output signal

Function

Chapter 2

2-39

Chapter 2

T-2-18

1

2

J4201 (Feed motor)


LF_OUTB(LF_AP)

LF_OUTA(LF_AM)

IN/OUT

OUT

OUT

Feed motor driver signal B

Feed motor driver signal A

Function

T-2-19

10

11

12

13

14

8

9

6

7

4

5

2

3

J4501 (Valve motor (L), Upper cover lock solenoid, Cutter left position sensor, Cutter motor, Mist fan)

Pin Number

1

Signal name

INKBEN_L_OUTB

IN/OUT

OUT Valve motor (L) drive signal B

INKBEN_L_OUTA

VM_26V(26.5V)

DCOVER_SOL

SNS3V_FU1

OUT

OUT

OUT

OUT

Valve motor (L) drive signal A


Upper cover lock solenoid drive signal


GND

CUTTER_L_SNS*

CUTTERM_OUTB

CUTTERM_OUTA

VM_26V

MIST_FAN_LOCK*

N.C.(MIST_FAN_PWM)

GND

N.C.

-

-

-

-

OUT

OUT

OUT

OUT

OUT

GND

Cutter left position sensor signal

Cutter motor driver signal B

Cutter motor driver signal A

Power supply (+26V)

Mist fan drive signal

N.C

GND

N.C

Function

2-40

2.4.2.3 HDD expansion PCB components

Chapter 2

0023-2545

IC 201

F-2-31

a) HDD controller IC (IC201)

This controller control the hard disk drive.

2.4.3 Carriage Relay PCB

2.4.3.1 Carriage PCB components

0031-2545

IC503

IC504

IC401

F-2-32

a) Latch ICs (IC401)

DI sensor reading control function

This function obtains the DI sensor value in the printhead and head rank for each color and sends it to the main controller PCB based on the control signals from the main controller.

Environmental temperature reading control

This function sends the environmental temperature detected by the thermistor on the board based t the main controller PCB based on the control signals from the main controller PCB.

Image data relay function

This function relays the image data from the main controller PCB to the printhead.

The function for processing image data is not supported.

b) Multi sensor control ICs (IC503 and IC504)

These ICs are used to generate the multi sensor LED control signal and adjust the gain.

2-41

Chapter 2

2.4.3.2 Connectors and Pin Arrangement of Carriage PCB

J201

1

1

1

J101

J102

J103

J202

1

1

J501

43

44

45

46

39

40

41

42

47

48

49

35

36

37

38

31

32

33

34

27

28

29

30

23

24

25

26

19

20

21

22

15

16

17

18

11

12

13

14

7

8

9

10

5

6

3

4

1

2

J101 (Connect to Main controller PCB J3601)


FFC-SLANT-DET-SNS1*

IO-ASIC-SDA

GND

H1-F-DATA-11-OD

GND

H1-F-HE-11*

GND

H1-F-DATA-11-EV

GND

H1-F-DATA-10-EV

GND

H1-E-HE-9*

GND

H1-E-DATA-9-EV

GND

H1-E-DATA-8-EV

GND

H1-D-HE-7*

GND

H1-D-DATA-7-EV

GND

H1-D-DATA-6-EV

GND

H1-D-HE-6*

GND

H1-D-DATA-6-OD

GND

H1-D-DATA-7-OD

GND

H1-C-DATA-5-OD

GND

H1-C-HE-5*

GND

H1-C-DATA-5-EV

GND

H1-C-DATA-4-EV

GND

H1-B-HE-3*

GND

H1-B-DATA-3-EV

GND

ENCODER_B

ENCODER_A

GND

VH_DIS

GAP_FAR_SNS

GAP_NEAR_SNS

GND

COLOR_SNS

F-2-33

T-2-20

-

IN

-

IN

-

IN

-

IN

-

IN

-

IN

-

IN

-

IN

-

IN

-

IN

-

IN

-

IN

-

IN

-

IN

IN/OUT

OUT

IN/OUT

-

IN

-

OUT

-

OUT

IN

OUT

-

IN

-

IN

-

IN

-

IN

-

OUT

OUT

Function



GND


GND


GND


GND


GND


GND


GND


GND


GND


GND


GND


GND


GND


GND


GND


GND


GND


GND


GND


GND



GND

VH select signal

Multi sensor head height (FAR) detection signal

Multi sensor head height (NEAR) detection signal

GND


2-42

0031-2548


Pin Number

50

Signal name

FFC_SLANT_DET_SNS2*

IN/OUT

OUT FFC disconnection detection signal 2

T-2-21

Function

42

43

44

45

38

39

40

41

46

47

48

49

50

34

35

36

37

30

31

32

33

26

27

28

29

22

23

24

25

18

19

20

21

14

15

16

17

10

11

12

13

8

9

6

7

4

5

2

3


Pin Number

1

Signal name

FFC_SLANT_DET_SES3*

IO-ASIC_SCL

GND

H1-E-DATA-8-OD

GND

H1-E-DATA-9-OD

GND

H1-F-HE-10*

GND

H1-F-DATA-10-OD

GND

H1-E-HE-8*

GND

H1-CLK

GND

H1-LT*

GND

H1-B-DATA-2-EV

GND

H1-A-HE-1*

GND

H1-A-DATA-1-EV

GND

H1-A-DATA-0-EV

GND

H1-A-HE-0*

GND

H1-A-DATA-0-OD

GND

H1-A-DATA-1-OD

GND

H1-B-HE-2*

GND

H1-B-DATA-2-OD

GND

H1-B-DATA-3-OD

GND

H1-C-HE-4*

GND

H1-C-DATA-4-OD

GND

H1-DASLK_LICC2

H1-DLD_LICC2

H1-DATA_LICC2

H-DASH_LICC2

GND

H1-DSOUT1

H1-DSOUT2

EDGE_SNS

FFC_SLANT_DET_SNS4*

-

-

-

-

-

-

IN/OUT

OUT

-

IN/OUT

-

IN

-

IN

-

IN

-

IN

-

IN

-

IN

-

IN

-

IN

-

IN

-

IN

-

IN

-

IN

-

IN

-

IN

IN

IN

IN

IN

IN

IN

IN

IN

IN

OUT

OUT

OUT

OUT



GND


GND


GND


GND


GND


GND

Head clock signal

GND

Head latch signal

GND


GND


GND


GND


GND


GND


GND


GND


GND


GND


GND


GND


GND

Head analogue switch clock signal

Head analogue switch latch signal

Head analogue switch data signal

Analogue switch A/D triggar signal

GND





Function

T-2-22

3

4

5

1

2

J103 (Printhead)

Pin Number

VH2

VH2

VH2

VHT12

Signal name

H1-F-DATA-10-EV

IN/OUT

OUT

OUT

OUT

OUT

OUT

Power supply

Power supply

Power supply

Head Transistor drive Power supply


Function

Chapter 2

2-43

Chapter 2

59

60

61

62

55

56

57

58

51

52

53

54

47

48

49

50

67

68

69

70

63

64

65

66

43

44

45

46

39

40

41

42

35

36

37

38

31

32

33

34

27

28

29

30

23

24

25

26

19

20

21

22

15

16

17

18

11

12

13

14

7

8

9

10


Pin Number

6

Signal name

IO_ASIC_SDA

IO_ASIC_SCL

H3V_1

H1-C-DIA1

/H1-A-HE-1

VH1

VH1

VH1

VH2

VH2

H1-E-DATA-9-OD

/H1-F-HE-11

H1-E-DIA1

H1-D-DIA1

H3V_1

H3V_1

H1-B-DATA-3-EV

H1-A-DATA-0-EV

/H1-B-HE-2

VH1

VH1

H1-D-DIA2

/H1-E-HE-8

H1-E-DIA2

H1-F-DIA2

/H1-E-HE-9

H1-D-DATA-7-EV

/H1-D-HE-6

H1-C-DATA-5-OD

H1-C-DATA-4-EV

H1-A-DATA-1-EV

H1-A-DIA2

H1-B-DIA2

/H1-C-HE-4

H1-D-DATA-7-OD

H1-E-DATA-8-OD

/H1-F-HE-10

H1-F-DATA-11-EV

H1-E-DATA-8-EV

H1-D-DATA-6-EV

H1-C-DIA2

H1-C-DATA-5-EV

H1-B-DIA1

/H1-A-HE-0

H1-B-DATA-2-OD

H1-B-DATA-3-OD

H1-C-DATA-4-OD

GND

GND

GND

H1-F-DATA-11-OD

H1-E-DATA-9-EV

GND

H1-D-DATA-6-OD

/H1-C-HE-5

/H1-B-HE-3

H1-A-DIA1

H1-A-DATA-1-OD

GND

GND

GND

GND

H1-F-DATA-10-OD

H1-F-DIA1

/H1-D-HE-7

2-44

Head DI sensor signal 2(A)

Head DI sensor signal 2(B)








Head DI sensor signal 2(C)


Head DI sensor signal 1(B)





GND

GND

GND



GND




Head DI sensor signal 1(A)


GND

GND

GND

GND


Head DI sensor signal 1(F)


EEPROMcontrol signal (data)

EEPROMcontrol signal (clock)

Power supply (+3V)

Head DI sensor signal 1(C)


Power supply

Power supply

Power supply

Power supply

Power supply



Head DI sensor signal 1(E)

Head DI sensor signal 1(D)

Power supply

Power supply




Power supply

Power supply

Head DI sensor signal 2(D)


Head DI sensor signal 2(E)

Head DI sensor signal 2(F)







OUT

OUT

OUT

IN

-

-

-

OUT

-

-

OUT

OUT

-

OUT

-

OUT

-

OUT

IN

OUT

OUT

OUT

OUT

IN

OUT

IN

OUT

OUT

OUT

OUT

IN

IN

OUT

OUT

OUT

OUT

IN

OUT

IN

IN

OUT

OUT

OUT

OUT

IN

OUT

OUT

OUT

OUT

OUT

OUT

OUT

OUT

OUT

OUT

OUT

OUT

OUT

OUT

IN

IN/OUT

IN/OUT

OUT

OUT

IN

OUT

Function

76

77

78

72

73

74

75


Pin Number

71 GND

H1_CLK

/H1_LT

Signal name

H1-B-DATA-2-EV

H1-A-DATA-0-OD

GND

GND

GND

19

20

21

22

15

16

17

18

23

24

25

11

12

13

14

7

8

9

10

5

6

3

4

1

2



VHGND

VHGND

VHGND

VHGND

VH

VH

VH

VH

VH

VH

VH

VH

+24V_HV_SW

SNS5V

GND

+3.3V_H1

+3.3V_H1

VH_SW1_ON

21V_H1_VHT

+5V_VM_IC

GND

VHGND

VHGND

VHGND

VHGND

3

4

1

2

J202 (Linear encoder sensor)


ENCODER_B

GND

ENCODER_A

SNS5V

10

11

12

8

9

6

7

4

5

2

3

J501 (Multi sensor)

Pin Number

1 SNS3.3V

GND

Signal name

IO-ASIC_SCL

IO-ASIC_SDA

GAP_SNS1

GAP_SNS2

COLOR_SNS

EDGE_SNS

GND

SNS5V

THERMISTOR

GND

IN/OUT

-

OUT

OUT

-

-

-

OUT

OUT

GND

Head data clock signal

Head data latch signal



GND

GND

GND

T-2-23

-

-

-

-

-

IN

IN

IN

IN

IN

IN

-

IN

IN

IN

IN

IN

IN

IN

IN

IN

-

-

-

-

IN/OUT

GND

GND

GND

GND









Power supply (+24V)

Power supply (+5V)

GND



VH control signal

Power supply (+21V)

Power supply (+5V)

GND

GND

GND

GND

GND

T-2-24

Function

Function

-

IN

IN/OUT

IN

OUT


GND


Power supply (+5V)

T-2-25

Function

-

-

IN

-

OUT

IN/OUT

OUT

-

IN/OUT

IN/OUT

IN

IN

IN

Function


GND



Multi sensor head height (GAP) detection signal 1

Multi sensor head height (GAP) detection signal 2



GND

Power supply (+5V)

N.C

GND

Chapter 2

2-45

Chapter 2

2.4.4 Maintenance Cartridge Relay PCB

2.4.4.1 Maintenance cartridge relay PCB components

IC 1

F-2-34

a) EEPROM (IC1)

The 256-KB EEPROM stores all information written to the EEPROM on the main controller PCB.

0023-2553

2-46

Chapter 2

2.4.5 Power Supply

2.4.5.1 Power supply block diagram

0013-4333

AC inlet

100V to 240V

Operation panel

POWER ON

Main controller PCB

DC power supply control circuit

Power supply

+26V generation circuit

Noize filter circuit

Transformer

+5V/+3.3V

generation circuit

+21.5V

generation circuit

Rectifying circuit

F-2-35

The power supply converts AC voltages ranging from 100 V to 240 V from the AC inlet to DC voltages for driving the ICs, motor, and others.

The voltage generator circuits include the +26 V generation circuit for driving motors, fans, and sensors and a +21.5 V generator circuit for driving sensors, heads, logic circuits, and others.

When the power is turned off, +26 V and +21.5 V are reduced to about 12 V and 9 V respectively (power save mode).

Power ON/OFF operation is controlled by the main controller PCB.

2-47

Chapter 2

2.4.5.2 Connectors and Pin Arrangement of Power supply PCB

CN1

CN1

Pin Number

1

2

AC(H)

AC(N)

Signal name

7

8

9

10

5

6

3

4

1

2

CN2 (Connect to Main controller PCB)


PW_CONT

VM(+32V)

VM(+32V)

VMGND

VMGND

VH(+32V)

VH(+32V)

VHGND

VHGND

VM_UNIT_PW_ENB

F-2-36

T-2-26

-

-

IN/OUT

Power supply (AC120V or AC230V)

Power supply (AC120V or AC230V)

Function

T-2-27

IN/OUT

IN

OUT

-

OUT

-

OUT

-

OUT

-

IN

Normal/power saving switch signal

Power supply (+32V)

Power supply (+32V)

GND

GND

Power supply (+32V)

Power supply (+32V)

GND

GND

VH power supply ON/OFF signal

Function

0031-2549

2-48

2.5 Detection Functions with Sensors

2.5.1 Covers

Ink Tank Cover Switch (L)

Ink Tank Cover Switch (R)

Chapter 2

0023-2554

Upper Cover Lock Switch

F-2-37

Upper cover lock switch

The microswitch-based upper cover lock switch detects the open/closed states of the upper cover.

When the upper cover close, the switch is pressed to detect the closed state of the upper cover.

Ink tank cover switch (L)/(R)

The microswitch-based ink tank cover switches detect the open/closed states of left and right ink tank cover.

When an ink tank cover closes, the switch is pressed to detect the closed state of the ink tank cover.

2-49

Chapter 2

2.5.2 Ink passage system


Pump Encoder Sensor

Pump Cam Sensor

0031-2546

2-50

Ink Detection Sensor (L)/(R)

Shutter HP Sensor

Ink Supply Valve Open/Closed

Detection Sensor (L)/(R)

F-2-38

Chapter 2

Pump cam sensor

The photo-interrupter-type pump cam sensor detects that the sensor light is shielded or unshielded by the rotary cam. The sensor detects the purge unit capping and wiping states with the combination of the state detected by the pump cam and the state of pump motor rotation control performed by the pump encoder.

Rotary flag

Sensor

- Carriage lock - Capping

- Suction

- Air passage valve open

- Idle suction

- Printing

- Suction during printing

- Wiping - Carriage lock

- Air passage

- Carriage move - Idle ejection

- Idle suction

F-2-39

Pump encoder sensor

The pump encoder is a photo-interruptive type sensor. It reads the slits on the pump motor's encoder film to control the amount of pump motor rotation.

Slits

Sensor

F-2-40

Ink supply valve open/closed detection sensor (L)/(R)

The photo-interrupter-type ink supply valve open/closed detection sensor detect the valve cam state.

When the link that operates in conjunction with the ink supply valve cam shields light, this sensor detects that the ink supply valve has been opened.

Ink detection sensor (L)/(R)

Presence of absence of ink in the ink tank is detected according to whether the two hollow needles are electrically connected.

When the ink level in the ink tank lowers below the wall around the hollow needle at the air passage, this hollow needle is electrically disconnected form the hollow needle located on the ink supply side, thus detecting that the printer has run out of ink.

Ink tank

Wall

Rubber plug

Needle (ink supply)

F-2-41

Shutter HP sensor

The photointerrupter-type sensor detects the presence of the cshutter at the home position.

Needle(air passage)

2-51

Chapter 2

Head management sensor

The photo-transmission-type sensor detects that the printhead is discharging ink.

The carriage moves to and stops at the detection positions for individual nozzle arrays. When the carriage is at a stop, nozzles discharge ink on after another.

The sensor detects each nozzle due to the voltage change caused when ink discharged from the nozzle blocks the sensor light.

Non-discharging nozzle detection is carried out at the following timings:

- After the execution of Cleaning 1, Cleaning 2, Cleaning 3, Cleaning 6 or Cleaning 10

- After the number of copies that has been set by the user menu choice Nozzle Check Frequency have been printed

If more than a specified number of non-discharging nozzles have been located in one session of non-discharging nozzle detection, the normal cleaning sequence is launched before a second session of non-discharging nozzle detection is conducted. If more than a specified number of non-discharging nozzles are located in the second session of non-discharging nozzle detection, the normal (High) cleaning session is launched before a third session of non-discharging nozzle detection is conducted.

If there are at least 320 non-discharging nozzles out of 2560 nozzles as the result of non-discharging nozzle detection, printing is canceled after displaying a message to replace the head.

However, if service mode: [SERVICE MODE] > [SETTING] > [HEAD DOT INF] is [ON], the following message appears.

If there are at least 30 nozzles unable to correct the non-discharging state and the number of non-discharging nozzles is less than 100 out of 2,560 nozzles as the result of non-discharging nozzle detection, printing can continue after displaying a message to check the printing. Also, if the number of non-discharging nozzles is at least 100 but less than 320 nozzles, printing can continue after displaying a message to check the head. And if there are at least 320 non-discharging nozzles, printing is canceled after displaying a message to replace the head.

Printhead

Nozzle unit

Head management sensor unit

F-2-42

2-52

2.5.3 Carriage system

Multi Sensor

Linear Encoder Sensor

Chapter 2

0023-2559

Carriage HP Sensor

Lift Cam Sensor

F-2-43

Carriage HP sensor

The photointerrupter-based carriage HP sensor detects the home position of the carriage.

Installed on the right side plate of the printer, the sensor detects an edge of the carriage home position on the carriage unit under carriage movement control.

The printer establishes the carriage home position from the position at which its edge is detected as a reference position.

Linear encoder sensor

Mounted on the back of the carriage, the linear encoder detects the position of the carriage from a slit in the linear scale during its movement.

Lift cam sensor

A photointerrupter-based sensor. After the sensor light is shielded by the flag, the lift motor is driven by a predetermined number of pulses to regulate the separation between the printheads and platen automatically.

Ambient temperature sensor

The thermostat-based ambient temperature sensor mounted on the carriage PCB detects the ambient temperature to which the carriage is exposed.

The resistance of the thermistor that varies as a function of temperature changes in the printer is transmitted to the main controller via the carriage PCB.

The ambient temperature is used to help calibrate the head temperature sensor and detect abnormal ambient temperatures.

Head temperature sensor

The head temperature sensor detects the temperature of the printhead.

The printhead temperature is transmitted to the main controller via the carriage PCB.

The printhead temperature is used to help control the head drive and detect abnormal printhead temperatures.

Printhead contact detection

The printhead contact detects the status of printhead installation by electrical means.

The contact detects the status of contact from voltage changes in the flexible cables on the carriage side that come into contact with two terminals of the printhead with remote contact surfaces, the power terminals and GND terminal.

2-53

Chapter 2

Multi sensor

A photo reflective type multi sensor consists of three red LEDs, one red/blue/green LED array, and three light receiving sensors and is used for media end, skew, and width adjustment, registration adjustment, head height adjustment, and print position adjustment.

Media leading edge detection, head height (GAP) detection, and print density detection are performed by independent LED and sensor.

A clear film media detection (regular reflection) LED and a non-clear film media detection (diffused reflection) LED are used for end of media detection.

The head height is detected by receiving the reflection of red LED from the media with two sensors in a light receiving sensor and calculating the difference in measurements.

The print density is detected by receiving the reflection of red/blue/green LED array from the media and determining the density of the printed surface.

Light-sensitive sensor

(Paper edge detection)

Red LED(Paper edge:

Diffused reflection)

Red LED(GAP)


(GAP detection)

Red LED(Paper Edge:

Regular reflection)

Red/Blue/Green LED Array(Density)


(Density detection)

Media

Platen

F-2-44

Service mode: After SERVICE MODE > ADJUST > GAP CALIB. has been carried out, pass paper to make sure that it is detected properly.

2-54

2.5.4 Paper path system


Chapter 2

0023-2560

Roll Encoder Sensor



F-2-45

Feed roller HP sensor

The feed roller HP sensor detects a reference white (transmitted) to black (shielded) transition from the encoder at power on and sets a home position for correcting the eccentricity of the feed roller.

Feed roller encoder sensor

The feed roller encoder sensor detects the rate of paper transport per revolution of the feed roller from slits in the encoder during driving.

Release lever lock sensor

A photointerrupter type sensor. This sensor detects the release lever lock status when the release lever solenoid turns ON and the sensor flag shields the sensor light.

Roll encoder sensor

A photointerrupter type sensor. This sensor detects the rotation of the roll holder by reading the encoder film at the roll media drive unit.

2-55

Chapter 2


Pinch Roller Pressure

Release Switch


Cutter HP Sensor

F-2-46

Paper detection sensor

A photoreflective type sensor. When a media is fed from the manual feed unit and roll feed unit, this sensor detects the presence of media by receiving the light reflected from the media.

Cutter HP sensor

The photointerrupter-type sensor detects the presence of the cutter at the home (rightmost) position.

Cutter left position sensor

The photointerrupter-type sensor detects the presence of the cutter at the leftmost position.

Pinch roller pressure release switch

A micro switch type pinch roller pressure release switch detects the application/release of pinch roller pressure. The pinch roller pressure release switch is depressed when the media release lever is set and detects the pressure of the pinch roller.

2-56

2.5.5 Others

Temperature/Humidity Detection Sensor

Chapter 2

0023-2561

F-2-47

Temperature/humidity detection sensor

The temperature/humidity detection sensor detects the temperature and relative humidity around the printer to implement head height adjustment, maintenance jet control, waste ink evaporation calculation and suction fan control on the basis of the temperature and relative humidity thus measured.

2-57

Chapter 3 INSTALLATION

Contents

Contents

3.1 Transporting the Printer .................................................................................................................................................3-1

3.1.1 Transporting the Printer ............................................................................................................................................................... 3-1

3.1.1.1 Transporting the Printer ..................................................................................................................................................................................3-1

3.1.2 Reinstalling the Printer ................................................................................................................................................................ 3-6

3.1.2.1 Reinstalling the Printer....................................................................................................................................................................................3-6

Chapter 3

3.1 Transporting the Printer

3.1.1 Transporting the Printer

3.1.1.1 Transporting the Printer

0031-2550

When transporting the printer, the printhead must be capped and stay in the carriage.

In spite of this precaution, shocks incurred during transportation can damage the printhead.

Print the nozzle check pattern before making preparations for transporting the printer, pint the nozzle check pattern again after installing the printer at the new location, and then compare the two printouts.

If any problem such as nozzle clogging cannot be resolved by printhead cleaning, replace the printhead with a new one.

This section describes how to transport the printer.

The procedure depends on the mode of transportation. Select the appropriate transportation level from the following transportation modes.

1. Transportation mode

- Moving the printer on the same floor with no difference in grade (without tilting the printer)

- Moving the printer on floor where there is difference in grade or transporting by truck (by tilting the printer)

- Transporting by plane or ship or others or transporting in low temperature environment such as below freezing (tilting direction of printer is unpredictable)

When lifting or moving the printer, be sure to hold the left and right and rear carrying handles of the printer. The printer may be unsteady if you hold it at other positions, which poses a risk of injury from dropping the printer.

F-3-1

The printer main unit weights approximately 56 kg. When moving the printer, have at least three people hold it from left and right and rear side taking care not to hurt their back.

F-3-2

3-1

Chapter 3

a. Moving the printer on the same floor with no difference in grade

Item

[Prep. MovePrinter] on the Main menu This need not be performed.

Allowed tilting angle Do not tilt.

Ink consumption

Ink tank

Separation of printer and stand

Maintenance cartridge

Replacement of consumable parts

Service support

No ink is consumed.

It may be installed or removed.

They do not need to be separated.

Install.

Description

There is no need to open a new maintenance cartridge.

There is no need to replace consumable parts.

No service support is necessary.

Transportation procedure

1) Turn off the [Power] button, and check that the head is capped and carriage is locked.

2) Remove the roll holder from the roll unit.

3) Remove the interface cable and power cord from the printer.

4) Unlock the casters on the stand.

5) Move the printer slowly by holding the carrying handles at the bottom.

- If the printer is subjected to strong vibrations when it is moved, it can cause ink leakage or damage to the printhead. Be sure to move the printer slowly and carefully.

- Do not incline the printer during transportation. The internal ink may leak and the surrounding area may be stained.

3-2

Chapter 3

b. Moving the printer on floor where there is difference in grade or transporting by truck

When transporting in the low temperature environment, refer to "c. Transporting by plane or ship or others or transporting in low temperature environment such as below freezing".

If the ink remains in the printer when transporting the printer, it can cause damage to the printer by the freeze of ink.

Description Item

[Prep. MovePrinter] on the Main menu Perform [Limited].

Allowed tilting angle Lengthwise: -30 to +30 degrees

Rotation: -30 to +30 degrees

Ink consumption

Ink drainage area

Ink tank



Approximately 130 to 580ml of ink is consumed according to the ink remaining level in the subtank.

At this time, if the ink tank unit detects the state that the ink in any subtank is empty, ink drainage from all ink passage of its ink tank unit is executed.

- The amount of ink consumption when the ink drainage from either ink tank unit is executed: approximately

360g

- The amount of ink consumption when the ink drainage from two ink tank units is executed: approximately

580g

Subtank

However, if the ink tank unit detects the state that the ink in any subtank is empty when performing this mode, ink drainage from all ink passage of its ink tank unit is executed.

Install.


Install.


However, if there is a message instructing to replace the maintenance cartridge or check the remaining ink, replace with new maintenance cartridge before transporting.




Service support


1) Remove the paper and roll holder.

2) Select [Set/Adj. Menu] > [Prep.MovePrinter] > [Limited].

3) Press the [OK] key and perform transportation mode.

4) When the message completed the transportation mode appears, turn off the power, and remove the power cord and interface cable and check that the heads are capped and carriage is locked.

5) Attach the cushioning materials and tape.

6) Unlock the casters on the stand, and then move the printer slowly by holding the carrying handles at the bottom.

If the printer is subjected to strong vibrations when it is moved, it can cause ink leakage or damage to the print head. Be sure to move the printer slowly and carefully.

3-3

Chapter 3

c. Transporting by plane or ship or others or transporting in low temperature environment such as below freezing

Item

[Prep. MovePrinter] on the Main menu Perform [Standard].

Allowed tilting angle Lengthwise: -30 to +30 degrees

Description

Rotation: -10 to +10 degrees

Ink consumption

Ink drainage area

Ink tank



Approximately 580g

Drain from all ink passage

Install.


Install.


However, if there is a message instructing to replace the maintenance cartridge or check the remaining ink, replace with new maintenance cartridge before transporting.




Service support


1) Remove the paper and roll holder.

2) Select [Set/Adj. Menu] > [Prep.MovePrinter] > [Standard].

3) Press the [OK] key and perform transportation mode.

4) When the message completed the transportation mode appears, turn off the power, and remove the power cord and interface cable and check that the heads are capped and carriage is locked.

5) Attach the cushioning materials and tape.

6) Unlock the casters on the stand, and then move the printer slowly by holding the carrying handles at the bottom.

If the printer is subjected to strong vibrations when it is moved, it can cause ink leakage or damage to the print head. Be sure to move the printer slowly and carefully.

3-4

Chapter 3

2. When the printer is not operating properly

1) Make sure that the printer is turned off.

2) Remove the roll holder from the roll unit.

3) Disconnect the interface cable and power cord from the printer.

4) While referring to "DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY" > "Draining the Ink" > "Manual Ink Drainage", drain the ink from the printer.

5) While referring to "3. Manual capping", perform the capping and lock of the carriage operations.

6) Remove the maintenance cartridge, and then package it so that the waste ink does not leak from it.

7) Attach all external covers.

8) Attach the cushioning materials and tapes.

9) Remove the printer from the stand.

10) Pack the printer into the packing box, and then put the roll media, ink tank and stand in another packing box for moving.

Use the original packing material for the printer and stand. If it is not available, pack them with a sufficient amount of cushioning materials.

3. Manual capping

When transporting the printer at the situation that the printer is not operating properly, cap the printhead manually to protect the nozzles from drying out and to keep them clean.

Follow the procedures described below:

1) While referring to "DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY" > "Points to Note on Disassembly and Reassembly" > "Opening the Cap/Releasing the Carriage Lock

Pin/Moving the Wiper Unit manually", open the cap.

2) Move the carriage to the home position.

3) While referring to "DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY" > "Points to Note on Disassembly and Reassembly" > "Opening the Cap/Releasing the Carriage Lock

Pin/Moving the Wiper Unit manually", perform the capping.

Manual capping is an emergency measure when the printer does not operate. Manual capping may cause to damage the printhead.

3-5

Chapter 3

3.1.2 Reinstalling the Printer

3.1.2.1 Reinstalling the Printer

0023-3194

1. Installing the printer on the same floor

If ink has not been drained from the printer when moving it to another place on the same floor, then an operation check (Test Print) needs to be performed after the printer is moved to a new location.

2. Installing the printer on a different floor

If ink has been drained when transporting the printer to a different floor, follow the installation procedure below. It is nearly identical to the procedure when installing for the first time.

1) Remove the cushioning materials and tape.

2) Connect the power cord and interface cable.

3) Turn on the power and following the instruction in the message to install the ink tank. The ink is filled.

4) After the ink has been filled, load the media, and perform the operation check.

3-6

Chapter 4 DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY

Contents

Contents

4.1 Service Parts...................................................................................................................................................................4-1

4.1.1 Service Parts................................................................................................................................................................................. 4-1

4.2 Disassembly/Reassembly...............................................................................................................................................4-2

4.2.1 Disassembly/Reassembly............................................................................................................................................................. 4-2

4.3 Points to Note on Disassembly and Reassembly ...........................................................................................................4-2

4.3.1 Note: Items that should never be disassembled ........................................................................................................................... 4-2

4.3.2 Moving the carriage manually ..................................................................................................................................................... 4-2

4.3.3 Units requiring draining of ink .................................................................................................................................................... 4-3

4.3.4 External Covers............................................................................................................................................................................ 4-4

4.3.5 Drive Unit .................................................................................................................................................................................. 4-15

4.3.6 Cutter.......................................................................................................................................................................................... 4-19

4.3.7 Purge Unit .................................................................................................................................................................................. 4-21

4.3.8 Ink Tank Unit............................................................................................................................................................................. 4-25

4.3.9 Ink Tube Unit............................................................................................................................................................................. 4-29

4.3.10 Waste Ink Collection Unit ....................................................................................................................................................... 4-33

4.3.11 Multi Sensor............................................................................................................................................................................. 4-38

4.3.12 Linear Encoder......................................................................................................................................................................... 4-39

4.3.13 Head Management Sensor ....................................................................................................................................................... 4-44

4.3.14 PCBs ........................................................................................................................................................................................ 4-45

4.3.15 Opening/Closing the Ink Supply Valve ................................................................................................................................... 4-46

4.3.16 Draining the ink ....................................................................................................................................................................... 4-47

4.4 Applying the Grease.....................................................................................................................................................4-48

4.4.1 Applying the Grease .................................................................................................................................................................. 4-48

4.5 Adjustment and Setup Items ........................................................................................................................................4-52

4.5.1 Adjustment Item List ................................................................................................................................................................. 4-52

4.5.2 Procedure after Replacing the Carriage Unit or Multi Sensor................................................................................................... 4-52

4.5.3 Procedure after Replacing the Feed Roller or Feed Roller Encoder.......................................................................................... 4-52

4.5.4 Procedure after Replacing the Head Management Sensor......................................................................................................... 4-52

Chapter 4

4.1 Service Parts

4.1.1 Service Parts

The service parts indicated below require careful handling.

0012-6508

1. Keep all packages with the warning not to turn over.

Pay careful attention to all individually packaged service part (carriage unit, purge unit, ink tank unit, and other parts) boxes marked "This side up" and handle appropriately.

F-4-1

2. Feed roller

The feed roller is a functionally important part. Therefore, be careful that the roller is not scratched or marked during storage or transport of the service parts, when removing them from the individual boxes, when assembling, or performing any other operations.

4-1

Chapter 4

4.2 Disassembly/Reassembly

4.2.1 Disassembly/Reassembly

For the procedure for disassembly/reassembly of the components excluding the major components, refer to the parts catalog.

Illustrations in the parts catalog are assigned illustration numbers according to the order in which parts are disassembled.

4.3 Points to Note on Disassembly and Reassembly

4.3.1 Note: Items that should never be disassembled

Assemblies that should never be removed after initial factory adjustments, are indicated by the presence of red screws.

Under no circumstance should these red screws be loosened or removed. Removing these screws will render the printer out of alignment forever.

0016-9451

0012-6514

F-4-2

4.3.2 Moving the carriage manually

Hold the handle [1] when moving the carriage.

0023-2637

Move the carriage as required during assembly and disassembly to prevent the carriage from contacting the parts to be removed.

You cannot move the carriage when capping has been performed. Refer to DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY > Points to Notes on Disassembly and Reassembly

> Opening the caps and moving the wiper unit to remove the caps, and then move the carriage.

F-4-3

[1]

4-2

Chapter 4

4.3.3 Units requiring draining of ink

0014-8953

When disassembling the following units, drain the ink completely, to prevent ink leakage. For ink drain instructions, refer to

DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY >

Points to Notes on Disassembly and Reassembly > Draining the ink.

[1] Carriage unit

Refer to DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY > Points to Notes on Disassembly and Reassembly > Carriage unit.

[2] Ink tube unit

Refer to DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY > Points to Notes on Disassembly and Reassembly > Ink tube unit.

[3] Ink tank unit

Refer to DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY > Points to Notes on Disassembly and Reassembly >Ink tank unit.

4-3

Chapter 4

4.3.4 External Covers

0031-2622

a) Operation Panel

Removing the Operation Panel

1) To remove the operation panel, open the upper cover [1] and right tank cover [2], and then release two hooks [3] using a flat head screwdriver.

2) Remove the cable from the cable guide, and then remove the ground wire [5] by pushing the hook [4] from the backside of the operation unit and disconnect the connector [6], and then remove the operation panel [7].

[5]

[4]

[6]

[7]

[1]

[2]

[3]

F-4-4

b) Upper Left Cover

Removing the Upper Left Cover

1) To remove the upper left cover [4], open the upper cover [1] and left tank cover [2], and then release two hooks [3] using a flat head screwdriver.

[1]

[4]

[2]

[3]

F-4-5

4-4

c) Right Cover

Removing the Right Cover

1) To remove the right cover, remove the operation panel.

2) Remove six screws [1], release two hooks [2], and then remove the right cover [3].

[1]

[3]

[2]

[1]

[2]

[1]

[1]

F-4-6

d) Left Cover

Removing the Left Cover

1) To remove the left, remove the upper left cover.

2) Remove six screws [1], release two hooks [2], and then remove the left cover [3].

[1]

[2]

[1]

[3]

[1]

[2]

[1]

[1]

[1]

F-4-7

Chapter 4

4-5

Chapter 4

e) Front Cover

Removing the Front Cover

1) To remove the front cover [5], open the upper cover [1] to remove the cleaner brush [2], remove two screws [3], and then release three hooks [4] by using the flat head screwdriver.

[4]

[2]

[1]

[3]

[3]

[5]

[4]

[4]

F-4-8

f) Output Guide

Removing the Output Guide

1) To remove the output guide, open the maintenance cartridge cover [1] to remove the maintenance cartridge [2], and then remove the face cover [3] by inserting a flat head screwdriver in the slit.

[3]

2) Remove two screws [1], and then remove the output guide (right) [2].

[1]

F-4-9

[2]

[1]

F-4-10

[2]

4-6

3) Remove one screw [1], release two hooks [2], and then remove the output guide (middle)/left [3].

[2]

Chapter 4

[1] [3]

F-4-11

[2]

4-7

Chapter 4

g) Left/Right Ink Tank Cover

Removing the Left/Right Ink Tank Cover

1) To remove the left/right ink tank cover [2], remove the left/right cover and front cover.

2) Remove two screws [1], and then remove the left/right inner cover [2].

<Left Inner Cover>

[1] [2]

<Right Inner Cover>

[2]

F-4-12

[1]

F-4-13

4-8

3) Remove the screw [1] and release the hook [2], and then remove the left/right ink tank cover [4] while releasing two protrusions [3].

<Left Ink Tank Cover>

[2]

Chapter 4

[1]

[4]

<Right Ink Tank Cover>

[4]

[1]

[3]

F-4-14

[2]

[3]

F-4-15

4-9

Chapter 4

h) Upper Cover

Removing the Upper Cover

1) To remove the upper cover [1], remove the upper left cover, and then slide the upper cover [1] to the left to remove it from the hinge [2].

[1]

[2]

F-4-16

i) Rear Upper Cover

Removing the Rear Upper Cover

1) To remove the rear upper cover [3], remove the left/right cover and upper cover, open the roll cover [1], and then remove eight screws [2].

[2]

[2]

[3]

[2]

[1]

MEMO:

The rear upper cover [1] and upper cover [2] can be removed together.

F-4-17

[2]

F-4-18

[1]

4-10

j) Rear Cover

Removing the Rear Cover

1) To remove the rear cover [2], remove twelve screws [1].

[1]

[1]

[1]

F-4-19

[2]

[1]

k) Roll Feed Unit

Removing the Roll Feed Unit

MEMO:

Open/close the roll cover as needed.

1) To remove the roll feed unit, remove the roll holder, and then remove the left/right cover and rear upper cover.

2) Remove six screws [1] and one connector [2], and then the feed guide [3].

[2]

[3] [3]

[3]

[1]

F-4-20

Chapter 4

4-11

Chapter 4

3) Remove four screws [1], and then the left and right roll lower inner covers [2].

<Left roll lower inner cover >

<Right roll lower inner cover>

[2]

F-4-21

[1]

[1]

F-4-22

[2]

4-12

4) Remove three screws [1], and then remove the left roll cover [2].

[1]

Chapter 4

[1]

[2]

F-4-23

5) Remove seven screws [1] and three connectors [2], and then remove the cable from the cable guide to remove the roll feed unit [3].

[1] [1]

[3]

[1]

[1]

[2]

[1]

F-4-24

[1]

[2]

4-13

Chapter 4

l) Release Lever

Removing the Release Lever

1) To remove the release lever, remove five screws [1] and four connectors [2], and then remove the cable from the cable guide to remove the right side plate unit [3].

[1] [1] [3]

[1]

[2]

[1]

[2]

F-4-25

2) Remove one spring [1], and then the release lever [2]. Keep the pinch roller pressurized to enable phase adjustment at the time of release lever reinstallation.

[2]

[1]

F-4-26

Precautions about Reinstallation of Release Lever

When reinstalling the release lever, align the notch [1] on the gear portion of the release lever with the protrusion [2] on the gear portion of the pinch roller.

[2]

[1]

F-4-27

4-14

Chapter 4

4.3.5 Drive Unit

0023-3212

a) Feed Motor

Removing the Feed Motor

1) Remove the left cover.

2) Remove one spring [1], two screws [2], and one connector [3], and then remove the belt [4] from the motor pulley and remove the cable from the cable guide to remove the feed motor [5].

[1]

[2]

[3]

[5] [4]

F-4-28

Precautions about Reinstallation of Feed Motor

Put the timing belt on the pulley in the feed motor drive unit, tighten the screw [1] temporarily, install the spring [2], and then tighten the screw [1] to secure the feed motor.

[2]

[1]

F-4-29

b) Action to take after replacing the feed roller encoder and feed roller

This printer as shipped has the feed roller eccentricity (that is, variations in the rate of paper feed from rotation to rotation) corrected for enhanced media feed accuracy. When the feed roller HP sensor or feed roller encoder and feed roller pertaining to the correction of eccentricity variations has been replaced, therefore, they should require adjustment.

Execute service mode under the following conditions to launch automatic adjustment:

Service mode: SERVICE MODE > ADJUST > PRINT PATTERN > LF TUNING

Media type: Glossy photo paper

If adjustment cannot be done properly by selecting "SERVICE MODE > ADJUST > PRINT PATTERN > LF TUNING" (auto adjustment), carry out manual adjustment.

Service mode: SERVICE MODE > ADJUST > PRINT PATTERN > LF TUNING2

Media type: Gloss photo paper

Check the printed pattern and enter values for adjustment.

4-15

Chapter 4

c) Carriage Motor

Removing the Carriage Motor

1) Move the carriage onto the platen. Refer to "Disassembly/Reassembly > Points to Note on Disassembly and Reassembly > Opening the Cap/Moving the Wiper

Unit".

2) Remove the left/right cover.

3) Remove one screw [1], and then remove the carriage upper cover [2].

[1]

[2]

F-4-30

4) Remove one screw [1], pulley retainer [2] and spring [3] to loosen the carriage belt [4]. Remove the belt from the pulley unit [5], and then the pulley unit [5].

[4] [2] [3] [5]

[1]

F-4-31

4-16

5) Remove the belt [1] from the pulley [5], and then remove two screws [2] and disconnect one connector [3] to remove the carriage motor [4].

[3]

Chapter 4

[4]

[1]

[2]

[5]

F-4-32

Precautions about Reinstallation of Carriage Motor

- Reinstall the carriage belt [1] carefully so that it is not twisted. After reinstalling it, check whether the carriage moves on the platen smoothly.

[1]

F-4-33

- Reinstall the pulley retainer [1] in such a manner that it fits in the notch [2] on the side plate.

[1]

[2]

F-4-34

d) Action to take after removing or replacing the carriage motor

After the carriage and carriage motor and carriage belt and linear encoder sensor has been removed or replaced, execute the following service mode.

Service mode: SERVICE MODE > ADJUST > CR MOTOR COG

4-17

Chapter 4

e) Shutter Motor

Removing the Shutter Motor

1) Remove the output guide (right).

2) Disconnect one connector [1]. While releasing the hook [3] by pressing the protrusion [2], turn the shutter motor unit [4] slightly in the clockwise direction.

Remove the shutter motor unit [4] with it lifted.

[4] [1]

[2]

[3]

F-4-35

4-18

4.3.6 Cutter a) Cutter

Removing the Cutter

1) Perform service mode: [SERVICE MODE] > [REPLACE] > [CUTTER] and then choose [YES] to move the cutter to the replacement place.

2) Remove two screws [1] by using the hex key wrench of 1.5mm diameter to remove the cutter [2].

Chapter 4

0023-3213

[1]

[2]

F-4-36

MEMO:

After replacing the cutter, press the [OK] key to return the cutter to the home position. Then, choose [CLR COUNTER CT-1] > [YES] that displayed on the LCD to initialize the parts counter information.

Removing the Cutter Rail Unit

1) Drain ink. Refer to "Draining Ink" in "Precautions about Disassembly/Reassembly" in "Disassembly/Reassembly".

2) To remove the cutter rail unit, remove the left/right ink tank cover, left/right ink tank unit, and mist fan.

3) Remove two screws [1] and disconnect one connector [2] and remove the cable from the cable guide, and then remove the cutter unit [3].

[1] [3]

[2]

F-4-37

4-19

Chapter 4

4) Remove one screw [1], move the cutter rail unit [2] to the left to release it from two protrusion [3], and then remove it rightward.

[3]

[2]

F-4-38

[1]

4-20

Chapter 4

4.3.7 Purge Unit

0027-9564

a) Purge Unit

Removing the Purge Unit

1) Unlock the carriage unit, and then move the carriage onto the platen. Refer to "Disassembly/Reassembly > Points to Note on Disassembly and Reassembly >

Opening the Cap/Moving the Wiper Unit".

2) Remove the right cover.

3) Remove five screws [1] and disconnect five connectors [2], and then remove the cable from the cable guide to remove the right side plate unit [3].

[2] [1] [1] [1] [2]

[1] [2] [3] [1] [2]

F-4-39

4) Remove two screws [1] and two waste ink tubes [2], the cable from the cable guide, and then remove the purge unit [3].

[1] [3] [1]

[2]

Remove the waste ink tubes carefully so that ink does not spout.

F-4-40

4-21

Chapter 4

Precautions about Reinstallation of Purge Unit

- When installing the waste ink tubes, attach the tube that painted the white mark [1] to the near edge (i.e.; the length of the tube is the shorter) to the left joint [2].

[1] [2]

F-4-41

- When installing the waste ink tubes, attach the tubes surely until end of the joint. And check that the tubes are not buckled.

F-4-42

a) Drain ink tube joint (CL)

Removing the drain ink tube joint (CL)

1) Open the maintenance cartridge cover [1] to remove the maintenance cartridge [2], and then remove the face cover [3] by inserting a flat head screwdriver in the slit.

[3]

[2]

2) Remove two screws [1], and then remove the output guide (right) [2].

[1]

F-4-43

[1]

F-4-44

[2]

4-22

3) Remove twelve screws [1], and then remove the rear cover [2].

[1]

4) Disconnect the connector [1].

[1]

[1]

F-4-45

[2]

[1]

Chapter 4

[1]

F-4-46

5) Remove two screws [1], and then remove the maintenance cartridge holder unit [2].

[1]

[2]

F-4-47

4-23

Chapter 4

6) Remove three screws [1] and drain ink tube [2], and then remove the drain ink tube joint (CL) [3].

[1]

[2]

F-4-48

[3]

When removing the drain ink tube joint (CL) and the drain ink tube, be careful so that the ink do not spout or drip.

Precautions about Reinstallation of drain ink tube joint (CL)

- When attaching the drain ink tube joint (CL), insert the drain ink tube [1] firmly to the joint.

[1]

F-4-49

4-24

4.3.8 Ink Tank Unit a) Ink Tank Unit

Removing the Right Ink Tank Unit

1) Perform ink drainage. Refer to "Disassembly/Reassembly > Points to Note on Disassembly and Reassembly > Draining the ink".

2) Remove the right cover, front cover, and right ink tank cover.

3) Remove four screws [1], and then remove the support plate [2].

[2]

Chapter 4

0031-2624

[1]

[1]

F-4-50

4) Remove four screws [1] and disconnect two connectors [2], and then remove the cable from the cable guide. Then, remove the joint [3] between the ink tube unit and ink tank unit carefully and remove the ink tube from the guide, and then remove the right ink tank unit [4].

[2]

[3] [4]

[1]

F-4-51

4-25

Chapter 4

- Remove the joint carefully so that ink does not spout.

- Put a plastic bag or the like on the ink tube joint to prevent ink from spouting.

F-4-52

F-4-53

Removing the Left Ink Tank Unit


2) Remove the left cover, front cover, and left ink tank cover.

3) Remove four screws [1], and then remove the support plate [2].

[2]

[1]

[1]

F-4-54

4-26

Chapter 4

4) Remove four screws [1] and disconnect two connectors [2], and then remove the cable from the cable guide. Then, remove the joint [3] between the ink tube unit and ink tank unit carefully and remove the ink tube from the guide, and then remove the left ink tank unit [4].

[2]

[4]

[3]

F-4-55



[1]

F-4-56

F-4-57

4-27

Chapter 4

b) Valve Motor Unit

Removing the Valve Motor Unit

1) Remove the ink tank unit.

2) Remove three screws [1] and disconnect two connectors [2], and then remove the cable from the cable guide to remove the valve motor unit [3].

[2]

[3]

[1]

F-4-58

[2]

4-28

Chapter 4

4.3.9 Ink Tube Unit a) Ink Tube Unit

Removing the Ink Tube Unit


2) Unlock the carriage unit. Refer to "Disassembly/Reassembly > Points to Note on Disassembly and Reassembly > Opening the Cap/Moving the Wiper Unit".

3) Remove the front cover.

4) Move the carriage to the position where there is a notch [1] at the front of the platen as shown below.

0023-3328

[1]

F-4-59

5) Remove the printhead.

6) Open the tube guide [1] an angle of 90 degrees frontward, and then remove the tube guide [1] together with the ink tube.

Remove the ink tube [2] from the carriage guide and one spring [3], release two hooks [4], and then remove the joint base [5] together with the printhead fixer lever.

[1]

[4]

[2]

[4]

[5]

F-4-60

[3]

4-29

Chapter 4



F-4-61

7) Remove two screws [1] and disconnect two connectors [2], and then remove the solenoid base [3].

[2] [3]

[1]

F-4-62

8) Remove two joint [1] between the ink tube unit [2] and ink tank unit carefully, and then remove the ink tube unit [2] from the guide.

[1] [2] [1]

F-4-63

4-30



F-4-64

F-4-65

F-4-66

F-4-67

Chapter 4

4-31

Chapter 4

Precautions about Reinstallation of Ink Tube Unit

- Insert the ink tube and joint deeply into the guide.

- When installing the ink tube unit, align marking [1] on the ink tube unit to the right end of guide [2] and the left end of tape [3] to within 4mm from the left end of tube guide [4].

[3]

[4]

0+4mm

[2]

F-4-68

[1]

After detaching the joint of the ink tube unit, the joint might become easy to come off by the ink that has adhered to it.

In that case, please wash the joint by alcohol and remove the adhering ink.

4-32

Chapter 4

4.3.10 Waste Ink Collection Unit

0031-2626

When disassembling the waste ink collection unit, pay attention to the ink leaking from the disassembled parts. Put the parts of the disassembled waste ink collection unit in a plastic bag or the like with care given to the ink leaking from the portion [A] enclosed in a circle.

The service parts packing box may include a plastic bag for packing replacement parts. Use it for putting consumable parts of the waste ink collection unit.

[8]

[3]

[5]

[7]

[1]

[4]

[1] Mist Fan

[2]

No

[4]

[5]

[6]

[7]

[1]

[2]

[3]

Name

Mist Fan

Mist Exhaust Duct

Platen Suction Fan

Platen Exhaust Duct



Ink Tank Unit Waste Ink Tray

[8]

[9]

Purge Unit Waste Ink Tray

Front Duct

[6]

[9]

[7]

F-4-69

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

Q'ty Part number

-

-

QM3-5854

QM3-5853

QM3-5905

QM3-5805

QM3-5956

-

QM4-8463/

QM4-8467

Consumables

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Service Mode

(PARTS xx)

Mi-1

Mi-1

WF-2

HMa-1

[A]

F-4-70

4-33

Chapter 4

[2] Mist Exhaust Duct

[3] Platen Suction Fan

[4] Platen Exhaust Duct

[A]

F-4-71

[A]

[A]

F-4-72

[5] Head Management Sensor

F-4-73

[A]

F-4-74

4-34

a) Mist Fan

Removing the Mist Fan

1) Remove the rear upper cover and front cover and left ink tank cover.

2) Remove two screws [1] and disconnect the connector [2], and then remove the cable from the cable guide to remove the support plate [3].

[1]

[3]

Chapter 4

[2]

F-4-75

3) Remove four screws [1] and disconnect three connectors [2], and then remove the cable from the cable guide to remove the mist fan [3].

[2]

[2]

[1]

[1]

[1]

[3]

F-4-76

4-35

Chapter 4

b) Mist Exhaust Duct

Removing the Mist Exhaust Duct

1) Remove the mist fan.

2) Remove one screw [1], and then remove the cable from the cable guide to remove the mist exhaust duct [2].

MEMO:

The mist fan [1] and mist exhaust duct [2] can be removed together.

[1]

[2]

F-4-77

[1]

[2]

F-4-78

Precautions about Reinstallation of Mist Exhaust Duct

Make sure that the protrusion [1] on the mist exhaust duct fits in the notch [2] on the side plate.

[2] [1]

F-4-79

4-36

c) Platen Suction Fan

Removing the Platen Suction Fan

1) Remove the output guide (right)/(middle).

2) Remove one screw [1] and disconnect one connector [2] to remove the platen suction fan [3].

[1]

[3]

[2]

F-4-80

3) After drawing out the platen suction fan [1], turn it up side down immediately so that ink does not drip off.

[1]

Chapter 4

d) Platen Exhaust Duct

Removing the Platen Exhaust Duct

1) Remove the mist exhaust duct and left ink tank unit.

2) Remove one screw [1], and then the platen exhaust duct [2].

F-4-81

[1]

F-4-82

[2]

4-37

Chapter 4

4.3.11 Multi Sensor

0023-3335

a) Removing the Multi Sensor

1) Unlock the carriage unit, and then move the carriage onto the platen. Refer to "Disassembly/Reassembly > Points to Note on Disassembly and Reassembly >

Opening the Cap/Moving the Wiper Unit".

2) Remove the printhead to protect it.

3) Remove one screw [1] and disconnect one connector [2], and then the multi sensor [3].

[2]

[1] [3]

F-4-83

b) Removing the Multi Sensor Reference Plate

1) Remove one screw [1], and then remove the multi sensor reference plate [2].

[1] [2]

F-4-84

Do not touch the white sheets of the multi sensor reference plate.

c) Action following the replacement of the carriage unit/multi sensor

Because the distance between the multi sensor (in the carriage unit) and the nozzles (in the printhead) is varied from one unit to another, the printer as shipped has its optical axis corrected to adjust the image write position. When the carriage unit or multisensor has been replaced or disassembled and reassembled, they require adjustment.

Execute service mode under the following conditions:

* The multi sensor reference plate(QL2-3160: MOUNT, MULTI SENSOR REFERENCE) must be replaced at the same time whenever the carriage or the multi sensor is being replaced.

1) Carry out the following service mode without media loading.

- Service mode : SERVICE MODE > ADJUST > GAP CALIB.

2) Load the following media.

Media type : Photo glossy paper

Media size : Media having a width equal toor larger then that of A2-size paper

3) Carry out the following service mode.

- Service mode : SERVICE MODE > ADJUST > PRINT PATTERN > OPTICAL AXIS

4-38

4.3.12 Linear Encoder a) Linear Encoder

Removing the Linear Encoder Sensor

1) Remove the carriage unit.

2) Remove two screws [1], and then remove the linear encoder sensor cover [2].

[2]

Chapter 4

0023-3337

[1]

F-4-85

3) Remove two screws [1] and disconnect one connector [2], and then remove the linear encoder sensor [3].

[3]

[2]

[1]

F-4-86

Removing the Linear Scale

1) Unlock the carriage unit, and then move the carriage unit [1] on the platen. Refer to "Disassembly/Reassembly > Points to Note on Disassembly and Reassembly

> Opening the Cap/Moving the Wiper Unit".

[1]

F-4-87

MEMO:

When removing or installing the linear scale, move the carriage unit to the HP side on top of the platen to prevent the linear scale from touching the linear encoder sensor.

4-39

Chapter 4

2) Remove the left/right cover and left/right ink tank cover.

3) Remove one screw [1], and then remove the carriage upper cover [2].

[1]

[2]

F-4-88

4) Remove the spring [1], release the notch from the protrusion [2] on the side plate, and then remove the linear scale [3] from the left side.

[1]

[3]

4-40

F-4-89

[2]

Chapter 4

Precaution about Reinstallation of Linear Encoder Sensor/Linear Scale

- When removing or installing the linear scale, move the carriage unit to the HP side on top of the platen to prevent the linear scale from touching the linear encoder sensor.

- Reinstall the linear scale in such a manner that the "R" mark on the linear scale is on the right side of the printer and the "L" mark is on the left side of the printer when viewed from the front of the printer.

L

R

F-4-90

4-41

Chapter 4

- Reinstall the linear scale in such a manner that it passes through the notch in the guide [1] and the notch [2] on the side plate.

[1]

- Never touch the detection part [1] of the linear scale.

[1]

F-4-91

[1]

[2]

R

L

F-4-92

R

4-42

- Make sure that the linear scale [1] is in the detection zone of the linear encoder sensor [2].

[1] [2]

F-4-93

b) Action to take after removing or replacing the linear encoder sensor

After the carriage and carriage motor and carriage belt and linear encoder sensor has been removed or replaced, execute the following service mode.


Chapter 4

4-43

Chapter 4

4.3.13 Head Management Sensor a) Head Management Sensor

Removing the Head Management Sensor

1) Remove the purge unit.

2) Remove one screw [1] and one disconnect connector [2], release one protrusion [3], and then remove the head management sensor [4].

[1] [4] [2] [3]

0023-3339

F-4-94

b) Procedure after replacing the head management sensor

Since the distance between the head management sensor and the carriage unit varies among printers, the optical axis is factory-adjusted to adjust the non-discharging detection position. When you have replaced the head management sensor or performed assembly/reassembly of surrounding parts that can change the distance between the head management sensor and the carriage unit, reasjustment is required.

Peform the readjustment in the service mode.

Service mode : SERVICE MODE > ADJUST > NOZZLE CHK POS.

4-44

Chapter 4

4.3.14 PCBs

0023-3347

Do not replace the main controller PCB and the maintenance cartridge relay PCB (ROM board) at the same time.

Both PCBs hold vital information, such as settings and a carriage drive time. Before either PCB is replaced, such information is temporarily saved through internal communication with the other PCB and is automatically written to the new PCB when it is installed. For this reason, the two PCBs cannot be replaced at the same time. To replace both PCBs, work in order of (a) > (b).

When the main controller PCB and maintenance cartridge relay PCB have been replaced with service parts, check that the latest version of firmware is installed in them.

If not, upgrade the firmware to the latest version.

Reference:


a) Replacing the maintenance cartridge relay PCB (ROM board)

1) Turn off the power and disconnect the power plug.

2) Replace the maintenance cartridge relay PCB.

3) Reconnect the power plug and turn on the power while pressing the [Load] and [Navigate] keys. (Start the printer in PCB replacement mode.)

4) Release the key, but not before making sure that "Initializing" appears on the display. (The message lamp lights when printer enters PCB replacement mode.)

5) Wait until "REPLACE MODE" appears on the display.

6) Select MC BOARD and press the [OK] key.

7) Turn off the power, but not before making sure that "Power off" appears on the display.

8) Turn on the power.

9) Check the firmware version. If the firmware is not the latest version, upgrade the firmware to the latest version.

b) Replacing the main controller PCB

1) Turn off the power and disconnect the power plug.

2) Replace the main controller PCB.

3) Reconnect the power plug and turn on the power while pressing the [Load] and [Navigate] keys. (Start the printer in PCB replacement mode.)

4) Release the key, but not before making sure that "Initializing" appears on the display. (The message lamp lights when printer enters PCB replacement mode.)

5) Wait until "REPLACE MODE" appears on the display.

6) Select CPU BOARD and press the [OK] key.

7) Turn off the power, but not before making sure that "Power off" appears on the display.

8) Turn on the power.

9) Check the firmware version. If the firmware is not the latest version, upgrade the firmware to the latest version.

4-45

Chapter 4

4.3.15 Opening/Closing the Ink Supply Valve a) Opening/Closing the Ink Supply Valve

1) Remove the ink tank cover.

2) Open the ink supply valve with moving the lever [1] in the arrow direction.

[1]

0031-2627

F-4-95

- If the printhead fixer lever is released with the ink supply valve to an ink tube open while the tube is filled with an ink, the ink in the tube could flow backward to the ink tank unit, leaking through the hollow needle in the ink tank.

- If the valve remains open, as on occurrence of the valve open/close error, remove the valve motor unit and (see Disassembly/Reassembly > Points to Note on

Disassembly/Reassembly > Ink Tank Unit) and close the ink supply valve.

4-46

Chapter 4

4.3.16 Draining the ink

There are two ways to drain the ink passage of inks: automatic and manual.

0031-2628

Be sure to drain the ink from the ink passage to prevent ink leakage before disassembling any component of the ink passage or reshipping the printer.

1. Automatic Ink Drain

Execute Automatic Ink Drain by selecting "Set./Adj. Menu" > "Prep.MovePrinter" from the main menu.

Execute Automatic Ink Drain once again if the printer shuts down due to a power failure or any other trouble before the operation completes.

2. Manual Ink Drain

Drain the ink passage of inks manually if any electrical component in the printer fails or firmware malfunctions or if the printer fails to be powered on.

1) Remove left/right cover, left/right ink tank cover. See "Disassembly/Reassembly > Points to Note on Disassembly/Reassembly > External Covers".

2) Remove the ink tanks.

3) Move the carriage to above the platen. See "Disassembly/Reassembly > Points to Note on Disassembly/Reassembly > Opening the caps and moving the wiper unit".

4) Release the printhead fixer lever.

5) Open the ink supply valve to allow the inks to flow into the ink tank unit waste ink tray.

4-47

Chapter 4

4.4 Applying the Grease

4.4.1 Applying the Grease

Some parts require application of grease when replaced. Apply the grease(special tool) listed below.

Smear the grease lightly and evenly with a flat brush or the like.

For the printer disassembly/reassembly method, refer to "DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY" and "parts catalog".

0023-2642

Do not apply the grease to locations in which not designated grease may cause poor print quality. Take particular care that grease do not get onto the wiper, cap, carriage shaft and the linear scale.

1

2

3

No.

4

Location

Joint Base Rib

Shaft Cleaner

Upper Cover Hinge Catch

Roll Cover Slide Guide

Contact between Pinch Roller Release Shaft and

Pinch Roller

Pinch Roller Pressure Release Gear

Protrusion of Release Lever

Grease

FLOIL G-5000H

EU-1

FLOIL G-5000H

FLOIL G-5000H

FLOIL G-5000H

FLOIL G-5000H

FLOIL G-5000H

Bushing of Feed Roller FLOIL G-5000H

1. Joint Base Rib [1]

[1]

Quantity

Approx. 8-20mg

Soaks enough.

Approx. 8-20mg

Approx. 8-20mg

Approx. 8-20mg

Approx. 8-20mg

Approx. 8-20mg

Approx. 8-20mg

Remarks

Be careful not to apply the grease to the edge face of protrusions.

F-4-96

4-48

2. Shaft Cleaner [1]

[1]

[1]

Chapter 4

F-4-97

4-49

Chapter 4

3. Upper Cover Hinge Catch [1] / Roll Cover Slide Guide [2]

[2]

[1]

F-4-98

4-50

Chapter 4

4. Contact between Pinch Roller Release Shaft and Pinch Roller [1] / Pinch Roller Pressure Release Gear [2] / Protrusion of Release lever [3] / Bushing of Feed

Roller [4]

[1]

[2]

[4]

[4]

F-4-99

[3]

[3]

4-51

Chapter 4

4.5 Adjustment and Setup Items

4.5.1 Adjustment Item List

The following adjustment procedures need to be performed when parts have been replaced or removed and then reinstalled:

0023-5489

Adjustment item

Multi sensor recalibration

Adjusting feed roller eccentricity

Head management sensor recalibration

Carriage motor recalibration

Adjustment timing

Multi sensor replacement/removal

Carriage unit replacement/removal

Feed roller

Feed roller encoder

Head management sensor replacement/removal



Carriage motor replacement/removal

Carriage belt replacement/removal

4.5.2 Procedure after Replacing the Carriage Unit or Multi Sensor

0023-2640

a) Note on replacing the carriage unit and the multi sensor

- The multi sensor reference plate(QL2-3160: MOUNT, MULTI SENSOR REFERENCE) must be replaced at the same time whenever the carriage or the multi sensor is being replaced.

b) Multi Sensor Recalibration

Because the distance between the multi sensor (in the carriage unit) and the nozzles (in each printhead) is varied from one unit to another, the printer has its optical axis corrected and paper gap adjustment sensor gain and calibration adjusted prior to shipment. When the carriage unit or multi sensor has been replaced, they should require adjustment.

Execute service mode under the following conditions to launch automatic adjustment:

1) Carry out the following service mode without media loading.

- Service mode : SERVICE MODE > ADJUST > GAP CALIB.

2) Load the following media.


Media size : Media having a width equal too larger than that of A2-size paper

3) Carry out the following service mode.

- Service mode : SERVICE MODE > ADJUST > PRINT PATTERN > OPTICAL AXIS

c) Carriage Motor Adjustment

- After the carriage and carriage motor and carriage belt and linear encoder sensor has been removed or replaced, execute the following service mode.


4.5.3 Procedure after Replacing the Feed Roller or Feed Roller Encoder

0012-6594

Feed roller eccentricity is factory-adjusted (correction of variation in the paper feed amount per rotation). It is necessary to adjust feed roller eccentricity after replacing the feed roller encoder or feed roller.

In the service mode, perform automatic adjustment of feed roller eccentricity.

Service mode : SERVICE MODE > ADJUST > PRINT PATTERN > LF TUNING


If adjustment cannot be done properly by selecting "SERVICE MODE > ADJUST > PRINT PATTERN > LF TUNING" (auto adjustment), carry out manual adjustment.

Service mode SERVICE MODE > ADJUST > PRINT PATTERN > LF TUNING2

Media type: Gloss photo paper

Check the printed pattern and enter values for adjustment.

4.5.4 Procedure after Replacing the Head Management Sensor

0013-7146

Since the distance between the head management sensor and the carriage unit varies among printers, the optical axis is factory-adjusted to adjust the non-discharging detection position. When you have replaced the head management sensor or performed assembly/reassembly of surrounding parts that can change the distance between the head management sensor and the carriage unit, readjustment is required

Perform the readjustment in the service mode.

Service mode : SERVICE MODE > ADJUST > NOZZLE CHK POS.

4-52

Chapter 5 MAINTENANCE

Contents

Contents

5.1 Periodic Replacement Parts ...........................................................................................................................................5-1

5.1.1 Periodic Replacement Parts ......................................................................................................................................................... 5-1

5.2 Consumable Parts...........................................................................................................................................................5-1

5.2.1 Consumable Parts......................................................................................................................................................................... 5-1

5.3 Periodic Maintenance.....................................................................................................................................................5-3

5.3.1 Periodic Maintenance................................................................................................................................................................... 5-3

Chapter 5

5.1 Periodic Replacement Parts

5.1.1 Periodic Replacement Parts

0012-6595

Level

User

Service Personnel

None

None

Periodic Replacement Part

5.2 Consumable Parts

5.2.1 Consumable Parts

0031-2598

Count er name

*1

CR1

CR2

CR3

CR4

CR5

SP1

PG1

Name

Parts number

Q't y

Life sheets/

A0 *2

CARRIAGE UNIT QM4-8458 1 14000

Hma1 HEAD

MT1

PL1

Mi1

CT1

WF1

WF2

FLEXIBLE CABLE

UNIT

CARRIAGE UNIT

MULTI SENSOR

UNIT

INK TUBE UNIT

PURGE UNIT

JOINT, TUBE,

COLOR

MANAGEMENT

SENSOR UNIT

MOTOR, DC

MOTOR, DC

MIST FAN DUCT

UNIT

CUTTER

M/C HOLDER

UNIT

WASTE INK BOX

UNIT

QM3-4613 1 38100

CARRIAGE UNIT QM4-8458 1 14900

SCALE, LINEAR QD1-0006 1

QM4-8458 1

QM3-5831 1

QM3-5951 1

QM3-5988 1

QC3-1437 1

QM3-5956 1

QK1-5068 1

QK1-5067 1

QM3-5853 1

QM3-5846 1

QM3-5841 1

QM3-5805 1

-

50000

14900

25000

50000

100700

340900

31800

15208

100000

37282

Warning level thresholds

Level1

11228571

6030000

12476190

6700000

(X210) mm times

14850000 16500000 (X1,000,

000) dots

54000

14850000

3960000

45000

30.35

13500

700.20

34.97

90000

254.21

42.53

Level2

60000

16500000

4400000

50000

31.29

15000

778

38.85

100000

282.45

47.25

times

(X100) dots times ml hours hours ml ml ml

Unit

times

Panel message *3

Level1 Level2

Count contents

W: Level1 W: Level2 Carriage scan distances

W: Level1 W: Level2 Carriage scan times

W: Level1 W: Level2 Total ink discharge quantity

Reference page of

"Points to Note on

Disassembly and

Reassembly"

"Carriage Unit" >

"Removing the

Carriage Unit"

W: Level1 W: Level2 Number of carriage height changing cam rotation

W: Level1 W: Level2 Total ink discharge quantity

W: Level1 W: Level2 Carriage scan times

W: Level1 W: Level2 Number of suction pump rotation

"Linear Encoder" >

"Removing the Linear

Encoder"

Carriage Unit >

"Removing the

Carriage Unit"

"Multi Sensor" >

"Removing the Multi

Sensor"

"Ink Tube Unit" >

"Removing the Ink

Tube Unit"

"Purge Unit" >

"Removing the Purge

Unit"

"Purge Unit" >

"Removing the Waste

Ink Tube Joint (CL)"

"Head Management

Sensor" > "Removing the Head Management

Sensor"

W: Level1 W: Level2 Ink discharge quantity to head management sensor

- *4 - *4 Carriage scan hours

- *4 - *4 Paper feed hours

W: Level1 E144-4001 Mist collection quantity

W: Level1 W: Level2 Cut times (cut operation to the forward direction)

W: Level1 E144-4001 Waste ink quantity by suction operation that has been executed during detachment of the maintenance cartridge

W: Level1 E144-4001 Mist collection quantity by platen fan

"Drive Unit" >

"Removing the

Carriage Motor"

"Drive Unit" >

"Removing the Feed

Motor"

"Waste Ink Collection

Unit" > "Removing the

Mist Exhaust Duct"

"Cutter" > "Removing the Cutter"

"Purge Unit" >

"Removing the Waste

Ink Tube Joint (CL)"

"Waste Ink Collection

Unit" > "Removing the

Platen Exhaust Duct"

*1: The counter name is the name of "SERVICE MODE > COUNTER > PARTS CNT. > COUNTER XX-X".

*2: The exchange timing varies by the print mode and operating condition and others. (Print condition: coated paper/ print mode of photo and illustration/ each color 12.5% duty X 4(total 50% duty))

*3: When displaying the message of "W: Level1" or "W: Level2", the printer continues to operate. And when displaying the error code, the printer stops to operate.

*4: The operation panel do not display the message, but the condition is printed in the "PRINT INF".

5-1

Chapter 5

- Maintenance Kit

Kit name

MAINTENANCE KIT (CR/Mi)

Parts number

QY6-1534 CR1

CR3

Counter name

CR5

Mi1

Name

CARRIAGE UNIT

CARRIAGE UNIT

SCALE, LINEAR

MULTI SENSOR UNIT

MIST FAN DUCT UNIT

After supplies have been replaced, execute [INITIALIZE] > [PARTS COUNTER] > [PARTS xx] in service mode to initialize (clear) the parts counter information.

5-2

5.3 Periodic Maintenance

5.3.1 Periodic Maintenance

Level

User

Service personnel

Periodic maintenance

Cleaning of ink mist and other substances(about once each month

None

a) Printer cleaning

To keep up with print quality and prevent troubles, clean the printer about once each month.

1) Turn off the printer power.

2) Remove the power cord and interface cable.

3) Wipe the external surfaces of the printer with a cloth moistened with water and then wrung tight and then dry them finally with a dry cloth.

Chapter 5

0031-3162

F-5-1

- Be sure to turn off the printer power and pull out the power cord from the outlet. If the power is accidentally turned on, contact with moving internal parts can result in injury.

- Do not use flammable solvents, such as thinner and benzine, on the printer. Solvents coming into contact with any electrical parts inside the printer could result in fires or electrical shock hazards.

4) Open the Upper Cover.

F-5-2

5-3

Chapter 5

5) If paper dust has accumulated in the suction holes [1] on the Platen, the borderless printing ink grooves [2], use the included Cleaning Brush [3] to wipe it away.

[2] [3] [1]

F-5-3

MEMO:

If the Cleaning Brush is dirty, rinse it in water.

6) Using a damp cloth that you have wrung out completely, wipe inside the Upper Cover to clean it. Wipe away any ink residue on all over the Platen [1], the Pinch

Roller Unit [2], the Borderless Printing Ink Grooves [3], the Output Guide [4], and so on.

[1] [3] [2]

[4]

F-5-4

5-4

Chapter 5

- Do not dry the interiors of the upper cover with a dry cloth. Electrostatic charges could make the internal components susceptible to dirt, resulting in degraded print quality.

- Do not use flammable solvents, such as thinner and benzine, on the printer. Solvents coming into contact with any electrical parts inside the printer could result in fires or electrical shock hazards.

- Do not touch linear scale [1] and carriage shaft [2].

[2]

[1]

F-5-5

MEMO:

When cleaning between the Platen and Output Guide, use a damp cloth that you have wrung out completely to wipe over the ejection slot and along grooves.

7) Close the upper cover.

F-5-6

5-5

Chapter 6 TROUBLESHOOTING

Contents

Contents

6.1 Troubleshooting .............................................................................................................................................................6-1

6.1.1 Outline.......................................................................................................................................................................................... 6-1

6.1.1.1 Outline of Troubleshooting .............................................................................................................................................................................6-1

6.2 Error Code......................................................................................................................................................................6-1

6.2.1 Outline.......................................................................................................................................................................................... 6-1

6.2.1.1 Outline.............................................................................................................................................................................................................6-1

6.2.2 Warning Table ............................................................................................................................................................................. 6-2

6.2.2.1 Warnings .........................................................................................................................................................................................................6-2

6.2.3 Error Table ................................................................................................................................................................................... 6-6

6.2.3.1 Errors...............................................................................................................................................................................................................6-6

6.2.4 Sevice Call Table ....................................................................................................................................................................... 6-17

6.2.4.1 Service Call Errors ........................................................................................................................................................................................6-17

6.3 Service Software ..........................................................................................................................................................6-18

6.3.1 L Printer Service Tool................................................................................................................................................................ 6-18

6.4 Firmware Update Tool .................................................................................................................................................6-22

6.4.1 imagePROGRAF Firmware Update Tool.................................................................................................................................. 6-22

6.5 Service Tools................................................................................................................................................................6-24

6.5.1 Tool List..................................................................................................................................................................................... 6-24

Chapter 6

6.1 Troubleshooting

6.1.1 Outline

6.1.1.1 Outline of Troubleshooting

0013-1940

1. Outline

Troubles subject to troubleshooting are classified into those shown on the display (warning, error, and service call) and those not shown on the display.

The code of warning and error is shown by combining alphanumeric characters of eight digits and four digits.

The code of service call error is shown by the initial character of "E" and combining alphanumeric characters of three digits and four digits.

No code number is displayed when a warning occurs. Selecting [SERVICE MODE] > [DISPLAY] > [WARNING] in service mode allows you to check the warning log.

2. Precautions for Troubleshooting

1) Check the environmental conditions and the media used for printing.

2) Before performing troubleshooting, make sure that all connectors and cables are connected properly.

3) When servicing the printer with the external cover removed and the AC power supplied, be extremely careful to avoid electric shock and shorting electrical devices.

4) In the following sections, the troubleshooting steps are described such that the component related to the most probable cause of the problem will be repaired or replaced first, being followed by components with less problem probability. If multiple components have the same problem probability, the steps are described beginning with the easiest one.

After performing each step, check to see if the problem has been resolved by making test prints. If the problem persists, proceed to the next step.

5) After completion of the troubleshooting, check that all connectors and cables have been reconnected and screws have been tightened firmly.

6) Whenever you have performed replacement or repair services, make test prints to check whether the problem has been resolved.

7) When connecting with the printer by using the LAN cable at the service working, be sure to enter the service mode to recognize the printer correctly.

6.2 Error Code

6.2.1 Outline

6.2.1.1 Outline

The printer indicates errors using the display and LEDs.

If an error occurs during printing, the printer status is also displayed on the status monitor of the printer driver.

The following three types of errors are displayed on the display:

0031-2603

- Warning

Status where the print operation can be continued without remedying the cause of the problem. This can, however, adversely affect the printing results.

- Error

Status where the print operation is stopped, and the regular operation cannot be recovered until the cause of the problem is remedied.

- Service call error

When a service call error occurs, the error is not cleared and the error indication remains on the operation panel even if the printer is powered off and on again.

(Occurrence of the service call error is indicated again at power-on.)

This measure is taken to prevent user's recovery of the service call error and damages to the printer.

Service call errors can be cleared, however, by starting up the printer in the service mode.

Note that some of the warnings, errors, and service call error described in the following tables may not appear in this printer.

In addition, the message that appears on the screen may not be the same as what is described in the table.

The first 4 digits of Warning and Error code show the following description.

The first 2 digits of code

01xxxxxx-xxx

03xxxxxx-xxx

Warning

Error

Description

The next 2 digits of code

xx01xxxx-xxxx xx03xxxx-xxxx xx06xxxx-xxxx xx13xxxx-xxxx xx1Axxxx-xxxx xx32xxxx-xxxx xx34xxxx-xxxx xx80xxxx-xxxx xx81xxxx-xxxx xx83xxxx-xxxx xx84xxxx-xxxx xx86xxxx-xxxx xx87xxxx-xxxx xx89xxxx-xxxx xx90xxxx-xxxx

Description

Jam-related

Cover-related

Media-related

Controller-related

HDD-related

Media-related

PDL-related

Printhead-related

Inktank-related

Inktank-related

Maintenance cartridge-related

Print-related

Cutter-related

Media take-up unit-related

Version up-related

6-1

Chapter 6

6.2.2 Warning Table

6.2.2.1 Warnings

0031-2604

*: Codes represent the numbers that are displayed in DISPLAY of the service mode and that are recorded in PRINT INF. As to PRINT INF, the codes record the last 4 digits. Messages that are not accompanied by a code indication are not logged.

Display message

Cannot cut paper.

Lift the release lever and reload the paper.

Paper Mismatch.

Code*

00000000-1011

01061000-1021

Condition detected

Cannot cut perform force cutting because paper is too short.

Reload new paper.

Action

Papr Size Mismatch

MediaType Mismatch

PaperWidth Mismatch

Mail box nearly full.

Delete unwanted data

Maximum jobs stored.

Delete unwanted data.

The paper is too small.

01063000-1022

01063000-1023

01063000-1054

011A1001-2901

011A1006-2907

013200D2-1051

01340501-1040

01340502-1041

Paper type mismatch

Paper size mismatch

Paper size/type mismatch

Roll media width mismatch

The occurrence conditions of roll paper width mismatch have been met with

"Warning" set in [Detect Mismatch] in the menu settings.

Match the paper type in printer driver and the one specified in printer panel.

Match the paper size in printer driver and the one specified in printer panel.

Match the paper type/size in printer driver and the ones specified in printer panel.

The warning is cleared when the print job is completed or cancelled.

The free hard disk space left for Personal

Boxes in the printer's hard disk does not have more than 1 GB, combined.

Saved jobs exceed the Personal Box capacity.

Delete unneeded jobs stored in Personal Boxes.

Size clip error

Memory full (HP-GL/2)

Invalid parameter (HP-GL/2)

Press the stop button to cancel the print job.

Delete print jobs from the queue.

Delete unneeded jobs stored on the hard disk.

Check the media size check.

Change the media size.

Check if there is the non-image area of the print.

Verify the transmitted data before reprinting.



GL2:W0501

The memory is full.

GL2:W0502

The parameter is out of range.

GL2:W0504

This command is not supported.

GL2:W0903

The memory is full.

GL2:W0904

The memory is full.

GARO W1221

01340504-1043

01340903-1047

01340904-1048

01341221-1030

Invalid command (HP-GL/2) Check if there is the non-image area of the print.


GARO W1222

GARO W1223

GARO W1224

GARO W1225

GARO W1226

GARO W1231

GARO W1232

GARO W1233

GARO W1234

GARO W1235

Problem with Printhead.

Chk printing results

Problem with Printhead R


Problem with Printhead L


Ink Level: Check

No ink tank loaded.

Check ink tank.

Ink Level: Check

No ink tank loaded.

Check ink tank.

Ink Level: Check

01341222-1031

01341223-1032

01341224-1033

01341225-1034

01341226-103A

01341231-1035

01341232-1036

01341233-1037

01341234-1038

01341235-1039

01800500-1010

01800500-1012

01800500-1013

01810101-1001

01810101-1411

01810102-1002

01810102-1412

01810103-1003

Overflow of replot buffer (HP-GL/2)

Overflow of Polygon buffer (HP-GL/2)

GARO (image mode) : Unknown command

GARO (image mode) : Invalid parameter count (no parameters)

GARO (image mode) : Required parameter missing

GARO error












GARO (image mode) : Other warning

GARO (image mode) : Image processing table error



Verify that there is no image missing in print result.


GARO (setup) : Unknown command Check if there is the non-image area of the print.


GARO (setup) : Invalid parameter count Check if there is the non-image area of the print.


GARO (setup) : Required parameter missing

GARO (setup) : Data out of bounds

GARO (setup) : Other warning

Number of non-discharging nozzles in printhead:

Warning level

Non-discharge occurred in printhead1







Clean the printhead.

Renew the printhead.

Identify the head management sensor unit.

Non-discharge occurred in printhead2

Y ink tank near-empty

Y ink tank removal


Renew the right printhead.


Renew the left printhead.

Renew the ink tank.

Install the Y ink tank.

M ink tank near-empty

M ink tank removal

C ink tank near-empty

Renew the ink tank.

Install the M ink tank.

Renew the ink tank.

6-2

Display message

No ink tank loaded.

Check ink tank.

Ink Level: Check

Ink Level: Check

No ink tank loaded.

Check ink tank.

No ink tank loaded.

Check ink tank.

Ink Level: Check

No ink tank loaded.

Check ink tank.

Ink Level: Check

No ink tank loaded.

Check ink tank.

Ink Level: Check

Not much ink is left. Prepare to replace the ink.

No ink tank loaded.

Check ink tank.

No ink tank loaded.

Check ink tank.

Ink Level: Check


No ink tank loaded.

Check ink tank.

No ink tank loaded.

Check ink tank.

Ink Level: Check


No ink tank loaded.

Check ink tank.

No ink tank loaded.

Check ink tank.

Ink tank is empty.

Replace the ink tank.

Ink tank is empty.


Ink tank is empty.


Ink tank is empty.


Ink tank is empty.


Ink tank is empty.


Ink tank is empty.


Ink tank is empty.


Ink tank is empty.


Ink tank is empty.


Ink tank is empty.


Ink tank is empty.


Ink tank is empty.


No ink tank loaded.

Check ink tank.

No ink tank loaded.

Check ink tank.

No ink tank loaded.

Check ink tank.

No ink tank loaded.

Check ink tank.

No ink tank loaded.

Check ink tank.

No ink tank loaded.

Check ink tank.

Prepare for maint cart replacement.

Code*

01810103-1413

01810104-1000

01810104-1004

01810104-1410

01810104-1414

01810105-1005

01810105-1415

01810106-1006

01810106-1416

01810106-1007

01810107-100A

01810107-1417

01810107-141A

01810108-1008

01810108-100C

01810108-1418

01810108-141C

01810109-1009

01810109-100B

01810109-1419

01810109-141B

01810301-1401

01810302-1402

01810303-1403

01810304-1400

01810304-1404

01810305-1405

01810306-1406

01810306-1407

01810307-140A

01810308-1408

01810308-140C

01810309-1409

01810309-140B

01830101-1411

01830102-1412

01830103-1413

01830104-1410

01830106-1416

01830106-1417

01841001-281A

No B ink tank warning

Y ink tank empty

M ink tank empty

C ink tank empty

BK ink tank empty

PM ink tank empty

PC ink tank empty

MBK ink tank empty

MBK2 ink tank empty

R ink tank empty

GY ink tank empty

G ink tank empty

PGY ink tank empty

B ink tank empty

No Y ink tank warning

No M ink tank warning

No C ink tank warning

No BK ink tank warning

No MBK1 ink tank warning

No MBK2 ink tank warning

Maintenance cartridge near-full


C ink tank removal

BK ink tank near-empty

PM ink tank near-empty

BK ink tank removal

PM ink tank removal

PC ink near-empty

PC ink tank removal

MBK ink tank near-empty

MBK ink tank removal

MBK2 ink tank near-empty

R ink tank near-empty

MBK ink tank removal

No R ink tank warning

GY ink near-empty

G ink tank near-empty

GY ink tank removal

No G ink tank warning

PGY ink near-empty

B ink tank near-empty

PGY ink tank removal

Install the C ink tank.

Action

Renew the ink tank.

Renew the ink tank.

Install the BK ink tank.

Install the PM ink tank.

Renew the ink tank.

Install the PC ink tank.

Renew the ink tank.

Install the MBK ink tank.

Renew the ink tank.

Renew the R ink tank.

Install the MBK ink tank.

Install the ink tank.

Renew the ink tank.

Renew the G ink tank.

Install the GY ink tank.


Renew the ink tank.

Renew the B ink tank.

Install the PGY ink tank.


Renew the Y ink tank.

Renew the M ink tank.

Renew the C ink tank.

Renew the BK ink tank.

Renew the PM ink tank.

Renew the PC ink tank.

Renew the MBK ink tank.

Renew the MBK2 ink tank.


Renew the GY ink tank.

Renew the G ink tank.

Renew the PGY ink tank.

Renew the B ink tank.







Replace the maintenance cartridge.

Chapter 6

6-3

Chapter 6

Display message

This type of paper is not compatible with

HP-GL/2.

Borderless printing not possible.

Check supported paper.

Paper position not suitable for borderless printing.

Mail box full.

Now printing without saving data.

Before borderless printing, move the blue platen switch.

Blue platen switch is dirty.

Please clean the switch.















Parts replacement time has passed.

Call for service.

Code*

01860006-1015

01861001-1052

01861001-1053

01861003-2902

01861004-1049

01861004-1050

01861006-1055

01861007-1056

01861008-1057

01861009-1058

0186100A-1059

0186100B-105A

0186100C-105B

0186100D-105C

0186100E-105D

0186100F-105E

01861010-105F

01861011-1060

01861012-1061

01861013-1062


Non-support paper of HP-GL/2

Action

Exchange for the compatible paper to HP-GL/2.

Borderless printing disabled (unsupported size)

The warning is cleared when the print job is completed or cancelled.

The occurrence conditions of borderless printing not possible error (unsupported size) have been met with "Warning" set in

[Detect Mismatch] in the menu settings.

Borderless printing disabled (physical) The warning is cleared when the print job is completed or cancelled.

The occurrence conditions of borderless printing not possible error (physical) have been met with "Warning" set in [Detect

Mismatch] in the menu settings.

100 jobs are stored in the Personal Box.


The platen shutter is closed at the borderless printing.

Platen shutter cleaning warning

Platen shutter No.1 open warning














Parts counter W2 level

Open the corresponding platen shutter.

Check the platen and multi sensor and surrounding parts.

Replace the multi sensor.

Clean the platen shutter.











































After checking the parts counter in service mode, replace any part whose counter is nearing the error value.

6-4

Display message

End of paper feed.

Cannot feed paper more.

Prepare for parts replacement.

Call for service.

Code* Condition detected

Forced feed limit

Parts counter W1 level

Action

Check the remaining quantity of roll media.

Check the parts counter in service mode.

Chapter 6

6-5

Chapter 6

6.2.3 Error Table

6.2.3.1 Errors

0031-2606

*: Codes represent the numbers that are displayed in DISPLAY of the service mode and that are recorded in PRINT INF. As to PRINT INF, the codes record the last 4 digits.

Display message

Paper size not detected.

Reload paper.



Leading edge detection error.

Lift the release lever and align leading edge with orange line.

This paper cannot be used.

Check supported paper sizes.

This paper cannot be used.

Check supported paper sizes.

Paper jam.

Manually rewind roll all the way.





! Paper not aligned with right guide.

(Change to the following message)

Code*

03010000-200A

03010000-200C

03010000-200D

03010000-200E

03010000-200F

03010000-2016

03010000-2017

03010000-2018

03010000-201A

! Push the release lever back, then reload the paper.

! Paper not aligned with right guide.

03010000-201B



Unable to detect the paper width (Paper loaded at an improper position)

Reload the paper.

Action

Unable to detect the leading end of paper Check the leading end of paper. Reload the paper.

Unable to detect the trailing end of cut sheet

Undersized paper (cut sheets/roll media)

Oversized paper (cut sheets/roll media)

Cut sheet feed failure

Paper (right) edge detection error

Paper (left) edge detection error

Paper (right) edge detection error (cut sheet pick-up)

Paper (right) edge detection error (roll media pick-up)

Check the sheet length. Check to see if paper has not jammed.

Replace with larger-sized paper.

Replace with smaller-sized paper.

Check or replace a cut sheet.

Check the right edge of paper.

Check the paper type.

Check the left edge of paper.

Check the paper type.

Set or replace the media.


! Push the release lever back, then reload the paper.

Paper jam.

03010000-201C Paper (right) edge detection error (cut sheet printing)


Lift the release lever and remove the paper.

Paper jam.

03010000-201D Paper (left) edge detection error (roll media printing)


Lift the release lever and remove the paper.

Cannot print as specified.

Replace paper with A4/LTR (vertical) or larger

Cannot feed paper.

Remove paper and press Load/Eject.

Cannot feed paper.

Lift the release lever and reload paper.

or

Paper jam.

Manually rewind roll all the way.

Paper jam.

Manually rewind roll all the way and press OK.

Paper jam.

Manually rewind roll all the way and press OK.

! Roll jam

Lift the release lever.

! Roll 1 (upper) jam


! Roll 2 (lower) jam


! Roll jam


Error in cutter position.

Hardware error.

03130031-2E29

Turn off printer, wait, then turn on again.

Use another paper.

Press Online to clear the error.

Paper loaded askew.


03010000-2E1F

03010000-2E25

03010000-2E27

Paper jam while feeding/ejecting/printing Remove the paper jam and reload the paper.

Paper jam during feeding/printing/ejection Reload the paper.

03010000-2E3A Media load failure

03010000-2E3B

Undersized paper loaded for internal printing (A3 or larger)

Replace with A3/11"x17" or any larger-sized paper A3/

11"x17"

Check the pick-up unit and roll media.

Check to see if paper has not jammed.

Check the pick-up unit and roll media.


03010000-2E3C When operating with cut sheet, paper jam is detected.

03010000-2E3D When operating with upper roll paper, paper jam is detected.

03010000-2E3E

03010000-2E3F

When operating with lower roll paper, paper jam is detected.

When operating with roll paper, paper jam is detected.

03010000-2E47

03010000-2F29

03010000-2F33

Cutter position error

Feed motor timeout (Roll media)

Check the paper path, and check if paper is stuck inside the machine.




Check the cutter unit and surrounding part.

Check the roll feed unit.

Check roll media.

Check to see if paper has not jammed in the printer.

Unadjustable because of transparent media Replace with adjustable media.

03016000-2010

Media load failure (lower roll)

Skew Correct the skew in the paper and reload it.

6-6

Chapter 6

Display message

Ink tank cover is open.

Turn off printer, wait a while, and turn it on again.

Carriage Cover is open.

Code*

03031000-2E10

03031000-2E11


Rel lever is in wrong position.

03031000-2E12


Rel lever is in wrong position.


Top cover is open.


! Unable to detect ink level correctly.

03031000-2F21

03031000-2F38

03031101-25B7


Ink tank cover abnormally open

Printhead cover open

Release lever open

Pinch roller open error

Top cover abnormally open

Action

Close the ink tank cover and turn on the printer again.

Close the carriage cover and turn off the printer, and turn it on again.

Close the release lever and turn off the printer, and turn it on again.

Check the pinch roller unit and surrounding part.

Close the top cover and turn on the printer again.

! Paper mismatch

Make sure media type and paper size match for the adjustment print.

Sheet printing is selected.

Press Load/Eject and load sheets.







Cassette printing is selected.

Press Load/Eject and remove manually

Roll printing is selected.

Press Load/Eject and load a roll.



PaprWidth Mismatch

Plain Paper

ISO A3

03060000-2E20

03060100-2E02

03060100-2E04

03060100-2E05

03060200-2E03

03060200-2E0B

03060A00-2E08

With ink tank cover open, ink has diminished below the pin check level.

During printing with ink tank cover open, the ink has diminished below the pin check level.

*Under study as a part of stop-less supply system. This error is intended for preventing the ink tank to be installed in other model (iPF710) using the same ink tank by the hardware configuration that disables writing to ink tank EEPROM while ink tank cover is open.

Paper type mismatch at adjustment

By closing the ink tank cover, this warning is cleared.

If the pin check tank is removed in this condition, the error changes to the pin check tank removal error. Or, if printing is continued in this condition, and the subtank corresponding to the pin check tank is detected empty, the error changes to the subtank corresponding to pin check tank empty error.

Choose the same paper type as the first page and perform adjustment printing.

After starting to print sheet, no manual feeding paper has been detected.

No front manual feed paper

After starting to print sheet, no manual feeding paper has been detected.

No cassette paper

After manual feed cut sheet had been loaded, data with cassette specification was received.

03060A00-2E00 Data with a roll media specification has been received but no roll media are loaded.

03060A00-2E01 No roll paper at internal printing

Paper width mismatch

Load cut sheet in manual feeding slot.

Load cut sheet in the front manual feed paper slot.

Load cut sheet in manual feeding slot.

Load cut sheet in the cassette.

Load cut sheet in the cassette.

Load roll media.

Load roll media.

Check the paper width and print.

Online=Print

Stop=Stop Printing

No Roll Feed Unit.

Turn printer off and install roll feed unit.

The roll is empty.

Lift the release lever and replace the roll.

Roll feed unit err

Turn off printer and check roll feed unit

Roll Paper

Plain Paper

ISO A3

03060A00-2E0E Roll media unit not installed.

03060A00-2E1B Roll media end

03060A00-2E24 Roll cam sensor error

03060A00-2E33 Roll media is not loaded when receiving the printing job.

Roll paper is not loaded when a job with roll paper specification has been received.

Load Roll Paper

Stop Printing

! Roll2 (Lower) printing is selected.

03060A00-2E34 Roll paper is not loaded. (lower roll)


Install the roll media unit.

Renew the supply of roll media.

Check the roll paper unit.

(1) Choose [Load Roll Paper] and load paper according to the panel guidance.

(2) Choose [Stop Printing] or press the Stop button to stop printing.

(3) Lift the release lever, and load paper.




Reload the roll media.



! Roll 1 (Upper) printing is selected.

03060A00-2E35 Roll media is not loaded for internal printing.

03060A00-2E37 Roll paper is not loaded. (upper roll)


03060B00-2E36




Load the roll media.

! Roll printing is selected.


! The roll is empty.

03060B00-2E39

Roll media is not loaded for internal printing. (lower roll)

Lower roll end Load roll paper in lower roll.

Lift the release lever and replace the roll.

6-7

Chapter 6

Display message

This type of paper is not compatible with

HP-GL/2.

Online: Print

Stop: Stop Printing

Load/Eject: Change Paper

Wrong paper size.

Check paper size setting in driver.

Code*

03061000-2E15

03063000-2E08

Online: Print

Stop: Stop Printing

! Hardware error.

03130000-2E21


Hardware error.

03130031-260E


Hardware error.

03130031-260F


Hardware error.

03130031-2618


Hardware error.

03130031-2805


Hardware error.

03130031-290A


Hardware error.

03130031-2E23


Hardware error.

03130031-2F13


Hardware error.

03130031-2F14


Hardware error.

03130031-2F16


Hardware error.

03130031-2F17


Hardware error.

03130031-2F1F


Hardware error.

03130031-2F20


Hardware error.

03130031-2F22


Hardware error.

03130031-2F23


Hardware error.

03130031-2F25


Hardware error.

03130031-2F26


Hardware error.

03130031-2F27


Hardware error.

03130031-2F2A


Hardware error.

03130031-2F2B


Hardware error.

03130031-2F2E


Hardware error.

03130031-2F32


Excessive temperature or humidity.

03130000-2E21

03130031-260E

03130031-260F

03130031-2618

03130031-2805

03130031-290A

03130031-2E23

03130031-2F13

03130031-2F14

03130031-2F16

03130031-2F17

03130031-2F1F

03130031-2F20

03130031-2F22

03130031-2F23

03130031-2F25

03130031-2F26

03130031-2F27

03130031-2F2A

03130031-2F2B

03130031-2F2E

03130031-2F32

03130031-2F35

Hardware error.

03130031-2F3A


03130031-2F3A


Non-support media of HP-GL/2

Paper width mismatch

IEEE1394 port error

Gap detection error

Gap reference surface error

VH voltage error

Printhead abnormal low temperature detection error

Hard disk disconnection error

Cutter unit failure

A/D converter external trigger output stop detection hardware error 1

Writing to the ASIC register disabled

Mist fan rotation error

Platen suction fan lock detection error

Pump cam sensor error

Purge motor cam position error

Pump move timeout

Purge motor error

Pump inoperable

Carriage move timeout

Unable to detect the feed roller home position

LF operation failure

Roll travel timeout

Multi sensor error

Calibration environment error

Valve motor error reprinting.

Replace printhead.

Check the mist fan.

Check the purge unit.




Unable to detect the carriage motor home position

Check the carriage unit.

Check the linear encoder for smears.

Carriage inoperable Check the carriage unit and surrounding parts.

Check the feed roller encoder and surrounding part.



Check the feed motor and feed roller.

Check the roll feed unit.

Action

Exchange for the compatible paper to HP-GL/2 before

Check the paper width and print.

Restart or replace the IEEE1394 board.

Check the carriage unit and surrounding parts.

Replace the main controller PCB.

Replace the multi sensor reference.

Check the power supply unit.

Check the connection status of HDD.

Check the cutter unit and sensor.



Check the platen suction fan.


Check the environment for interferences from outside light.

Check if the temperature or humidity is within the scope of calibration operation.

Check the ink supply unit.

6-8

Chapter 6

Display message

Hardware error.

03130031-2F3B


Hardware error.

03130031-2F3C


Hardware error.

03130031-2F3D


Hardware error.

03130031-2F3E


Hardware error.

03130031-2F3F


Hardware error.

03130031-2F46


Hardware error.

03130031-2F4D


Hardware error.

03130031-2F4E


Hardware error.

03130031-2F4F


Hardware error.

03130031-2F48


Hardware error.

03130031-2F49


Hardware error.

03130031-2F4A


Hardware error.

03130031-2F50


Hardware error.

03130031-2F51


Hardware error.

03130031-2F52


Hardware error.

03130031-2F53


Hardware error.

03130031-2F54


Hardware error.

03130031-2F70


Hardware error.

03130031-2F71


Hardware error.

03130031-2F72


Hardware error.

03130031-4027


Mail box full.

Delete unwanted data on your computer to resume printing.

Press Stop to cancel printing.

Hard disk error.

Press OK to reformat

Code*

03130031-2F3B

03130031-2F3C

03130031-2F3D

03130031-2F3E

03130031-2F3F

03130031-2F46

03130031-2F4D

03130031-2F4E

03130031-2F4F

03130031-2F48

03130031-2F49

03130031-2F4A

03130031-2F50

03130031-2F51

03130031-2F52

03130031-2F53

03130031-2F54

03130031-2F70

03130031-2F71

03130031-2F72

03130031-4027

031A1001-2905

CS communication error

LF pressure error

HP maintenance jet pump motor overload error

HP maintenance jet pump motor move timeout error

HP maintenance jet pump motor error

Platen shutter failure

VHT leakage (left printhead)

VHT leakage (right printhead)

VHT leakage (both printheads/ single printhead)

VHT voltage error

VH leakage (left printhead)

Incorrect main controller PCB attachment error

VH leakage (right printhead)

VH leakage (both printheads/ single printhead)

Carriage PCB of different model installed error

Left valve motor error

Right valve motor error

Subtank filling error

Check the pinch roller and surrounding parts.




Check the platen shutter and shutter HP sensor.

Replace left printhead.

Replace right printhead.

Replace printhead.

Replace printhead.

Replace left printhead.


Replace right printhead.

Replace printhead.

Check the left ink supply unit.

Check the right ink supply unit.

Check the ink supply unit.

Subtank filling error (Left ink supply unit) Check the left ink supply unit.

Subtank filling error (Right ink supply unit)


Lift travel timeout error

The job store executed when the free hard disk space left for Personal Boxes in the printer's hard disk is full.

Action

Remove the ink tanks and then reload them.


Check carriage unit.

Replace the printhead.

Check the right ink supply unit.



File read error.


Invalid files will be deleted.

Mail box full.

Cannot save.

Delete unwanted data on your computer to resume printing.

Press Stop to cancel printing.

The paper is too small.

031A1002-2908

031A1002-2909

031A1006-2906

Hard disk format error

Hard disk file error

The store executed when 32 jobs are stored in the Personal Box.

033200D2-2E30 Size clip error

Press the [OK] button to start reformatting the hard disk.

When formatting is finished, the printer automatically restarts.

Restart the printer. Only the corrupted files will be deleted, and the printer will restart.


Confirm the print data.

6-9

Chapter 6

Display message

No printhead

Install printhead.

No right printhead

Install right printhead.

No left printhead

Install left printhead.

Printhead error

Code*

03800100-2800

03800101-2800

03800102-2808

03800200-2802

Open top cover and replace the right printhead.

PHeads: wrong pos.

03800200-2804

Open top cover and check the printhead positions.

Wrong printhead.

03800200-2811

Open top cover and replace the printhead.

Right printhead error.


PHeads: wrong pos.

03800201-2802


PHeads: wrong pos.

03800201-2804



03800201-2812

03800202-2807


Left printhead error.

03800202-280A

Open top cover and replace the left printhead.



! Printhead L error.

03800202-2813

03800202-282D

Turn off printer, wait a while, then turn it on again.

! Left printhead error 03800202-2830


Printhead error




! Unknown printhead.

Open top cover and reinstall the printhead.









03800300-2801

03800300-2832

03800300-2834

03800301-2801

03800301-2832

03800302-2809

03800302-2833


Printhead not installed.

Printhead1 not installed.

Printhead2 not installed.

Invalid printhead installed.

Left printhead abnormal temperature detection error (during maintenance jet)

Install the printhead.

Turn off the printer, and then turn it on again and replace the left printhead.

Action

Install the right printhead.

Printheads installed left and right reversed Replace printhead.

Printhead version error

Printhead1 ID error

Printheads installed left and right reversed Replace printhead.

Printhead1 wrong version error

Printheads installed left and right reversed Check the installation position of printhead.

Replace printhead.

Printhead2 ID error

Printhead2 wrong version error

Printhead2 temperature rise error

Printhead DI compensation failure

Printhead H3V-VH voltage error

Printhead contact error

Printhead1 DI compensation failure

Right Printhead H3V-VH voltage error

Printhead2 DI compensation failure

Left Printhead H3V-VH voltage error

Install the left printhead.

Replace printhead.

Replace printhead.

Replace the right printhead.


Replace the left printhead.



Replace printhead.

Replace printhead.

Check the installation position of printhead.

Replace printhead.





6-10

Chapter 6

Display message

Printhead error



Code*

03800400-2803

03800401-2803



03800402-280B


Execute printhead cleaning.

If this message is still displayed, replace the printhead.


03800500-280C

03800500-2827


Printing stopped.

Hardware error.

03800500-2F2F


03800500-2F2F


Printhead EEPROM error

Printhead1EEPROM error

Printhead2 EEPROM error

Printhead found to have many nondischarging nozzles during a nondischarging inspection (printing paused)

Printhead found to have many nondischarging nozzles during a nondischarging inspection (printing stopped)

Replace printhead.


Identify the nozzles in a nozzle check pattern.


Clean the printhead. Identify the nozzles in a nozzle check pattern.


Action



Hardware error.

03800500-2F30


Hardware error.

03800500-2F31


Hardware error.

03800500-2F40


Hardware error.

03800500-2F41


Hardware error.

03800500-2F42


Hardware error.

03800500-2F43


Hardware error.

03800500-2F44


03800500-2F30

03800500-2F31

03800500-2F40

03800500-2F41

03800500-2F42

03800500-2F43

03800500-2F44

Hardware error.

03800500-2F47


03800500-2F47

Clean right P Head

Press Online to clear error.

03800501-280D

The non-discharge of the EVEN or ODD line (640-nozzles) is detected the 320nozzles or more.

Check the head management sensor and surrounding parts.

Check that the printhead is installed correctly.

Replace the head management sensor.


Detectable area failure (when adjusting the position of non-discharging nozzle)

The gap of detection position of nozzle both ends is big.

Check the ink tube unit and surrounding parts.

Check the purge unit and surrounding parts.


Check the flexible cable unit and surrounding parts.




Replace the carriage unit.

Non-discharge detection optical axis error Check the head management sensor.



The non-discharge of all colors and chips

(A/B, EVEN/ODD) and nozzles is detected.

About all chips and nozzles of one color, the non-discharge is detected.

Check the ink tube unit and surrounding parts.

Check the purge unit and surrounding parts.














About single line (A or B) and all nozzles

(1280-nozzles) of one color, the nondischarge is detected.

About single chip (A or B, EVEN or ODD) and all nozzles (640-nozzles) of one color, the non-discharge is detected.













The non-discharge of the EVEN or ODD line (640-nozzles) is detected.

Head management sensor failure

The APCCHK signal of head management sensor is out of range.









Printhead1 non-discharge detection error Clean the printhead.



6-11

Chapter 6

Display message


Code*

03800501-2828


Printing stopped.

Clean left P Head 03800502-280E



03800502-2829


Printing stopped.

Ink tank is empty.

Press OK and replace ink tank.

Remaining level of the ink cannot be correctly detected.

Check ink tank.


Close ink tank cover.

Ink tank is empty.



Check ink tank.



Ink tank is empty.



Check ink tank.



Ink tank is empty.



Check ink tank.



Ink tank is empty.



Check ink tank.

Ink tank is empty.


Ink tank is empty.



Check ink tank.


Check ink tank.





Ink tank is empty.



Check ink tank.

Ink tank is empty.



Check ink tank.

Ink tank is empty.


03810101-2501

03810101-2511

03810101-259F

03810102-2502

03810102-2512

03810102-259E

03810103-2503

03810103-2513

03810103-259D

03810104-2500

03810104-2510

03810104-259C

03810105-2508

03810105-2518

03810106-2506

03810106-2507

03810106-2516

03810106-2517

03810106-25A2

03810106-25A3

03810107-250A

03810107-251A

03810108-250C

03810108-251C

03810109-250B


Printhead1 non-discharge error (printhead replacement)

Action


Check nozzles with nozzle check pattern.


Printhead2 non-discharge detection error Clean the printhead.



Printhead2 non-discharge error (printhead replacement)


Check nozzles with nozzle check pattern.


Y ink tank empty

Unidentified status of Y ink tank (refill ink tank detection)

Invalidate the ink remaining detection function or replace the ink tank.

During printing with ink tank cover open, the subtank of Y ink tank became empty.


Immediately after, this error changes to ink empty error.

M ink tank empty

Unidentified status of M ink tank (refill ink tank detection)


During printing with ink tank cover open, the subtank of M ink tank became empty.



C ink tank empty

Unidentified status of C ink tank (refill ink tank detection)


During printing with ink tank cover open, the subtank of C ink tank became empty.



BK ink tank empty

Unidentified status of BK ink tank (refill ink tank detection)

During printing with ink tank cover open, the subtank of BK ink tank became empty.

GY ink tank empty

Unidentified status of GY ink tank (refill ink tank detection)

MBK ink tank empty

MBK2 ink tank empty

Renew the Y ink tank.

Renew the M ink tank.

Renew the C ink tank.

Renew the BK ink tank.




Renew the GY ink tank.




Unidentified status of MBK ink tank (refill ink tank detection)


Unidentified status of MBK2 ink tank

(refill ink tank detection)


During printing with ink tank cover open, the subtank of MBK ink tank became empty.

During printing with ink tank cover open, the subtank of MBK2 ink tank became empty.

R ink tank empty






Unidentified status of R ink tank (refill ink tank detection)


G ink tank empty Renew the G ink tank.

Unidentified status of G ink tank (refill ink tank detection)


B ink tank empty Renew the B ink tank.

6-12

Display message


Check ink tank.

Ink tank is empty.



Check ink tank.

Ink tank is empty.



Check ink tank.

Ink tank is empty.



Check ink tank.

Ink insufficient.


Ink insufficient.


Ink insufficient.


Ink insufficient.


Ink insufficient.


Ink insufficient.


Ink insufficient.


Ink insufficient.


Ink insufficient.


Ink insufficient.


Ink insufficient.


Ink insufficient.


Ink insufficient.


Ink insufficient.


Ink insufficient.


Ink insufficient.


Ink insufficient.


Ink insufficient.


Ink insufficient.


Ink insufficient.


Ink insufficient.


Ink insufficient.


Ink insufficient.


Ink insufficient.


Ink insufficient.


Ink insufficient.


No ink tank loaded.

Press OK and check ink tank.

Code*

03810109-251B

03810112-2504

03810112-2514

03810113-2505

03810113-2515

03810115-2509

03810115-2519

03810201-2581

03810201-2591

03810202-2582

03810202-2592

03810203-2583

03810203-2593

03810204-2580

03810204-2590

03810205-2588

03810205-2598

03810206-2586

03810206-2587

03810206-2596

03810206-2597

03810207-258A

03810207-259A

03810208-258C

03810208-259C

03810209-258B

03810209-259B

03810212-2584

03810212-2594

03810213-2585

03810213-2595

03810215-2589

03810215-2599

03830101-2521


Unidentified status of B ink tank (refill ink tank detection)

Action


PM ink tank empty Renew the PM ink tank.

Unidentified status of PM ink tank (refill ink tank detection)


PC ink tank empty Renew the PC ink tank.

Unidentified status of PC ink tank (refill ink tank detection)


PGY ink tank empty Renew the PGY ink tank.

Unidentified status of PGY ink tank (refill ink tank detection)


Low on the Y ink tank (as during cleaning) Replace with a fully replenished Y ink tank.

Low on the Y ink tank (during pre-printing checks)

Replace with a fully replenished Y ink tank.

Low on the M ink tank (as during cleaning) Replace with a fully replenished M ink tank.

Low on the M ink tank (during pre-printing checks)

Replace with a fully replenished M ink tank.

Low on the C ink tank (as during cleaning) Replace with a fully replenished C ink tank.

Low on the C ink tank (during pre-printing checks)

Low on the BK ink tank (as during cleaning)

Replace with a fully replenished C ink tank.

Replace with a fully replenished BK ink tank.

Replace with a fully replenished BK ink tank.

Low on the BK ink tank (during preprinting checks)

Low on the GY ink tank (as during cleaning)

Low on the GY ink tank (during preprinting checks)

Low on the MBK ink tank (as during cleaning)

Replace with a fully replenished GY ink tank.

Replace with a fully replenished GY ink tank.

Replace with a fully replenished MBK ink tank.

Low on the MBK2 ink tank (as during cleaning)

Low on the MBK ink tank (during preprinting checks)



Low on the MBK2 ink tank (during preprinting checks)


Low on the R ink tank (as during cleaning) Replace with a fully replenished R ink tank.

Low on the R ink tank (during pre-printing checks)

Replace with a fully replenished R ink tank.

Low on the G ink tank (as during cleaning) Replace with a fully replenished G ink tank.

Low on the G ink tank (during pre-printing checks)

Replace with a fully replenished G ink tank.

Low on the B ink tank (as during cleaning) Replace with a fully replenished B ink tank.

Low on the B ink tank (during pre-printing checks)

Replace with a fully replenished B ink tank.

Replace with a fully replenished PM ink tank.

Low on the PM ink tank (as during cleaning)

Low on the PM ink tank (during preprinting checks)

Low on the PC ink tank (as during cleaning)

Low on the PC ink tank (during preprinting checks)

Low on the PGY ink tank (as during cleaning)

Low on the PGY ink tank (during preprinting checks)

Y ink tank not installed.

Replace with a fully replenished PM ink tank.

Replace with a fully replenished PC ink tank.

Replace with a fully replenished PC ink tank.

Replace with a fully replenished PGY ink tank.

Replace with a fully replenished PGY ink tank.

Install a Y ink tank.

Chapter 6

6-13

Chapter 6

Display message

! Do not pull out ink tank.


Code* Condition detected

03830101-25AC Y ink tank detachment (when using the refill ink tank)

! Do not use removed ink tanks in other printers.

No ink tank loaded.



03830102-2522 M ink tank not installed.

03830102-25AB M ink tank detachment (when using the refill ink tank)



No ink tank loaded.



03830103-2523 C ink tank not installed.

03830103-25AA C ink tank detachment (when using the refill ink tank)



No ink tank loaded.



03830104-2520

03830104-25A9



No ink tank loaded.


No ink tank loaded.


No ink tank loaded.



03830105-2528

03830106-2526

03830106-2527

03830106-25B0




03830106-25B1




Check ink tank.

No ink tank loaded.



Check ink tank.

No ink tank loaded.



Check ink tank.

No ink tank loaded.


No ink tank loaded.


No ink tank loaded.


No ink tank loaded.


Ink tank error.


Ink tank error.


Ink tank error.


Ink tank error.


Ink tank error.


Ink tank error.


03830107-251A

03830107-252A

03830108-251C

03830108-252C

03830109-251B

03830109-252B

03830112-2524

03830113-2525

03830115-2529

03830201-2541

03830202-2542

03830203-2543

03830204-2540

03830205-2548

03830206-2546

BK ink tank not installed.

BK ink tank detachment (when using the refill ink tank)

GY ink tank not installed.

MBK ink tank not installed.

MBK2 ink tank not installed.

MBK ink tank detachment (when using the refill ink tank)

MBK2 ink tank detachment (when using the refill ink tank)

Unidentified status of R ink tank (refill ink tank detection)

R ink tank not installed.

Unidentified status of G ink tank (refill ink tank detection)

G ink tank not installed

Unidentified status of B ink tank (refill ink tank detection)

B ink tank not installed.

PM ink tank not installed.

PC ink tank not installed.

PGY ink tank not installed.

Y ink tank ID error

M ink tank ID error

C ink tank ID error

BK ink tank ID error

GY ink tank ID error

MBK ink tank ID error

Install the detached ink tank.





Action


Install a M ink tank.


Install a C ink tank.


Install a BK ink tank.

Install a GY ink tank.

Install a MBK ink tank.

Install a MBK ink tank.


Install a R ink tank.

Install a G ink tank.

Install a B ink tank.

Install a PM ink tank.

Install a PC ink tank.

Install a PGY ink tank.

Replace with a valid Y ink tank.

Replace with a valid M ink tank.

Replace with a valid C ink tank.

Replace with a valid BK ink tank.

Replace with a valid GY ink tank.

Replace with a valid MBK ink tank.

6-14

Chapter 6

Display message

Ink tank error.


Ink tank error.


Ink tank error.


Ink tank error.


Ink tank error.


Ink tank error.


Ink tank error.


Maintenance cartridge full.


No Maintenance Cartridge capacity.


No maintenance cartridge.

Check the maintenance cartridge.

Maintenance cartridge problem.


Maintenance cartridge problem.


Push paper a little

Code*

03830206-2547

03830207-254A

03830208-254C

03830209-254B

03830212-2544

03830213-2545

03830215-2549

03841001-2819

03841001-281B

03841101-2818

03841201-2816

03841201-2817


MBK2 ink tank ID error

R ink tank ID error

G ink tank ID error

B ink tank ID error

PM ink tank ID error

PC ink tank ID error

PGY ink tank ID error

Maintenance cartridge full

Not enough space in the maintenance cartridge prior to cleaning

Maintenance cartridge not installed.

Maintenance cartridge EEPROM error

Maintenance cartridge ID error

Action

Replace with a valid MBK ink tank.

Replace with a valid R ink tank.

Replace with a valid G ink tank.

Replace with a valid B ink tank.

Replace with a valid PM ink tank.

Replace with a valid PC ink tank.

Replace with a valid PGY ink tank.

Renew the maintenance cartridge.


Install the maintenance cartridge.



Manual printing is selected, but a roll is loaded.

Press Load/Eject and remove the roll.

Top paper feed slot is selected.

03860001-2E06

03860001-2E0C

Waiting for manual feed paper to be inserted.

Data with a cut sheet specification has been received when roll media are loaded.

Push the cut sheet a little.

Load cut sheets at the paper tray port.

03860002-2E02 Data with a cut sheet specification has been received but no cut sheets are loaded.

Load cut sheets at the paper tray port.

Press OK and load a sheet.



Remove the cut sheets.

Roll printing is selected, but sheets are loaded.

Press OK, remove the sheets, and load a roll.

This type of media is not compatible with HP-GL/2.

! Cannot print as selected.

Another roll is in use.

03860002-2E05

03860002-2E07

03860002-2E0A

03860006-2825

03860007-2E40

Manual feed paper setting job has been received, but no manual feed paper is loaded.

Waiting for manual feed paper to be removed.

Data with a roll media specification has been received when a cut sheet tray is loaded.

Load cut sheet in the manual feed paper slot.

Remove the cut sheet.

Replace with roll media.

Paper type mismatch at HP-GL/2 printing Exchange for the compatible paper to HP-GL/2 before

Lower roll data has been received when there is print in the upper roll. reprinting.

Press the Stop button to delete the print job.

Stop: Stop Printing

! Cannot print as selected.

Another roll is in use.

Stop: Stop Printing

Borderless printng not possible.

Check roll position.

Online: Print



Check paper size setting.


Paper stretched or shrank.

Confirm usage cond. of the paper.


Check supported paper.

Insufficient paper for job

Online: Print

Stop: Stop Printing




Cannot adjust printhead.

Press Online to clear the error and readjust printhead.

Cannot adjust printhead.

Press Online to clear the error and readjust printhead.

Cannot adjust eccentric.


03860007-2E41

03861001-2405

03861001-2406

03861001-2407

03861001-2408

03862000-2E09

03862001-2E31

03862002-2E32

03863000-2820

03863000-2821

03863000-2822

Lower roll data has been received when there is print in the lower roll.

Paper loaded at a position inaccessible for borderless printing

Data unfit for borderless printing

Borderless printing disabled (engine detection)

Borderless printing disabled (unsupported size)

Not enough roll media on remaining roll media quantity detection

Not enough roll media

Not enough roll media (lower roll)

Printhead registration unadjustable

LF unadjustable

Eccentricity correction disabled

Press the Stop button to delete the print job.

Check to see if a borderless printing spacer is installed.

Reload the paper.

Check the data, and then print again.

Reload the paper.

Check the media size.




Check the paper on which a pattern is printed for smears.







6-15

Chapter 6

ISO A3

Display message

Cannot adjust optic axis.


LFNG XXX XXX XXX XXX press OK key

CR MOTOR TUNING

ERROR :PRESS OK

CR VIBRATION

ERROR :PRESS OK

CRNG XXX XXX XXX XXX press OK key

! Cannot calibrate.

Press OK and try calibration again.

Error! E02827

Cannot adjust.

PaprWidth Mismatch.

Plain Paper

Change Paper

Print Anyway

Stop Printing

Wrong paper type.

! Paper position not suitable for borderless printing

Fix Paper Position

Print With Border

Stop Printing

Cannot cut paper.


Cannot cut paper.


Media Take-up error.

Check the paper.


Rewinding error.

Check for jam at indicated position.


Unknown file.

Check file format.

Code*

03863000-2824

03863000-2826

03863000-282A

03863000-282B

03863000-2831

03863000-2F34

03863000-4034

03864001-2E45

03864002-2E42

03864004-2409

Borderless printing not possible. Check supported paper.

Change Paper

Print With Border

Stop Printing

03864004-240A

03870001-2015

03870001-2019

03890000-2920

03890000-2921

03900001-4042


Unknown file.

Check file format.


03900001-4049

Media take-up unit cannot take up the media.


Optical axis error

Eccentricity correction error

Action

Check the multi sensor.

Check the head management sensor.


Carriage identification process NG

Carriage identification process failed.

For service mode.

Carriage abnormal vibration error

Roll media width mismatch: after resuming suspended job

At start of printing, all of the following conditions have been met.

- GARO PJL command "ROLLWIDTH" was used.

- Roll paper has been loaded.

- PJL-specified standard paper width and the width of loaded roll paper are different.

- [Paper Mismatch Detection] is set to

[Stop].

Press the OK button to clear the error.

It may essentially be a sensor failure, and the similar error might be repeated.

Carriage vibration was detected when performing carriage identification process.

For service mode.

Press the OK button to clear the error.

It may essentially be a sensor failure, and the similar error might be repeated.

Printhead registration unadjustable (when performing CR REG).




Color calibration adjustment failure error Perform calibration again, and if the same error occurs, replace the multisensor.

Sensor calibration error Check the paper on which a pattern is printed for smears.



(1) Choose [Print Anyway] to print forcibly.

The paper width setting by PJL command will be ignored, and printing is executed using the clip size calculated using the paper width of loaded paper.

If borderless printing is specified at the same time, borderless printing status will be continued. At this time, if a borderless printing supported size that is different from the specified roll paper is loaded, it may end up in borders in parts other than the top edge and left edge.


(3) Choose [Change Paper] or lift the release lever to change paper.

Paper type mismatch

Borderless printing disabled (physical) : after resuming suspended job


- Borderless printing data has been received.

- Roll paper has been loaded, and the paper edge opposite to HP is shifted from the predefined position relative to the borderless pre-ejection opening by 1mm or more.

Borderless printing disabled (unsupported size) : after resuming suspended job


- Borderless printing data has been received.

- Roll paper not supporting borderless printing has been loaded.

Cutting failure

Check the type of paper that can be fed and reload the paper.

(1) Choose [Print With Border] and execute a forced printing.

Borderless printing setting will be ignored and printing will be executed with default margins. The default margins vary depending on the specified feeding slot or paper type.


(3) Choose [Fix Paper Position] and fix the position according to the guidance.

(1) Choose [Print With Border] and execute a forced printing.

Borderless printing setting will be ignored and printing will be executed with default margins.

The default margins vary depending on the specified feeding slot or paper type.


(3) Choose [Change Paper] or lift the release lever to change paper.

Cut paper manually.

Check the cutter.

Cut failure (during jam occurrence) Check the cutter unit and surrounding parts.

Replace the cutter.


Media take-up unit takes up the media continuously.

MIT data transfer failure.

Check the media take-up paper detection sensor and surrounding parts.

Replace the media take-up paper detection sensor.

Verify the validity of MID data before transferring it.

ROM data for another model has been transferred.

Check supported models for firmware or maintenance cartridge.

6-16

6.2.4 Sevice Call Table

6.2.4.1 Service Call Errors

*: Codes correspond to the numbers shown on the DISPLAY in the service mode.

Code*

E141-4046

E144-4047

E144-4048

E146-4001

E161-403E

E161-403F

E161-4050

E194-404A

E196-4040

E196-4041

E196-4042

E196-4043

E196-4044

E196-4045

E196-4049

E196-404C

E196-404D

E196-404E

E198-401C

E198-401D

E198-401E

E199-404B

E602-401A

E602-401B

E602-405A

E602-405B

Description

Number of recovery rotations reaching

50,000 or more

Action

Replace the purge unit, and then clear the parts counter in the service mode.

Number of carrriage scan operation is full Replace the tube unit, and then clear the parts counter in the service mode.

Printhead ink filling failure Replace the printhead.

Waste ink recovery count error Replace the platen duct or mist fan or mist filter or suction fan, and then clear the parts counter in the service mode.

(Confirm the parts reached to the exchange value by the service mode or PRINT INF.)

Abnormal temperature rise in left printhead Replace the left printhead.


Abnormal temperature rise in right printhead

Printhead ink filling non-ejection detection error (when installing the printer or replacing the printhead)


Non-discharging nozzle count error Replace the head management sensor unit, and then clear the parts counter in the service mode.

Execute firmware update or replace the main controller PCB.

Checksum error (when executing the firmware update)

Flash memory erase error (when executing the firmware update)

Flash memory write error (when executing the firmware update)



Memory error (when executing the firmware update)

Firmware size error (when executing the firmware update)



EEPROM read/write error (controller part) Replace the main controller PCB.

Firmware data error (when executing the firmware update)


Execute PCB replacement mode or replace the main controller PCB.

Serial number mismatch between main controller PCB and maintenance cartridge

ROM PCB.

Machine ID mismatch between main controller PCB and maintenance cartridge

ROM PCB.

Execute PCB replacement mode or replace the main controller PCB.

EEPROM read/write error (engine part)

RTC error

RTC low battery error

RTC clock stop

Temperature/humidity sensor connector out of position

HDD read/write error (HDD failure)


Replace the lithium battery or replace the main controller PCB.



Check the temperature/humidity sensor connector or replace the sensor.

HDD connection error

HDD size error

HDD model error

Replace the HDD unit.

Check the HDD connector or replace the HDD.



Chapter 6

0031-2607

6-17

Chapter 6

6.3 Service Software

6.3.1 L Printer Service Tool a) Function of L Printer Service Tool

This tool has the following function.

- Updating the firmware of printer

- Color check of multi sensor

- Displaying the printer information

Connection method with the computer:

USB, Network

b) Screen description

[1]

[2]

[3]

[4]

[5]

F-6-1

[1] Main menu

Choose the menu to execute.

[2] Main menu button

Choose the menu to execute between the [Information] and the [Firmware] and the [Files].

[3] Sub menu button

The sub menu button is displayed according to the menu choosed by main menu or main menu button.

[4] Printer information area

The information of the printer connected with computer is shown according to the choosed menu.

[5] Message area

The message of executed menu is shown. And the message is saved as the text file when choosing the "[Service]-[Save Message]" of the main menu.

c) Operation

1) Showing the information of the printer

The data of PRINT INF or status print is shown.

(1) Choose the [Information] of the main menu button or the "[Service]-[Information]" of the main menu.

0031-2633

(2) Choose the printer from the list shown to the printer information area.

F-6-2

6-18

Chapter 6

MEMO:

- The list is refreshed when choosing the [Refresh] of the sub menu button or the "[View]-[Refresh]" of the main menu.

- The printer is searched according to the setting of the [Specify Search Range] dialogue box after choosing the "[View]-[Specify Search Range]" of the main menu to display the dialogue box. The five IP addresses at the maximum can register when searching by the IP address.

F-6-3

(3)-1 Choose the [Display PRINT INF] of the sub menu button or the "[Information]-[Display PRINT INF]" of the main menu when showing the PRINT INF.

- The data of PRINT INF is shown by the appointed application software.

(3)-2 Choose the [Display Status Print] of the sub menu button or the "[Information]-[Display Status Print]" of the main menu when showing the Status Print.

- The data of Status Print is shown by the appointed application software.

(3)-3 Choose the [Color Check] of the sub menu button or the "[Information]-[Color Check]" of the main menu when executing the color check.

- This mode judges the OK or NG by checking the color check data that measured by the multi sensor.

- Before executing the color check, need the following media to set to the printer.

Roll media of more than 10 inch width, or cut sheet of more than A4-size.

- When executing the color check, the paper type that selected by the dialogue box must match with the paper type that set to the printer so that the check can execute correctly.

MEMO:

-

The application software used to show the data and the folder used to store the files can change by the "[Service]-[Setup]" of the main menu.

[1]

[2]

F-6-4

[1] This menu can change the folder used to store the file.

[2] This menu can change the application software used to show the data.

- The printer name can add by the "[Service]-[Add Printer]" of the main menu.

F-6-5

6-19

Chapter 6

2) Updating the firmware of the printer

The firmware of printer can update according to the following procedure.

(1) Choose the [Firmware] of the main menu button or the "[Service]-[Firmware]" of the main menu.

F-6-6

(2) Choose the printer to update from the list of the printer shown to the printer information area.

MEMO:

- The printer list is refreshed when choosing the [Refresh] of the sub menu button or the "[View]-[Refresh]" of the main menu.

- The printer is searched according to the setting of the [Specify Search Range] dialogue box after choosing the "[View]-[Specify Search Range]" of the main menu to display the dialogue box. The five IP addresses at the maximum can register when searching by the IP address.

F-6-7

(3) Choose the [Specify Firmware] of the sub menu button or the "[Firmware]-[Specify Firmware]" of the main menu.

Specify the folder stored the file by the [Specify Firmware Folder] of the [Specify Firmware] dialogue box or specify the file by the [Specify Firmware File] of the dialogue box.

F-6-8

(4) Make sure that the printer is the online mode or the download mode.

The firmware of the printer is updated when choosing the [Transfer Firmware] of the sub menu button or the "[Firmware]-[Transfer Firmware]" of the main menu.

MEMO:

The Printer becomes the force transfer mode when choosing the "[Firmware]-[Force Transfer Mode]" of the main menu. Thereby, you can choose the [Transfer

Firmware] without concerning the status of the printer.

6-20

3) Managing the information of the printer

The list of the PRINT INF or the status print gotten according to the procedure of "1) Showing the information of the printer" can manage.

(1) Choose the [Files] of the main menu button or the "[Service]-[Files]" of the main menu.

- The list of the PRINT INF or the status print gotten so far is shown in the printer information area.

Chapter 6

F-6-9

(2) Choose the [Display] of the sub menu button or the "[Files]-[Display]" of the main menu after selecting the list that want to show in the printer information area.

The multiple selection from the lists is possible.

- The data of the selected PRINT INF or status print is shown.

MEMO:

- The user information can set to the list after choosing the [Input User Information] of the sub menu button or the "[Files]-[Input User Information]" of the main menu. The input of max 511 characters is possible.

- In case of deleting the list, choose the "[Files]-[Delete Files]" of main menu after selecting the list which want to delete from the printer information area.

6-21

Chapter 6

6.4 Firmware Update Tool

6.4.1 imagePROGRAF Firmware Update Tool a) Function of imagePROGRAF Firmware Update Tool

This tool has the following function.

- Updating the firmware of printer

Connection method with the computer:

USB, Network

b) Operation

1) Make sure that the printer is the online mode.

2) Exit all other running programs.

3) Start the imagePROGRAF Firmware Update Tool.

4) According to the internet connection state of the computer, specify in the [Update Method Selection] dialogue box as shown in the followings.

4)-1 In case the computer is connected to the internet, select the [Connect to the internet to get the latest information], and then click [Next].

0031-2634

F-6-10

4)-2 In case the computer is not connected to the internet, select the [Specify the Firmware] and specify the firmware data that downloaded manually, and then click the [Next].

F-6-11

5) The [Update Possible] is displayed in the [Status] field of the printers that a newer firmware is available.

F-6-12

MEMO:

The overwriting the same firmware version or the firmware downgrade can not execute.

6) Click the printer to update the firmware of to select it, and then click the [Start Update] icon.

F-6-13

6-22

7) Click [Yes] in the [Update Confirmation] dialogue box.

F-6-14

8) The firmware data is transferred to the printer.

9) After the firmware data transference has completed, the [Finish Update] dialogue box is displayed. Click the [OK].

- When the firmware has been overwritten, the printer restarts.

F-6-15

Chapter 6

6-23

Chapter 6

6.5 Service Tools

6.5.1 Tool List

General-purpose tools

Long phillips scerewdriver

Phillips scerewdriver

Flat-head screwdriver

Needle-nose pliers

Hex key wrench

Flat brush

Special-purpose tools

Cover Switch Tool

(QY9-0103)

Grease FLOIL G-5000H

(FY9-6022)

EU-1

(FY9-6028)

Syringe

(CK-0541)

Lint free paper

(CK-0336)

Rubber gloves

(QC1-5547)

Penlight

(CK-0327)

T-6-1

Application

Inserting and removing screw

Inserting and removing screw

Removing the E-ring

Inserting and removing the spring parts

Inserting and removing hexagonal screws

Applying grease

T-6-2

Application

Pressing the cover switch

Applying to specified locations

Soaking or applying to specified locations

Draining ink manually

Wiping off ink

Preventing ink stains

Assisting the manual cappings

0023-2570

6-24

Chapter 7 SERVICE MODE

Contents

Contents

7.1 Service Mode .................................................................................................................................................................7-1

7.1.1 Service Mode Operation .............................................................................................................................................................. 7-1

7.1.2 Map of the Service Mode............................................................................................................................................................. 7-2

7.1.3 Details of Service Mode............................................................................................................................................................. 7-10

7.1.4 e-Maintenance/imageWARE Remote........................................................................................................................................ 7-28

7.1.5 Viewing PRINT INF.................................................................................................................................................................. 7-38

7.2 Special Mode................................................................................................................................................................7-53

7.2.1 Special Modes for Servicing...................................................................................................................................................... 7-53

Chapter 7

7.1 Service Mode

7.1.1 Service Mode Operation a) How to enter the Service mode

Enter service mode according to the following procedure:

0023-2922

1) Turn off the printer power.

2) Turn on the power while pressing the [Load] key and [Navigate] key.

* Keep pressing the above keys until "Initializing" is displayed.

3) "S" appears at the top right of the display.

4) Press the key or key to choose the [Set./Adj. Menu] and press the [OK] key.

"SERVICE MODE" appears in the menu list and the MESSAGE LED flashes.

5) Press the key or key to choose "SERVICE MODE" and press the [OK] key.

* Service mode is added to the [Set./Adj. Menu]. Service mode can be entered even when an error occurs (an error message is displayed) by turning off the power once and then pressing the above keys.

b) How to exit the Service mode

Turn off the printer.

c) Key operation in the service mode

- Selecting menus and paremeters: or key

- Going to the next lower-level menu: key

- Going to the previous higher-level menu: key

- Determining a selected menu or parameter:[OK] key

7-1

Chapter 7

7.1.2 Map of the Service Mode

The hierarchy of menus and parameters in the Service Mode is as shown below.

First Level

DISPLAY

Second Level

PRINT INF

SYSTEM

HEAD

INK

WARNING

ERROR

JAM

20

1

---

20

---

BK

1

---

1

---

5

0 0 0 0 0

Third Level

YES/NO

S/N

TYPE

LF TYPE

TMP

RH

SIZE LF

SIZE LF

SIZE CR

SIZE CR

AFTER INST

S/N

LOT

C

I/O DISPLAY

INK CHECK

I/O DISPLAY 1

I/O DISPLAY 2

I/O DISPLAY 3

Fourth Level

: Select YES to print

Fifth Level Sixth Level

0031-2637

7-2

First Level

ADJUST

Chapter 7

Second Level

PRINT PATTERN

HEAD ADJ.

NOZZLE CHK POS.

GAP CALIB.

CHANGE LF TYPE

CR REG

CR MOTOR COG

MARGIN ADJ

Third Level

NOZZLE 1

OPTICAL AXIS

Fourth Level

: Press the [OK] button to execute


LF TUNING

LF TUNING 2

MANUAL HEAD ADJ DETAIL

ADJ. SETTING

BASIC

A

Fifth Level



A-1

---

A-24

---

F

SAVE SETTINGS

YES/NO

F-1

YES/NO

RESET SETTINGS

YES/NO

YES/NO

0/1

EXECUTE

RESET

YES/NO

TOP MARGIN ADJ

BTM MARGIN ADJ

PRINT PATTERN

YES/NO

YES/NO

-5.0 to 5.0

-5.0 to 5.0

YES/NO

Sixth Level

: Adjustment value entry



7-3

Chapter 7

First Level

FUNCTION

REPLACE

Second Level

CR UNLOCK

CR LOCK

PG CHECK

CR AUTO SCAN

CR SCAN COUNT

CR SCAN SIZE

CR SCAN SPEED

STIRRING CHECK

OPT SENS OUTPUT

---

30

1

Third Level

YES/NO

YES/NO

YES/NO

YES/NO

1

---

5

1

---

5

YES/NO

YES

Fourth Level

: Press the [OK] button to set






OUTPUT0

---

OUTPUT6

NOZZLE CHK

NOZZLE INF

MEMORY CHK

HEAD CNT CHK

CR ERR CHK

HEAD CHK

CUTTER

NO

YES/NO

C

---

BK

DDR

EEP

YES/NO

YES/NO temp

AD Di0

AD Di1

AD Vh

YES/NO

YES/NO

YES/NO

: Display the value.




Fifth Level

7-4

First Level

COUNTER

Second Level

PRINTER

CARRIAGE

PURGE

CLEAR

CR DIST.

PRINT COUNT

CLN-A-1

CLN-A-2

CLN-A-3

CLN-A-6

CLN-A-7

CLN-A-10

CLN-A-11

CLN-A-15

CLN-A-16

CLN-A-17

CLN-A-TTL

CLN-M-1

CLN-M-4

CLN-M-5

Third Level

LIFE TTL

LIFE ROLL

LIFE CUTSHEET

LIFE A

---

LIFE F

POWER ON

W-INK

CUTTER

WIPE

SLEEP ON

PRINT

DRIVE

CR COUNT

CLN-M-6

CLN-M-TTL

CLR-INK CONSUME

CLR-MTC EXC.

CLR-HEAD EXC.

CLR CR-1 EXC.

CLR CR-2 EXC.

CLR CR-3 EXC.

CLR CR-4 EXC.

CLR CR-5 EXC.

CLR SP-1 EXC.

CLR PG-1 EXC.

CLR HMa-1 EXC.

CLR MT-1 EXC.

CLR PL-1 EXC.

CLR Mi-1 EXC.

CLR CT-1 EXC.

CLR WF-1 EXC.

CLR WF-2 EXC.

CLR-FACTORY CNT.

Fourth Level Fifth Level

Chapter 7

7-5

Chapter 7

First Level

COUNTER

Second Level

EXCHANGE

DETAIL-CNT

INK-USE1

INK-USE2

INK-EXC

SINK-USE1(C)

---

SINK-USE1(BK)

SINK-USE1(TTL)

N-INK-USE1(C)

---

N-INK-USE1(BK)

N-INK-USE1(TTL)

INK-USE2(C)

---

INK-USE2(BK)

INK-USE2(TTL)

N-INK-USE2(C)

---

N-INK-USE2(BK)

N-INK-USE2(TTL)

INK-EXC(C)

---

INK-EXC(BK)

INK-EXC(TTL)

N-INK-EXC(C)

---

N-INK-EXC(BK)

N-INK-EXC(TTL)

Third Level

MTC EXC.

HEAD EXC.

BOARD EXC.(M/B)

CR-1 EXC.

CR-2 EXC.

CR-3 EXC.

CR-4 EXC.

CR-5 EXC.

SP-1 EXC.

PG-1 EXC.

HMa-1 EXC.

MT-1 EXC.

PL-1 EXC.

Mi-1 EXC.

CT-1 EXC.

WF-1 EXC.

WF-2 EXC.

MOVE PRINTER

N-INK CHK(C)

---

N-INK CHK(BK)

MEDIACONFIG-CNT

INK-USE1(C)

---

INK-USE1(BK)

INK-USE1(TTL)

LINK-USE1(C)

---

LINK-USE1(BK)

LINK-USE1(TTL)


7-6

First Level

COUNTER MEDIA 1

---

Second Level

MEDIA 7

MEDIA OTHER

MEDIASIZE1 ROLL

MEDIASIZE2 ROLL

Third Level

NAME

TTL

TTL

ROLL

ROLL

CUTSHEET

CUTSHEET

P-SQ 24-36

P-SQ 24-36

P-SQ 17-24

P-SQ 17-24

P-SQ -17

P-SQ -17

P-CNT 36-44

P-CNT 24-36

P-CNT 17-24

P-CNT -17

D-SQ 36-44

D-SQ 36-44

D-SQ 24-36

D-SQ 24-36

D-SQ 17-24

D-SQ 17-24

NAME

TTL

TTL

ROLL

ROLL

CUTSHEET

CUTSHEET

NAME

TTL

TTL

ROLL

ROLL

CUTSHEET

CUTSHEET

P-SQ 36-44

P-SQ 36-44

D-SQ -17

D-SQ -17

D-CNT 36-44

D-CNT 24-36

D-CNT 17-24

D-CNT -17


Chapter 7

7-7

Chapter 7

First Level

COUNTER

Second Level

MEDIASIZE1 CUT

MEDIASIZE2 CUT

HEAD DOT CNT. 1

HEAD DOT CNT. 2

PARTS CNT.

Third Level

P-SQ 36-44

P-SQ 36-44

P-SQ 24-36

P-SQ 24-36

P-SQ 17-24

P-SQ 17-24

P-SQ -17

P-SQ -17

P-CNT 36-44

P-CNT 24-36

P-CNT 17-24

P-CNT -17

D-SQ 36-44

D-SQ 36-44

D-SQ 24-36

D-SQ 24-36

D-SQ 17-24

D-SQ 17-24

D-SQ -17

D-SQ -17

D-CNT 36-44

D-CNT 24-36

D-CNT 17-24

D-CNT -17

C

---

BK

TTL

C

---

BK

TTL

COUNTER CR-1

---

COUNTER WF-2

Fourth Level

OK/W1/W2/E

1:00

2:00

3:00

4:00

OK/W1/W2/E

1:00

2:00

3:00

4:00

Fifth Level

7-8

First Level

SETTING

INITIALIZE

Pth

RTC

Second Level

PV AUTO JUDGE

NETWORK

E-RDS

WARNIG

ERROR

JAM

ADJUST

W-INK

CARRIAGE

PURGE

INK-USE CNT

W-INK-CHG CNT

HEAD-CHG CNT

HDD BOX PASS.

HEAD DOT INF

TSC

PARTS-CHG CNT

PARTS COUNTER

USER SETTEING

CA-KEY

ERDS-DAT

JOB LOG

Third Level

ON/OFF

DATE

TIME

ON/OFF

CERTIFICATE

E-RDS SWITCH

UGW-ADDRESS

UGW-PORT

COM-TEST

COM-LOG

ON/OFF

TTL PRINT AREA

INK CONSUMED

DUTY CNT

DISPLAY DECIMAL

CA-CERTIFICATE

ON/OFF https://XXX

XXXXX

YES

Fourth Level

yyyy/mm/dd hh:mm

Fifth Level

VALIDITY

UNIT

ON/OFF

ON/OFF

ON/OFF

TTL PRINT AREA

INK CONSUMED

DUTY CNT

TTL PRINT AREA

DUTY CNT

: Press the [OK] button to clear










ALL FOLDERS

FOLDER 1



---

FOLDER 29

PARTS CR ALL



---

PARTS WF-2

PARTS CR ALL



---

PARTS WF-2 : Press the [OK] button to clear

YES/NO

YES/NO

YES/NO


ON/OFF

ON/OFF

ON/OFF

LENGTH UNIT

A4

LETTER

LENGTH UNIT

A4

LETTER

Sixth Level

yyyy/mm/dd

Chapter 7

7-9

Chapter 7

7.1.3 Details of Service Mode

This section provides details of the Service mode menu.

a) DISPLAY

Displays and prints the printer information.

1) PRINF INF

Prints adjustment values in the User menu, [DISPLAY] and [COUNTER] parameters on A4-size or lager paper.

When roll media is used, the layout is optimized according to the media width.

2) SYSTEM

Displays the printer information shown below.

Display

S/N

TYPE

LF TYPE

TMP

Description

Serial number of printer

Type setting on main controller PCB

* iPF786/785/781/780 is represented by 36".

Feed roller type: 0 or 1

Ambient temperature

RH

SIZE LF

SIZE CR

AFTER

INST.

Ambient humidity

Detected size of loaded media (feed direction)

0 is always detected for the roll media.

Detected size of loaded media (carriage scan direction)

Number of days since initial installation

3) HEAD

Displays the following EEPROM information of the printhead.

Display

S/N

LOT

Serial number of printhead

Lot number of printhead

4) INK

Displays the numbers of days passed since installation of the following ink tanks.

Description

BK

Display

MBK

C

M

Y

Description

Number of days passed since the BK ink tank was installed

Number of days passed since the MBK ink tank was installed

Number of days passed since the C ink tank was installed

Number of days passed since the M ink tank was installed

Number of days passed since the Y ink tank was installed

5) WARNING

Displays the warning history (up to 20 events). The newest event has the smallest history number.

6) ERROR

Displays the error history (up to 20 events). The newest event has the smallest history number.

Unit

-

-

centigrade degrees

% mm/inch mm/inch

Days

Days

Unit

Days

Days

Days

Days

0031-2638

7-10

Chapter 7

7) JAM

Displays log of jams that have occurred (up to five events). The newest event has the smallest history number.

Indicates the date and time of jam and error code. "0000" is displayed if there is no log.

0 1 M M / D D

X X X X X X X X

F-7-1

Press the key to display detail information.

Press the key or key to navigate among detail information display 1 to 4.

Detail information display 1

H H : M M

J A M 0 1

1 : X X X X X X X X X

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

F-7-2


J A M 0 1

2 : X X X X X X X X X

10

F-7-3


J A M 0 1

3 : X X X X

11

F-7-4


J A M

4 :

0 1

X X X X X X X X

12

F-7-5

7

8

5

6

3

4

1

2

9

10

11

12

Display Description

Jam type

Media

Jam timing

Media width detection

Head height

Platen shutter position

Cut mode setting

Environment

Borderless printing setting

Print mode

Media siz

Media name

LCD display contents

1:Carriage error, 2:Jam, 3:Feed failure (delay), 4:Cut failure, 0:Unknown

1:Roll media, 2:Cut sheet, 0:Unknown

1:Feed, 2:Print, 3:Eject, 0:Unknown

1:ON, 2:OFF, 0:Unknown

SL:1.0mm, L:1.3mm, M1:1.8mm, M2:2.0mm, M3:2.2mm, 0:Unknown

1:Fully close, 2:HP side only open, 3:1/4 open, 4:1/2 open, 5:3/4 open, 6:Fully open, 0:Unknown

1:User cut, 2:Eject cut, 3:Auto cut, 0:Unknown

Display Media Information Tool's environment settings A to F according to Temperature/Humidity

Detection Sensor, 0:Unknown

1:Bordered printing, 2:Borderless printing, 0:Unknown

Display print mode, 0:Unknown

Display media size, 0:Unknown

Display media name, 0:Unknown

8) INK CHECK

Displays the number of times the remaining ink level detection function was turned off, to accommodate refilled ink cartridges in the order of C, M, Y, MBK and

BK.

0: Never

1: Executed at least once

7-11

Chapter 7

b) I/O DISPLAY

The status of each sensor and switch is shown in the display.

Sensor and switch status is shown in the display.

ON: 1

OFF or not used: 0

Screen 1

I / O D I S P L A Y 1

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

F-7-6

(Upper row)

(Lower row)

(Display position)

Screen 2


0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32

F-7-7

(Upper row)

(Lower row)

(Display position)

Screen 3


0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48

F-7-8

(Upper row)

(Lower row)

(Display position)

7-12

Screen 1, Screen 2 and Screen 3 are selectable with the and keys.

These screens display the associated sensor status as listed in the table below.

28

29

30

31

24

25

26

27

20

21

22

23

16

17

18

19

12

13

14

15

8

9

10

11

6

7

4

5

1

2

3

Display position

44

45

46

47

48

40

41

42

43

36

37

38

39

32

33

34

35

Sensor name

Pump cam sensor

Ink supply valve open/closed detection sensor (R)

(Not Used)

(Not Used)

(Not Used)

Lift cam sensor

Feed roller HP sensor

Upper cover lock switch

(Not Used)

Ink tank cover switch (R)

Ink tank cover switch (L)

(Not Used)

(Not Used)

(Not Used)

(Not Used)

(Not Used)

(Not Used)

(Not Used)

(Not Used)

Cutter HP sensor

Cutter left position sensor

Carriage HP sensor

(Not Used)

Paper detection sensor

(Not Used)

(Not Used)

(Not Used)

(Not Used)

(Not Used)

Ink supply valve open/closed detection sensor (L)

(Not Used)

(Not Used)

Release lever lock sensor

Pinch roller pressure release switch

Shutter HP sensor

(Not Used)

(Not Used)

(Not Used)

(Not Used) -

-

-

-

-

0:Sensor ON, 1:Sensor OFF

0:Realeased, 1:Pressured

0:Sensor OFF, 1:Sensor ON

(Not Used) -

Flexible cable connection detection (J3601 pin no.50) 0:Connect, 1:Disconnect




(Not Used) -

(Not Used)

(Not Used)

(Not Used)

-

-

-

LCD display contents


-


-

-



-

-

-

-

0:Cover close, 1:Cover open

0:Cover open, 1:Cover close



-

-

-

-



-


-

-

0:Media loaded, 1:No media

-

-

-

-


Chapter 7

7-13

Chapter 7

c) ADJUST

Performs adjustments and prints the adjustment and check patterns necessary for adjusting the printer parts.

1) PRINT PATTERN

Display

NOZZLE 1

OPTICAL AXIS

LF TUNING

LF TUNING 2

Description

Prints the nozzle check pattern by single direction/ single pass without using the non-discharging back up.

It is used to check for the non-discharging nozzles.

- Media size: A4

- Media type: any

Prints the pattern and adjusts the optical axis of the multi sensor.

For details, refer to "Disassembly/Reassembly" > "Adjustment and Setup Items" > "Procedure after replacing the carriage unit or multi sensor".

- Media type: photo glossy paper

Carry out automatic correction of eccentricity of the feed roller. For more details, refer to

"Disassembly/Reassembly" > "Adjustment and Setup Items" > "Procedure after replacing the feed roller and reed roller encoder".

- The media type is "gloss photo paper".

Carry out manual correction of eccentricity of the feed roller. For more details, refer to

"Disassembly/Reassembly" > "Adjustment and Setup Items" > "Procedure after replacing the feed roller and reed roller encoder".

- The media type is "gloss photo paper".

2) HEAD ADJ.

Set or initialize the registration adjustment values of each printheads.

Display

MANUAL HEAD ADJ DETAIL

ADJ. SETTING

BASIC

A to F A-1 to F-1

SAVE SETTINGS

Description

Prints the detail patterns for the manual head adjustment.

After printing, the mode will change to [ADJ. SETTING]. Check the printed patterns and input the set values.

Prints the basic patterns for the manual head adjustment.

After printing, the mode will change to [ADJ. SETTING]. Check the printed patterns and input the set values.

This mode is to input the registration adjustment values.

It is possible to return the values to the former one by printing the status print before changing the value.

Save the registration adjustment values that has been input.

Initialize the registration adjustment values (to 0).

RESET SETTINGS

3) NOZZLE CHK POS.

This mode is for adjusting the optical axis of the head management sensor. For details, refer to "Disassembly/Reassembly" > "Adjustment and Setup Items" > "Procedure after replacing the head management sensor".

4) GAP CLIB.

This mode measures the gap between the printhead and media by using the multi sensor and corrects the calibration value.

5) CHANGE LF TYPE

Change the type of the feed roller.

0: Old feed roller

1: New feed roller

7-14

Chapter 7

6) CR REG

Executes automatic head adjustment.

Make this adjustment if the resistration remains partially misregistered after user-mode head adjustment.

EXECUTE: Execute automatic head adjustment.

RESET: Reset the resistration adjustment value (0).

- Applicable media size is A2 (17inch) or larger.

- Applicable media type is photo glossy paper

If an error message appears when performing CR REG, check the following.

Replace the multi sensor if the error reoccurs after checking and performing CR REG again.

<CHECK>

1. Check for non-discharging of the printhead and dirty media, and replace the printhead and/or media if necessary.

2. Perform [Head Cleaning A].

3. Perform [Head Posi. Adj.]-[Auto].

7) CR MOTOR COG

Adjust the carriage motor rotation.

Perform in the following cases:

- When removing/attaching or replacing the carriage or carriage belt.

- When replacing the carriage motor or linear encoder sensor.

- When there is excessive load on the carriage (such as when jamming)

If the following error message appears when performing CR MOTOR COG, check that carriage and carriage belt are installed properly and clean the rail shaft. If the error still occurs, replace the carriage motor.

C R V I B R A T

E R R O R

I O N

F-7-9

8) MARGIN ADJ

This mode is to perform the fine adjustment of the leading and trailing edge margin.

Display

TOP MARGIN ADJ

BTM MARGIN ADJ

PRINT PATTERN

Description

Set the fine adjustment value of leading edge margin.

Range: -5.0 to 5.0mm (in 0.1mm increments)

Set the fine adjustment value of trailing edge margin.

Range: -5.0 to 5.0mm (in 0.1mm increments)

Print the pattern for checking the margin.

After adjusting the margin, make sure of the margin by printing the pattern.

7-15

Chapter 7

d) FUNCTION

1) CR UNLOCK

Unlocks the carriage.

When CR UNLOCK is performed, the carriage lock pin is lowered and the carriage can be moved.

2) CR LOCK

Locks the carriage.

When CR LOCK is performed, the carriage lock pin is raised and the carriage is locked.

3) PG CHECK

Initializes the purge unit.

4) CR AUTO SCAN

The carriage scans.

When CR AUTO SCAN is performed, the carriage scans with the count, width, and speed set with CR SCAN COUNT/CR SCAN SIZE/CR SCAN SPEED.

5) CR SCAN COUNT

Sets the number of scans (1 to 30) to be performed with CR AUTO SCAN.

Default: 1

6) CR SCAN SIZE

Sets the scan width to be performed with CR AUTO SCAN.

1:A4, 2:A3, 3:A2, 4:24inch, 5:36inch

Default: 5

7) CR SCAN SPEED

Sets the speed of the scan to be performed with CR AUTO SCAN.

1:12.5, 2:25, 3:33.3, 4:40, 5:50 (Unit: inch/sec)

Default: 1

MEMO:

The settings made with CR SCAN COUNT, CR SCAN SIZE, CR SCAN SPEED are reset to default when the power is reset.

8) STIRRING CHECK

Agitates the ink tank.

9) OPT SENS OUTPUT

Displays the values (analog value) multi sensor detected from the media.

You can confirm the amount of margin the media has with the values read with the multi sensor and the status of the multi sensor by comparing the values with the threshold.

Press the key or key to navigate among OUTPUT 0 to 6 windows.

OUTPUT 0

O U T P U T 0

X X X X X X X X X

1 1 1 2 2 2 3 3 3

F-7-10

X X X X X X

4 4 4 5 5 5

OUTPUT 1

O U T P U T 1

X X X X X X X X X

6 6 6 7 7 7 8 8 8

F-7-11

X X X X X X

9 9 9 10 10 10

OUTPUT 2

O U T P U T 2

X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X

11 11 11 12 12 12 13 13 13 14 14 14 15 15 15

F-7-12

OUTPUT 3

O U T P U T 3


16 16 16 17 17 17 18 18 18 19 19 19 20 20 20

F-7-13

7-16

OUTPUT 4

O U T P U T 4


21 21 21 22 22 22 23 23 23 24 24 24 25 25 25

F-7-14

OUTPUT 5

O U T P U T 5


26 26 26 27 27 27 28 28 28 29 29 29 30 30 30

F-7-15

OUTPUT 6

O U T P U T 6


31 31 31 32 32 32 33 33 33 34 34 34 35 35 35

F-7-16

28

29

30

31

24

25

26

27

32

33

34

35

20

21

22

23

16

17

18

19

12

13

14

15

8

9

10

11

6

7

4

5

1

2

3

Display position

Description

Media edge (diffuse reflection) media output (including outside light)

Media edge (diffuse reflection) outside light output (when LED is OFF)

Media edge (diffuse reflection) platen output (excluding outside light)

Media edge (diffuse reflection) gain

Media edge (diffuse reflection) current value (Unit: X10mA)

Media edge (regular reflection) media output (including outside light)

Media edge (regular reflection) outside light output (when LED is OFF)

Media edge (regular reflection) platen output (excluding outside light)

Media edge (regular reflection) gain

Media edge (regular reflection) current value (Unit: X10mA)

GAP1 media output (including outside light)

GAP1 outside light output (when LED is OFF)

GAP1 platen output (excluding outside light)

GAP1 gain

GAP1 current value (Unit: X10mA)

GAP2 media output (including outside light)

GAP2 outside light output (when LED is OFF)

GAP2 platen output (excluding outside light)

GAP2 gain

GAP2 current value (Unit: X10mA)

Density (red) media output (including outside light)

Density (red) outside light output (when LED is OFF)

Density (red) platen output (excluding outside light)

Density (red) gain

Density (red) current value (Unit: X10mA)

Density (green) media output

Density (green) outside light output (including outside light)

Density (green) platen output (excluding outside light)

Density (green) gain

Density (green) current value (Unit: X10mA)

Density (blue) media output (including outside light)

Density (blue) outside light output (when LED is OFF)

Density (blue) platen output (excluding outside light)

Density (blue) gain

Density (blue) current value (Unit: X10mA)

MEMO:

- Displays all "?" if "GAP CALIB" is not performed.

- If the value exceeds 1000, 999 is displayed.

Chapter 7

7-17

Chapter 7

1. Checking "OUTPUT 0" and "OUTPUT 1" when media (excluding clear film) is fed

[Check 1]

Check whether the multi sensor performance has degraded or whether the media is compatible with the multi sensor.

When "Media edge (diffuse reflection) gain" and "Media edge (diffuse reflection) current value" are maximum values and "Media edge (diffuse reflection) media output" is 186 or less, an error occurs.

Maximum value of "Media edge (diffuse reflection)" gain: 255

Maximum value of "Media edge (diffuse reflection)" current value: 320

When the multi sensor and media are normal, the following values are displayed:

Plain paper

Glossy paper

Tracing paper

Media edge (diffuse reflection) gain

About 10-35

About 8-25

Media edge (diffuse reflection) current value

About 200

About 30-100

Media edge (diffuse reflection) media output

About 500-600

[Check 2]

Check whether the multi sensor performance has degraded or whether the media is compatible with the multi sensor.

When the difference between "Media edge (diffuse reflection) gain" and "Media edge (diffuse reflection) platen output" is 100 or less, an error occurs.

When the multi sensor and media are normal, the difference is about 300-600.

[Check 3]

Check the effect of external diffuse light.

When the difference between "Media edge (diffuse reflection) external light output" and "Media edge (diffuse reflection) platen output" is 500 or more, the effect of diffuse light is judged as being great.

When the effect is normal, the difference is about 50-300.

[Check 4]

Check whether the media is compatible.

When the result of "Media edge (regular reflection) gain"x"Media edge (regular reflection) current value" is five times as large as the result of "Media edge (diffuse reflection) gain"x"Media edge (diffuse reflection) current value", the media is judged as being incompatible with the multi sensor.

If the media is compatible, the result is about 0.5 to 1.5 times for plain/glossy paper; about 1-3 times for tracing paper.

[Check 5]

Check whether the media is compatible.

When the result of "Media edge (diffuse reflection) gain"x"Media edge (diffuse reflection) current value" is in one of the following, the media may be incompatible with the multi sensor.

- Nine or more times as large as that of plain paper (normally, 2000-7000)

- Ten or more times as large as that of glossy paper (normally, 1600-5000)

- Three or more times as large as that of tracing paper (normally, 6000-20000)

2. Checking "OUTPUT 0" when clear film is fed

[Check 1]

Check whether the multi sensor performance has degraded or whether the media is compatible.

When the "Media edge (regular reflection) gain" and "Media edge (regular reflection) current value" are maximum values and "Media edge (regular reflection) media output" is 186 or less, an error occurs.

Maximum value of "media edge (regular reflection)" gain: 255

Maximum value of "media edge (regular reflection)" current value: 320

When the multi sensor and media are normal, the following values are displayed:

Clear film

Media edge (regular reflection) gain

About 10-60

Media edge (regular reflection) current value

About 200

Media edge (regular reflection) media output

About 500-600

[Check 2]


When the difference between "Media edge (regular reflection) gain" and "Media edge (regular reflection) platen output" is 100 or less, an error occurs.

When the multi sensor and media are normal, the difference is about 250-500.

[Check 3]

Check the effect of external diffuse light.

When the difference between "Media edge (regular reflection) external light output" and "Media edge (regular reflection) platen output" is 500 or more, the effect of diffuse light is judged as being great.

When the effect is normal, the difference is about 50-300.

3. Checking "OUTPUT 2/OUTPUT 3" and "OUTPUT 4/OUTPUT 5/OUTPUT 6"

[Check 1]


When "GAP gain" and "GAP current value" are maximum values and "GAP media output" is 93 or less, an error occurs.

Maximum value of "GAP gain": 255

Maximum value of "GAP current value": 320

When the multi sensor and media are normal, "GAP gain" is about 30-250; "GAP current value" is about 200.

7-18

[Check 2]


When "Density gain" and "Density current value" are maximum values and "Density media output" is 168 or less, an error occurs.

Maximum value of "Density gain": 255

Maximum value of "Density current value": 245

When the multi sensor performance and media are normal, "Density gain" is about 5-100; "Density current value" is about 200.

10) NOZZLE CHECK

Checks for non-discharging nozzle with head management sensor.

11) NOZZLE INF

Displays the result of non-discharging nozzle check performed with "NOZZLE CHECK" by nozzle row of each ink color.

- Press the key or key to switch the ink color.

- AE:A-EVEN row, AO:A-ODD row, BE:B-EVEN row, BO:B-ODD row

C A E : O K

B E : O K

F-7-17

A O :

B O :

O K

O K

12) MEMORY CHK

13) HEAD CNT CHK

Confirms the contact status of the printhead.

Display

DDR

EEP

Description

Checks the DDR-SDRAM mounted on the Main Controller PCB.

Checks the EEPROM.

14) CR ERR CHK

This mode performs the self diagnosis about the drive state of the carriage unit.

Perform in case the drive state of the carriage unit is abnormal. it can guess the failure cause of the carriage unit as shown in the followings.

- Carriage motor failure

- Linear encoder sensor failure

- Linear scale failure or overload state

* When performing this mode, open and close the upper cover by following the instructions on the screen.

After displaying the following screen, press the [OK] key to start the self diagnosis, and then the diagnosis result is displayed.

If the failure is found, check and replace the corresponding parts or surrounding parts.

C R H P

P R E S S

S N S

O K

F-7-18

O K

K E Y

- Normal

C R C H E C K

C H E C K

O

E N D

F-7-19

K

- Carriage motor failure

C R M O T O R

C H E C K

E

E N D

F-7-20

R R

- Linear encoder sensor failure

C R E N C

C H E C K

S E N

E N D

F-7-21

S E R R

- Linear scale failure or overload state

E N C o r

C H E C K

O V E R L O A D

E N D

F-7-22

Chapter 7

7-19

Chapter 7

15) HEAD CHK

Perform in case the printhead is abnormal. It can guess whether the failure cause is the printhead or not.

MEMO:

As the printhead and thermistor are high temperature after printing immediately, perform this mode after 5 minutes or more printing is completed.

Display the value (analogue) detected by the printhead, the thermistor on the carriage PCB, DI sensor (Di0/Di1) and head Vh.

Check whether the detection value is normal or not to judge the abnormal part.

Press the / key to select the item, and then press the key to display the detection value.

- temp

2 5

1 5

1 2 6

2 5

2

1 2

7

7 t

T 3 0

2 8

Printhead temperature

(centigrade degrees) chipA chipB chipC chipD chipE chipF

T: Thermistor detection temperature

mounted on the Carriage PCB

(centigrade degrees) t: Temperature/Humidity detection sensor

detection temperature

F-7-23

(centigrade degrees)

- AD Di0

2 5 5

1 0 2 3

1 2

6

7

3

1 0 2 3

1 2 7

Head DI sensor (Di0) detection analogue value

F-7-24

D

0

- AD Di1

2 5 5

1 0 2 3

1 2

6

7

3

1 0 2 3

1 2 7

Head DI sensor (Di1) detection analogue value

F-7-25

D

1

- AD Vh

1 0 2 3 V h

Head VH detection analogue value

F-7-26

<CHECK>

Judge the failure part by comparing the temperature of the printhead and the value detected by thermistor on the carriage PCB.

T-7-1

PrintHead temperature

(Centigrade degree)*

22 to 28

Thermistor temperature

(Centigrade degree)*

22 to 28

21 or less, 29 or more

21 or less, 29 or more 22 to 28

21 or less, 29 or more

Judgement

Normal

The part except for the printhead may have a failure.

(Carriage PCB, flexible cable, main controller PCB)

The printhead may have a failure.

The printhead or the carriage PCB or the flexible cable or the main controller PCB may have a failure.

*: Adequate temperature ranges when the surrounding temperature (temperature/humidity sensor detection value) of the printer is 25 degrees centigrade. For example, when the surrounding temperature is 30 degrees centigrade, above temperatures rise each 5 degrees centigrade.

e) REPLACE

1) CUTTER

This mode is for replacing the cutter.

f) COUNTER

Displays the life (operation frequency and time) of each unit, print counts for each media type, and else.

The count values can be printed from [PRINT INF].

7-20

1) PRINTER: Counters related to product life

Display

LIFE TTL

LIFE ROLL

LIFE CUTSHEET

LIFE A-F

POWER ON

W-INK

CUTTER

WIPE

SLEEP ON

Description

Cumulative number of printed media (equivalent of A4)

Cumulative number of printed roll media (equivalent of A4)

Cumulative number of printed cut sheets (equivalent to A4)

Cumulative number of printed media for environments A to F

Cumulative power-on time (excluding the sleep time)

Remaining capacity of the maintenance cartridge

Number of cutting operations (count as 1 by moving back and forth)

Number of wiping operations

Cumulative sleep-on time

Unit

sheets sheets sheets sheets

Hours

%

Times

Times

Hours

2) CARRIAGE: Counters related to carriage unit

PRINT

DRIVE

Display

CR COUNT

CR DIST.

PRINT COUNT

Description

Cumulative printing time

Cumulative carriage moving time

Cumulative carriage scan count (count as 1 by moving back and forth)

Cumulative carriage scan distance (count as 1 by moving 210mm)

Cumulative print end count (count as 1 by capping)

3) PURGE: Counters related to purge unit

Display

CLN-A-1

CLN-A-2

CLN-A-3

CLN-A-6

CLN-A-7

CLN-A-10

CLN-A-11

Description

Cumulative number of automatic cleaning 1 (normal suction) operations

Cumulative number of automatic cleaning 2 (ink level adjusting) operations

Cumulative number of automatic cleaning 3 (initial filling) operations

Cumulative number of automatic cleaning 6 (strong normal suction) operations

Cumulative number of automatic cleaning 7 (aging) operations

Cumulative number of automatic cleaning 10 (ink filling after secondary transportation) operations

Cumulative number of automatic cleaning 11 (ink filling after head replacement) operations

CLN-A-15

CLN-A-16

Cumulative number of automatic cleaning 15 (dot count small suction) operations

Cumulative number of automatic cleaning 16 (sedimented ink agitation) operations

CLN-A-17 Cumulative number of automatic cleaning 17 (small suction) operations

CLN-A-TTL Total number of automatic cleaning operations

CLN-M-1

CLN-M-4

CLN-M-5

CLN-M-6

Cumulative number of manual cleaning 1 (normal suction) operations

Cumulative number of manual cleaning 4 (ink draining from head after head replacement) operations

Cumulative number of manual cleaning 5 (ink draining from head and tube before transportation ) operations

Cumulative number of manual cleaning 6 (normal strong suction) operations

CLN-M-TTL Total number of manual cleaning operations

Unit

Hours

Hours

Times

Times

Times

4) CLEAR: Counters related to counter initialization

Display

CLR-INK CONSUME

CLR-MTC EXC.

CLR-HEAD EXC.

CLR-UNIT CR-1 EXC.

CLR-UNIT CR-2 EXC.

CLR-UNIT CR-3 EXC.

Description

Cumulative count of ink section consumption amount clearing

Cumulative count of maintenance cartridge replacement count clearing

Cumulative count of printhead replacement count clearing

Cumulative count of unit CR-1(carriage unit bushing) replacement count clearing

Cumulative count of unit CR-2(fexible cable unit) replacement count clearing

Cumulative count of unit CR-3(linear encoder sensor/linear scale/shaft cleaner) replacement count clearing

CLR-UNIT CR-4 EXC.

CLR-UNIT CR-5 EXC.

CLR-UNIT SP-1 EXC.

CLR-UNIT PG-1 EXC.

Cumulative count of unit CR-4(carriage height changing cam) replacement count clearing

Cumulative count of unit CR-5(multi sensor) replacement count clearing

Cumulative count of unit SP-1(ink tube unit) replacement count clearing

Cumulative count of unit PG-1(purge unit) replacement count clearing

Times

Times

Times

Times

CLR-UNIT HMa-1 EXC.

Cumulative count of unit HMa-1(head management sensor) replacement count clearing Times

CLR-UNIT MT-1 EXC.

Cumulative count of unit MT-1(carriage motor) replacement count clearing Times

CLR-UNIT PL-1 EXC.

CLR-UNIT Mi-1 EXC.

CLR-UNIT CT-1 EXC.

CLR-UNIT WF-1 EXC.

Cumulative count of unit PL-1(feed motor) replacement count clearing

Cumulative count of unit Mi-1(mist fan/mist exhaust duct) replacement count clearing Times

Cumulative count of unit CT-1(cutter) replacement count clearing

Cumulative count of unit WF-1(ink absorber under the maintenance cartridge unit) replacement count clearing

Times

Times

Times

CLR-UNIT WF-2 EXC.

CLR-FACTORY CNT.

Cumulative count of unit WF-2(platen exhaust duct) replacement count clearing

For factory

Times

Times

Unit

Times

Times

Times

Times

Times

Times

Unit

Times

Times

Times

Times

Times

Times

Times

Times

Times

Times

Times

Times

Times

Times

Times

Chapter 7

7-21

Chapter 7

5) EXCHANGE: Counters related to parts replacement

Display

MTC EXC.

HEAD EXC.

BOARD EXC.(M/B) Main controller PCB replacement count

CR-1 EXC.

CR-1(carriage unit bushing) replacement count

(Count of executing [INITIALIZE] > [PARTS COUNTER] > [PARTS CR-1])

CR-2 EXC.

CR-3 EXC.

CR-2(fexible cable unit) replacement count


CR-3(linear encoder sensor/linear scale/shaft cleaner) replacement count


CR-4 EXC.

Description

Maintenance cartridge replacement count

Printhead replacement count

CR-5 EXC.

SP-1 EXC.

PG-1 EXC.

CR-4(carriage height changing cam) replacement count


CR-5(multi sensor) replacement count


SP-1(ink tube unit) replacement count

(Count of executing [INITIALIZE] > [PARTS COUNTER] > [PARTS SP-1])

PG-1(purge unit) replacement count

(Count of executing [INITIALIZE] > [PARTS COUNTER] > [PARTS PG-1])

HMa-1 EXC.

MT-1 EXC.

PL-1 EXC.

Mi-1 EXC.

CT-1 EXC.

WF-1 EXC.

WF-2 EXC.

HMa-1(head management sensor) replacement count

(Count of executing [INITIALIZE] > [PARTS COUNTER] > [PARTS HMa-1])

MT-1(carriage motor) replacement count

(Count of executing [INITIALIZE] > [PARTS COUNTER] > [PARTS MT-1])

PL-1(feed motor) replacement count

(Count of executing [INITIALIZE] > [PARTS COUNTER] > [PARTS PL-1])

Mi-1(mist fan/mist exhaust duct) replacement count

(Count of executing [INITIALIZE] > [PARTS COUNTER] > [PARTS Mi-1])

CT-1(cutter) replacement count

(Count of executing [INITIALIZE] > [PARTS COUNTER] > [PARTS CT-1])

WF-1(ink absorber under the maintenance cartridge unit) replacement count

(Count of executing [INITIALIZE] > [PARTS COUNTER] > [PARTS WF-1])

WF-2(platen exhaust duct) replacement count

(Count of executing [INITIALIZE] > [PARTS COUNTER] > [PARTS WF-2])

6) DETAIL-CNT: Other counters

Display

MOVE PRINTER A(B,C,D)

N-INKCHK(XX)

MEDIACONFIG-CNT

Description

A: Number of times "Prep.MovePrinter" on Main menu is executed.

B: Number of times "Limited" (Level1)

C: Number of times "Standard" (Level2)

D: Level of "Prep.MovePrinter" that executed at previous time

XX: Ink color

Count of turning off the ink remaining level detection for each color

Count of media registered by media editor

Unit

Times

Times

Times

7) INK-USE1: Counters related to ink consumption

Display

INK-USE1(XX)

INK-USE1(TTL)

LINK-USE1(XX)

LINK-USE1(TTL)

SINK-USE1(XX)

SINK-USE1(TTL)

N-INK-USE1(XX)

N-INK-USE1(TTL)

Description

XX: Ink color

Cumulative consumption amount of generic ink

Total amount of cumulative consumption of generic ink

XX: Ink color

Cumulative consumption amount of generic large ink

Total amount of cumulative consumption of generic large ink

XX: Ink color

Cumulative consumption amount of generic small ink

Total amount of cumulative consumption of generic small ink

XX: Ink color

Cumulative consumption amount of refilled ink

Total amount of cumulative consumption of refilled ink

8) INK-USE2: Counters related to ink consumption

Display

INK-USE2(XX)

INK-USE2(TTL)

N-INK-USE2(XX)

N-INK-USE2(TTL)

Description

XX: Ink color

Consumption amount of generic ink of the currently installed ink tank.

Total consumption amount of generic ink of the currently installed ink tanks

XX: Ink color

Consumption amount of refilled ink of the currently installed ink tank

Total consumption amount of refilled ink of the currently installed ink tanks ml ml ml ml

Unit

ml ml ml ml ml

Unit

ml ml ml

Times

Times

Times

Times

Times

Times

Times

Times

Times

Times

Times

Unit

Times

Times

Times

Times

Times

Times

7-22

9) INK-EXC: Counters related to ink tank replacement

Display

INK-EXC(XX)

INK-EXC(TTL)

N-INK-EXC(XX)

N-INK-EXC(TTL)

Description

XX: Ink color

Cumulative count of generic ink tank replacement

Total amount of cumulative count of generic ink tank replacement

XX: Ink color

Cumulative count of refilled ink tank replacement

Total amount of cumulative count of refilled ink tank replacement

10) MEDIA x (x: 1 to 7): Counters related to media

One to seven media types are displayed individually in order with large cumulative print area.

Display

NAME

TTL

TTL

ROLL

ROLL

Description

Media type -

Total amount of cumulative print area of roll media and cut sheet (metric) Sq.m

Total amount of cumulative print area of roll media and cut sheet (inch) Sq.f

Cumulative print area of roll media (metric)

Cumulative print area of roll media (inch)

CUT SHEET Cumulative print area of cut sheet (metric)

CUT SHEET Cumulative print area of cut sheet (inch)

Unit

Sq.m

Sq.f

Sq.m

Sq.f

ml

Unit

ml ml ml

11) MEDIA OTHER: Counters related to media

Displays the total amount of cumulative print area of the other media type than the above-mentioned

Display

NAME

TTL

Description Unit

Media type -

Total amount of cumulative print area of roll media and cut sheet (metric) Sq.m

TTL

ROLL

Total amount of cumulative print area of roll media and cut sheet (inch) Sq.f

Cumulative print area of roll media (metric) Sq.m

ROLL Cumulative print area of roll media (inch)

CUT SHEET Cumulative print area of cut sheet (metric)

CUT SHEET Cumulative print area of cut sheet (inch)

Sq.f

Sq.m

Sq.f

12) MEDIASIZE1 ROLL: Counters related to roll media printing

Display

P-SQ 36-44

P-SQ 24-36

P-SQ 17-24

P-SQ -17

P-CNT 36-44

P-CNT 24-36

P-CNT 17-24

P-CNT -17

Description

Cumulative print area of paper equal to or larger than 36 inches but less than 44 inches (physical size)


Unit

Sq.m/Sq.f

Sq.m/Sq.f


Cumulative print area of paper less than 17 inches (physical size)

Cumulative number of sheets of A4-equivalent paper equal to or larger than 36 inches but less than 44 inches

(physical size)


(physical size)

Sq.m/Sq.f

Sq.m/Sq.f

sheets sheets


(physical size)

Cumulative number of sheets of A4-equivalent paper less than 17 inches (physical size) sheets sheets

13) MEDIASIZE2 ROLL: Counters related to roll media printing

Display

D-SQ 36-44

D-SQ 24-36

D-SQ 17-24

D-SQ -17

D-CNT 36-44

D-CNT 24-36

D-CNT 17-24

D-CNT -17

Description

Cumulative print area of paper equal to or larger than 36 inches but less than 44 inches (data size)



Unit

Sq.m/Sq.f

Sq.m/Sq.f

Sq.m/Sq.f

Cumulative print area of paper less than 17 inches (data size)


(data size)

Sq.m/Sq.f

sheets


(data size)


(data size)

Cumulative number of sheets of A4-equivalent paper less than 17 inches (data size) sheets sheets sheets

Chapter 7

7-23

Chapter 7

14) MEDIASIZE1 CUT: Counters related to cut sheet printing

Display

P-SQ 36-44

P-SQ 24-36

P-SQ 17-24

P-SQ -17

P-CNT 36-44

P-CNT 24-36

P-CNT 17-24

P-CNT -17

Description




Cumulative print area of paper less than 17 inches (physical size)


(physical size)


(physical size)


(physical size)

Cumulative number of sheets of A4-equivalent paper less than 17 inches (physical size)

Unit

Sq.m/Sq.f

Sq.m/Sq.f

Sq.m/Sq.f

Sq.m/Sq.f


15) MEDIASIZE2 CUT: Counters related to cut sheet printing

Display

D-SQ 36-44

D-SQ 24-36

D-SQ 17-24

D-SQ -17

D-CNT 36-44

D-CNT 24-36

D-CNT 17-24

D-CNT -17

Description




Cumulative print area of paper less than 17 inches (data size)


(data size)


(data size)


(data size)

Cumulative number of sheets of A4-equivalent paper less than 17 inches (data size)

Unit

Sq.m/Sq.f

Sq.m/Sq.f

Sq.m/Sq.f

Sq.m/Sq.f


16) HEAD DOT CNT.1: Counter related to dot count

XX

Display

TTL

Description

XX: Ink color

Dot counts of each colors of the currently installed printhead

Total dot counts of each colors of the currently installed printhead

17) HEAD DOT CNT.2: Counter related to dot count

XX

Display

TTL

Description

XX: Ink color

Cumulative dot counts of each colors

Total cumulative dot counts of each colors

Unit

(x 1,000,000) dots

(x 1,000,000) dots

Unit

(x 1,000,000) dots

(x 1,000,000) dots

7-24

18) PARTS CNT. : Counter related to consumable parts

C O U N T E R a a

C R - 1 b b b b b

F-7-27

The displays are selectable with the and keys.

Counter of the consumable part (current)

C O U N T E R

1 :

C R - 1 x x x x x

F-7-28

Life of the consumable part

C O U N T E R

2 :

C R - 1 x x x x x

F-7-29

Use rate until part replacement

Counter of the consumable part (accumulate)

C O U N T E R

3 :

C R

F-7-30

- 1 x x x %

Display

COUNTER xx-x

1:

2:

3:

4:

C O U N T E R

4 :

C R - 1 x x x x x

F-7-31

Description

xx-x: Unit number of consumable parts

(For detail, refer to "Maintenance and Inspection" > "Consumable Parts")

Display the status (aa) and the days passed since the counter (bbbb) resetting.

- Status

OK: Use rate (until part replacement) of all consumable parts included in each unit are below 90%.

W1: Use rate (until part replacement) of either of the consumable parts included in each unit has reached 90% or more.

W2: Use rate (until part replacement) of either of the consumable parts included in each unit has reached 100%, but no need to stop the printer.

E : Use rate (until part replacement) of either of the consumable parts included in each unit has reached 100%, and the printer needs to be stopped.

Unit number of consumable parts

Counter of the consumable part (current)

Life of the consumable part

Use rate until part replacement

Counter of the consumable part (accumulate)

%

Unit

Days

Chapter 7

7-25

Chapter 7

g) SETTING

Make various settings.

1) Pth

Turn on or off the head pulse rank control function.

Default: OFF

2) RTC

Set RTC (real time clock) after replacing the lithium battery on the main controller PCB.

Display

DATE yyyy/mm/dd

TIME hh:mm

Set date

Set time

Description

3) PV AUTO JUDGE

Sets ink saver mode.

Default: OFF

4) NETWORK

See "e-maintenance/imageWARE Remote" for detail.

5) E-RDS


6) HEAD DOT INF

Select whether to display the message as the result of non-discharging nozzle detection or not.

Default: ON

Number of non-discharging nozzle (nozzle/2,560-nozzles)

0-99

100-319

320 or more

ON

Displays a message to check the printing.

-

Displays a message to check the head. -

Displays a message to replace the head.

7) TSC

Make indication settings about TSC.

OFF

TTL PRINT AREA

INK CONSUMED

DUTY CNT

DISPLAY DECIMAL

Display

TTL PRINT AREA

UNIT

INK CONSUMED

DUTY CNT

TTL PRINT AREA

DUTY CNT

T-7-2

Description

Select whether to display the total printing area or not (Default:

ON)

Select whether to display the amount of ink consumption or not

(Default: OFF)

Select whether to display the Duty counter or not (Default: ON)

Select whether to display the decimal fraction of total printing area or not (Default: ON)

Select whether to display the decimal fraction of amount of ink consumption or not (Default: ON)

Select whether to display the decimal fraction of Duty counter or not (Default: ON)

Set the unit of total printing area

Setting value: LENGTH UNIT* (default)/A4/LETTER

*: The setting is in accord with [Lenght Unit] in the Main menu.

Set the unit of Duty counter

Setting value: LENGTH UNIT*/A4 (default)/LETTER

*: The setting is in accord with [Lenght Unit] in the Main menu.

h) INITIALIZE

Clear the [DISPLAY] histories, [ADJUST] settings, [COUNTER] values, and other parameters.

Display

WARNING

ERROR

JAM

ADJUST

W-INK

CARRIAGE

PURGE

INK-USE CNT

Description

Initialize the history of WARNING.

(All displayed contents of [DISPLAY] > [WARNING] will be initialized.)

Initialize the history of ERROR.

(All displayed contents of [DISPLAY] > [ERROR] will be initialized.)

Initialize the history of JAM.

(All displayed contents of [DISPLAY] > [JAM] will be initialized.)

Initialize the value of band adjustment (by user) and head adjustment.

The automatically adjusted value will not be initialized.

Initialize the remaining capacity (%) of the maitenance cartridge.

(Clear [COUNTER] > [PRINTER] > [W-INK])

Initialize the counter related to carriage unit.

(Clear [COUNTER] > [CARRIAGE])

Initialize the counter related to purge unit.

(Clear [COUNTER] > [PURGE])

Initialize the consumption amount of ink.

(Clear [COUNTER] > [INK-USE2], and count up [COUNTER] > [CLEAR] > [CLR-INK

CONSUME])

7-26

Display

W-INK-CHG CNT

HEAD-CHG CNT

Description

Initialize the maintenance cartridge replacement frequency.

(Clear [COUNTER] > [EXCHANGE] > [MTC EXC.], and count up [COUNTER] > [CLEAR]

> [CLR-MTC EXC.])

Initialize the printhead replacement frequency.

(Clear [COUNTER] > [EXCHANGE] > [HEAD EXC.], and count up [COUNTER] >

[CLEAR] > [CLR-HEAD EXC.])

HDD BOX PASS. ALL FOLDERS Initialize the BOX password of all folders of the hard disk drive to factory default.

FOLDER xx Initialize the BOX password of FOLDER xx of the hard disk drive to factory default.

PARTS-CHG

CNT

PARTS

COUNTER

PARTS xx-x

PARTS xx-x xx-x: Unit number of consumable parts

(For details, refer to "Maintenance and Inspection" > "Consumable Parts")

Initialize the consumable part replacement frequency.

(Clear [COUNTER] > [EXCHANGE] > [xx-x EXC], and count up [COUNTER] > [CLEAR]

> [CLR xx-x EXC.]) xx-x: Unit number of consumable parts

(For details, refer to "Maintenance and Inspection" > "Consumable Parts")

Initialize the counter amount of the consumable parts.

(Clear [COUNTER] > [PARTS CNT.] > [COUNTER xx-x])

* After replacing the consumable part, be sure to execute this menu.

USER SETTING

CA-KEY

ERDS-DAT

JOB LOG

Initializes the user menu.

Same as executing the following mode in the user menu.

-[Set./Adj. Menu]-[System Setup]-[Reset PaprSetngs]

-[Set./Adj. Menu]-[Interface Setup]-[Return Defaults]



Initialize the history of JOB LOG.

Chapter 7

7-27

Chapter 7

7.1.4 e-Maintenance/imageWARE Remote

0023-1100

1. Overview

The e-Maintenance/imageWARE Remote system allows a customer's device information and status to be monitored via the Internet on a server called the UGW

(Universal Gateway) Server.

The following device information/ statuses can be monitored.

- Service mode counters

- Parts counters

- Mode counters

- Firmware information

- Service call errors log

- Jam log

- Alarm log

- Alert change statuses (Toner/ ink low/ out, etc.)

Device monitor information above is sent by the e-RDS (embedded Remote Diagnostic System), which is embedded in the devices.

Further, as the above is all customer information, https SOAP protocol is used for communication between the UGW and the device, providing enhanced security

(SSL client communication)

UGW e-RDS

F-7-32

2. Feature and benefits

Device (e-RDS) embedded with network module can realize a front-end processing of the e-Maintenance/imageWARE Remote system without attaching an extra hardware equipment.

The e-Maintenance/imageWARE Remote system can be implemented without imposing a burden on the users.

3. Settings procedures

3.1 Advance preparations

To monitor the device with e-Maintenance/imageWARE Remote, the following settings are required.

1) Advance confirmation

Check with the UGW administrator whether the printer to be connected to the e-Maintenance/imageWARE remotely has been registered in the UGW.

2) Advance preparations

Interview the user's system administrator in advance to find out the following information about the network.

Information item -1

IP address setting methods

Check whether automatic setting or manual setting is to be used, and confirm the information below.

- Automatic setting: (DHCP, RARP, BOOTP) (ON/OFF selection) or

- Manual setting: IP address, subnet mask and gateway address to be set

Information item -2

Is there a DNS server in use?

If there is a DNS server in use, find out the following.

- Primary DNS server address

- Secondary DNS server address (optional)

Information item -3

Is there a proxy server?

If there is a proxy server in use, find out the following.

- Proxy server address

- Port number connected to proxy server

Information item -4

Is proxy server authentication required?

If proxy server authentication is required, find out the following.

- User name and password required for proxy authentication

3) Network settings

Make the network settings based on the information obtained in "2) Advance preparations."

Network settings are made in user mode. Therefore, it is assumed that the user has already set it. However, there are a few cautions as described below, and if necessary, there may be cases in which the service technicians do it after obtaining an approval from user.

Caution point -1

Proxy server settings

Proxy server settings cannot be made in "Remote UI". Enter from the operation panel menu. In addition, the operation panel menu items for proxy server only appear when e-RDS functions are enabled. Therefore, when you make proxy server settings, turn the "E-RDS SWITCH" setting to "ON" as described in later sections beforehand.

Caution point -2

Validate the settings (restart the printer)

7-28

Chapter 7

The server address settings are activated only after you restart the printer. Make sure you always restart the printer after changing server address settings.

(1) How to enter Proxy server address

[1]

Server Address

[a] h t t p : / / _

: S e l e c t

S t o p : D e l e t e

N a v i : a -> A -> 1

[ O K : S e t ]

F-7-33

[2]

[1] Display to show enter mode a: Small alphabet letter

A: Capital alphabet letter

1: Numerical character

[2] URL entry field (128 one-byte characters)

- Following symbols exist in each enter mode. (When you press the key, characters on the right hand side will appear.)

[a] Small alphabet letter mode: [Symbol] abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz

[A] Capital alphabet letter mode: [Symbol] ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ

[1] Numerical character mode: [Symbol] 1234567890

- [Symbol] appears in the following order.

key key

F-7-34

- Within the URL entry field, you can use the or key to select a character, and the or key to move the cursor.

- The Stop key has the Delete function when there is a character at the cursor position. (The character at the position of the cursor is deleted, moving all following characters one position toward freed place.)

If there is no character at the cursor position, it has the Backspace function. (The character at the left of the cursor is deleted, moving the cursor.)

- When you move the cursor to a position of a character and press the or key, you can insert characters.

(The character at the cursor position is moved to the right, and a new character is inserted.

- You can select the enter mode with the Navi key. (The default setting is small alphabet letter.)

(2) How to enter port number

Port Number

0 0 0 0 1

( 1 - 6 5 5 3 5 )

L / R

U P / D O W N

[ OK : S e t ]

F-7-35

- Possible to set between 1 and 65535 (The default display is 1).

- The top digit can be selected between 0 and 6. Other digits can be selected between 0 and 9.

- When OK key is pressed, and the value is over 65535, it is fixed on 65535.

- When OK key is pressed, and the value is 0, it is fixed on 1.

7-29

Chapter 7

(3) How to enter user name

Proxy User

[a]

User Name Canon

: S e l e c t


N a v i : a -> A -> 1

[ O K : S e t ]

F-7-36

[1] Entry filed (24 one-byte characters)

- It is the same as the entering method of proxy server address.

(4) How to enter password

Proxy Password [a]

[1]

: S e l e c t


N a v i : a -> A -> 1

[ OK : S e t ]

F-7-37

[1]

[1] Entry filed (24 one-byte characters)

- If a password has already been set, when you press the or key at any cursor position, all the "*" will disappear and the first letter will be entered as the first character.

- Entered characters are visible until you press OK key. Once entering into the menu again, they will be changed to "*".

- Other information is the same as the entering method of proxy server address.

3.2 e-RDS settings

1) Enter the service mode.

- Turn off the printer power.

- Turn on the power while pressing the [Load] key and [Navigate] key.

* Keep pressing the above keys until "Initializing" is displayed.

- "S" appears at the top right of the display.

- Press the or key to choose the [Set./Adj. Menu]and press the [OK] key.

* "SERVICE MODE" appears in the menu list and the MESSAGE LED flashes.

- Press the key or key to choose "SERVICE MODE" and press the [OK] key.

2) Set the following e-RDS setting items No.1-4.

(If the result of the communication test (COM-TEST) is "NG", execute setting items No.5-6 to solve the problem.)

1

No.

Item

E-RDS SWITCH

2

3

4

5

6

UGW-ADDRESS

UGW-PORT

COM-TEST

COM-LOG

ERDS-DAT

Type

2 bytes

129 bytes

(NULL included, SJIS not allowed)

4 bytes

Description

OFF : Disable/ ON : Enable e-Maintenance/ imageWARE Remote system to send device information, meter data, and error statuses to the UGW.

Default value is OFF (not in use)

The UGW address by default : https://a01---.

The complete address is not provided in this document for security reason.

The UGW Port Number by default : 443

Validation : 1-65535

To perform Communication test with UGW and set "OK!"/ "NG!" as the result.

Detailed communication data log

Switches to display time when error occurred, error code, and error data up to now.

Max 30 loggings retained.

Max 128 characters (not containing NULL) for Error information.

Initialize e-RDS setting data

7-30

3.3 Service Mode Menu Tree

First Level

DISPLAY

I/O DISPLAY

ADJUST

FUNCTION

REPLACE

COUNTER

SETTEING

Second Level Third Level Fourth Level Fifth Level Sixth Level

Pth

RTC

PV AUTO JUDGE

NETWORK

E-RDS

CERTIFICATE CA-CERTIFICATE VALIDITY:*1

E-RDS SWITCH:*1 ON/OFF

UGW-ADDRESS:*1 http://XXX

UGW-PORT:*1

COM-TEST:*1

COM-LOG:*1

XXXXX

YES yyyy/mm/dd

INITIALIZE

HEAD DOT INF

WARNING

ERROR

JAM

ADJUST

W-INK

CARRIAGE

PURGE

INK-USE CNT

W-INK-CHG CNT

HEAD-CHG CNT

HDD BOX PASS

PARTS-CHG CNT

PARTS COUNTER

USER SETTEING

CA-KEY:*1

ERDS-DAT:*1

JOB LOG

YES/NO

YES/NO

YES/NO

* Press key to move to the next menu of the same layer, and press key to move to the menu of one layer deeper.

* The menus shown in '*1' are the e-RDS-related menus.

3.4 e-RDS Related Setting Details

1) e-RDS's Operation Mode [E-RDS SWITCH]

In service mode, referring to the "Service Mode Menu Tree", go to [E-RDS SWITCH] menu using key and key.

(1) Choose between [ON] or [OFF] using the and keys.

E R D S

O F F

S W I T C H

F-7-38

(2) Press [OK] key to determine the operation mode and go back to the previous screen.

E R D S

= O N

S W I

- When the operation mode is determined, "=" will be displayed.

- OFF: When it is set to [OFF], e-RDS is not used. Default value is OFF.

- ON: When it is set to [ON], e-RDS is used.

F-7-39

T C H

Chapter 7

7-31

Chapter 7

2) UGW Address [UGW-ADDRESS] and UGW port [UGW-PORT]

Usually, the default values set in advance are used for the setting value of [UGW-ADDRESS] and [UGW-PORT]. Unless there is a special instruction, the default value should not be changed. If it should be changed, the communication with UGW may have an error. If [UGW-ADDRESS] and [UGW-PORT] are changed, the new setting will be enabled after power OFF/ON.

Therefore, usually, the setup is not necessary.

* If you change under a special instruction, perform the following procedure.

(1) Setting address for UGW

- In service mode, referring to the "Service Mode Menu Tree", go to [UGW-ADDRESS] menu using key and key.

E R D S

U G W A D D R E S S

F-7-40

- Press key to enter the Setup Mode. (A character indicating the input mode (in the upper right corner of the screen) and the cursor are displayed.)

Enter UGW address (URL).

: a U G W A D D R E S S h t t p : / /

F-7-41

Display to indicate an input mode

A: Alphabet capital letter

a: Alphabet small letter

1: Numerical character

- The cursor is shown at the first letter.

- Use and keys to select characters to enter.

- Press [Back] key to cancel what you entered and go back to the previous screen.

- Press [OK] key to determine what you entered and go back to the previous screen.

(2) Setting up the GW Port Number

- In service mode, referring to the "Service Mode Menu Tree", go to [UGW-PORT] menu using key and key.

E R D S

U G W P O R T

F-7-42

- Press key to enter the Setup Mode. (A cursor is displayed.)

Enter a port number.

U G W P O R T

0 0 0 0 0

F-7-43

- Use and keys to select characters to enter.

- Press [Back] key to cancel what you entered and go back to the previous screen.

- Press [OK] key to determine what you entered and go back to the previous screen.

* The actual setting value of UGW address [UGW-ADDRESS] and UGW port [UGW-PORT] are categorized as confidential information, so they are not described in this manual.

3) Communication Test [COM-TEST]

(1) In service mode, referring to the "Service Mode Menu Tree", go to [COM-TEST] menu using key and key.

C O M - T E S T

Y E S

F-7-44

(2) Press [OK] key to start the test. ("=" is displayed at the start of the test.)

C O M - T E S T

= Y E S

F-7-45

(3) During the communication test, "CHECK NOW" is displayed.

C O M - T E S T

C H E C K N O W .

.

F-7-46

7-32

Chapter 7

- Once the communication test is started, it cannot be cancelled.(Other operation won't be accepted until the result is obtained.)

(4) If the communication test was successful, "CHECK RSLT:OK" is displayed.

C O M - T E S T

C H E C K R S L T : O K

F-7-47

- Press key to exit this operation mode and go back to the top of [COM-TEST] menu.

(5) If the communication test was failed, "CHECK RSLT:NG" is displayed.

C O M - T E S T

C H E C K R S L T : N G

F-7-48

- Press key to exit this operation mode and go back to the top of [COM-TEST] menu.

- If you cannot obtain the result after 30 seconds from the start of a communication test, the test is considered failed and the same screen will appear.

* When the communication test was successful, it is necessary to take the interval of 5 minutes before performing the next communication test.

4) Communication Log [COM-LOG]

Communication Error Information/Detailed Communication Error Information can be displayed on the screen at the time of a communication error with the Service

Center (including proxy server error). When a communication error occurs, you can refer to this information to study how to deal with the problem.

* For the countermeasure corresponding to each Communication Error Information or Detailed Communication Error Information, see the list of error message in

"4. Troubleshoot".

(1) In service mode, referring to the "Service Mode Menu Tree", go to [COM-LOG] menu using key and key.

E R D S

C O M - L O G

F-7-49

(2) Press key, and communication error information is displayed. On the upper line of the LCD, a log number (01-30) and an error code are shown; on the bottom line, an occurrence date and time of the error is shown.

N o : 0 1 X X X X X X X X H

Y Y Y Y / M M / D D H H : M M

F-7-50

- COM-LOG information can be saved up to 30 cases.

- Use Right and Left keys to change logs to display.

- Logs are displayed in the sequence of the time of occurrence. (Log number 1 is the latest log.)

- Press key to exit this operation mode and go back to the top of [COM-LOG] menu.

* If the Communication Error Information is not saved, the screen below will appear.

C O M - L O G

N O L O G

F-7-51

- Press key to exit the communication error information screen and go back to the top of [COM-LOG] menu.

(3) Press key to display the Detailed Communication Error Information (maximum 128 characters).

1st-32nd characters of Detailed Communication Error Information are shown.

X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X


F-7-52

33rd-64th characters of Detailed Communication Error Information are shown.



F-7-53

7-33

Chapter 7

65th-96th characters of Detailed Communication Error Information are shown.



F-7-54

97th-128th characters of Detailed Communication Error Information are shown.



F-7-55

- Use and keys to move among Screen and Screen. (Detailed Communication Error Information can be made with maximum 128 characters, however, even if the information is made up with 1 to 96 characters, all Screens are still displayed.)

- Press key to exit the Detailed Communication Error Information screen and go back to the Communication Error Information screen.

* If Detailed Communication Error Information does not exist, the screen below will appear.

N O E R R O R D E T A I L

F-7-56

- Press key to exit the Detailed Communication Error Information screen and go back to the Communication Error Information screen.

5) Initializing the e-RDS setting [ERDS-DAT]

Usually, the setup is not necessary.

Use this procedure when you want to reset the e-RDS settings to the factory default.

(1) In service mode, referring to the "Service Mode Menu Tree", go to [ERDS-DAT] menu using key and key.

E - R D S

N O

D A T

F-7-57

(2) Choose between YES/NO using and keys, and press [OK] key to set.

E - R D S D A T

= Y E S

- Press [OK] key, and "=" will appear and the initializing process will begin.

F-7-58

[NO]: Do not initialize the e-RDS setting. Default value is [NO].

[YES]: Initialize the e-RDS setting.

6) Displaying the CA Certificate Information [VALIDITY]

For the secure communication between the device (e-RDS) and the UGW, an authentication technology from a certification authority is used. A license has been issued from the certification authority. For this reason, the devices are shipped with the CA (Certificate Authority) certificate enabled in advance to prove the license obtained.


To confirm that this CA certificate is valid or how long it will be valid, you can display the expiration date of the CA certificate information.

(1) In service mode, referring to the "Service Mode Menu Tree", go to [VALIDITY] menu using key and key.

C A - C E R T I F I C A T E

V A L I D I T Y

F-7-59

(2) Press key, and the expiration date of the CA certificate will be displayed.

V A L I D I T Y

Y Y Y Y / M M / D D

F-7-60

7-34

Chapter 7

- Press key to exit the CA certificate expiration date display screen and go back to the top of [VALIDITY] menu.

* If the CA certificate is deleted, the screen below will appear.

V A L I D I T Y

N O T I N S T A L L E D

F-7-61

- Press key to exit the CA certificate expiration date display screen and go back to the top of [VALIDITY] menu.

7) Deleting the CA Certificate [CA-KEY]

For the secure communication between the device (e-RDS) and the UGW, an authentication technology from a certification authority is used. A license has been issued from the certification authority. For this reason, the devices are shipped with the CA (Certificate Authority) certificate enabled in advance to prove the license obtained.

The device (e-RDS) uses this CA certificate to communicate with the UGW, thus CA must not be deleted.


* If you delete the CA certificate under a special instruction, perform the following procedure.

(1) In service mode, referring to the "Service Mode Menu Tree", go to [CA-KEY] menu using key and key.

C A K E Y

N O

F-7-62

(2) Choose between YES/NO using and keys, and press [OK] key to set.

C A - K E Y

= Y E S

- Press [OK] key, and "=" will appear and the initializing process will begin.

F-7-63

[NO]: Do not delete the CA certificate. Default value is [NO].

[YES]: Delete the CA certificate.

7-35

Chapter 7

4. FAQ

5. Troubleshooting

Q1

No.

Q2

Q3

Q4

Question Answer

Registration information of the device (E-RDS) is once deleted from the UGW server, and is re-registered after that.

If a communication test is not carried out, then device information on UGW becomes invalid.

When registration of the device (e-RDS) is deleted from the

UGW, the status will be changed to the communication test not completed because related information has lost from a database. Therefore, device information will also become invalid if that condition persists for seven days without carrying out the communication test. Hence, to avoid the invalid condition, carry out the communication test.

The communication test with the UGW server results NG!

The comunication test might become NG in the following cases.

- 1. Name resolution was failed due to an incorrect host name or DNS server has been halted.

- 2. Network cable is blocked off. Network cable is broken.

- 3. Proxy server settings are not correct.

Could you describe the timing of data transmitting from the device (e-RDS) to the UGW, and what data size is sent to the

UGW?

Can I turn the device power off during the device (e-RDS) operation?

The schedule of data transmitting, and the start time are determined by settings in the UGW side. The timing is once per 16 hours by default, and counter data size is maximum

1400 bytes.

While operating the device (e-RDS), the power of the printer and network equipment such as HUB must be ON. If power

OFF is needed, do not leave it OFF for a long time.

An error such as "Device is busy, try later"could occur if the power supply of network equipment is made prolonged OFF.

1

No.

Condition detected Action

The communication test has failed. Check network conditions such as proxy server settings and so on.

- Check the communication log from COM-LOG. -> Execute "Remedy" in the "Error message list".

- Check whether RGW-ADDRESS or RGW-PORT settings have changed.

7-36

Chapter 7

6. Error message list

Details of the errors and their remedies are as described below.

(The meaning of server indicates the UGW in this section)

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

22

23

24

No.

Error Message

SUSPEND:

Communication test is not performed

Event Registration is Failed

URL Scheme error (not https) The header of the URL of the registered UGW is not in https format. A "https://" input error.

Server connection error An UGW connection error. Displayed in the event of a TCP/IP communication fault.

URL server specified is illegal A URL different to that specified by the UGW has been set. An URL address setting error.

Proxy connection error Cannot connect to proxy server.

Displayed when unable to connect to proxy server.

Proxy authentication error

Server certificate error

Cause

E-RDS has been booted up (device reboot) with E-

RDS SWITCH = ON but the communication test had not yet been performed.

Event Registration is Failed Processing (event processing) within the device has failed.

Remedy

Perform the communication test [COMTEST] in service mode.

Turn the device OFF/ ON. If the error persists, replace the device system software (firmware).

(Upgrade)

Check that the value of UGW-ADR has been entered correctly as https://a01---.

Check the network-related settings according to "No.1:

Communication test is not performed" in "Troubleshooting".

Check that the value of UGW-ADR has been entered correctly as https://a01---.

Check proxy server address and re-enter if necessary.

Displayed when the authentication to the proxy server has failed.

Device's route certificate is unavailable.

Server certificate expired The route certificate registered with the device has expired.

Check the user name and password required in order to login to the proxy, and re-enter if necessary.

Reinstall the latest device system software (firmware).

(Upgrade)

Check that the device time and date are correctly set. If the device time and date are correct, upgrade to the latest system software (firmware).

Try again after a period of time. If the same error occurs again, check the UGW status with the UGW administrator.

Check that the value of UGW-PORT is 443.

Try again after a period of time. If the same error persists, check the UGW status with the UGW administrator.

Unknown error

Server response error

(Hexadecimal)

[Error detailed in the UGW]:*1

Device internal error

Some other kind of communication error has occurred.

SOAP Fault SOAP communication error has occurred.

Server response error (NULL) A UGW response error (when UGW error code processing has failed).

A HTTPS communication error.

A UGW response error.

Displayed when communication with UGW has been successful, but an error of some sort has prevented UGW from responding.

An internal device error. An error due to the device side.

Server schedule is invalid

Server response time out

Server not found

E-RDS switch is set OFF

During the communication test, there has been some kind of error in the schedule values passed from UGW.

UGW response time out.

Due to network congestion, etc., the response from

UGW does not come within the specified time.

There is a mistake in the UGW URL, and UGW cannot be accessed.

E-RDS is disabled.

Check an error code (hexadecimal) returned from the UGW, then retry after a period of time.

Switch the device OFF/ ON. Or, replace the device system software. (Upgrade)

When the error occurs, report the details to the support department. Then, after the UGW side has responded, retry the communication test.

If this error occurs when the communication test is being run, wait some time and rerun the test.

Check that the value of Service mode > E-RDS/RGW-ADR is https://a01---.

Set E-RDS SWITCH = ON, and run COM-TEST in service mode.

Check the device settings status with the UGW administrator.

Server schedule is not exist Server schedule does not exist.

Blank schedule data has been received from UGW.

Network is not ready, try later Network-related settings have not been made for the device.

URL error A URL setting error.

Non-URL text string entered in URL field.

Proxy address resolution error A proxy server address resolution error.

Server certificate verify error The server certificate verification (URL check) error.

Server address resolution error UGW address resolution has failed.

Make network-related settings properly for the device

(printer).

Check that the value of UGW-ADR is https://a01---.

Check that the proxy server name is correct.

Check that the value of UGW-ADR is https://a01---.

Check that the value of UGW-ADR is https:// a01---.

*1:[Hexadecimal] indicates an error code returned from the UGW in hexadecimal.

7. Service cautions

After performing the following service actions, it is necessary to perform the resetting of the e-RDS.

Failure to do so will result that the counter transmitting value to the UGW may become unusual.

- System software (firmware) upgrade

- After replacing the main controller board, the following settings in service mode must not be changed unless there are specific instructions to do so. Changing these values will cause error in communication with the UGW.

(Initial values)

UGW-PORT: 443

UGW-ADDRESS: https://a01---.

7-37

Chapter 7

7.1.5 Viewing PRINT INF a) PRINT INF item detail

The details of each PRINT INF item displayed when performing [SERVICE MODE] > [DISPLAY] > [PRINTINF] are as follows:

SYSTEM

HEAD

INK

WARNING

ERROR

Print item

S/N

TYPE

LF TYPE

TMP

RH

SIZE LF

SIZE CR

AFTER INST.

S/N

LOT

(The ink color is indicated)

01-20

01-20

Print content

Serial number of printer

Type setting on main controller PCB

Feed roller type

Ambient temperature

Ambient humidity

Detected size of loaded media (feed direction)

Detected size of loaded media (carriage scan direction)

Number of days since initial installation

Serial number of printhead

Lot number of printhead

Number of days passed since the ink tank was installed

Warning history (up to 20 events)

Error history (up to 20 events)

Printed value

characters/numerals of 8-byte

24, 36

0: old type roller

1: new type roller

Unit: Centigrade degree

Unit: % mm (0 is always detected for the roll media.) mm

Unit: Day(s) characters/numerals (8 digits) characters/numerals (8 digits)

Unit: Days

Number: Lowest is the most recent

Date: mm/dd

Time: mm/ss

Code: Last 4 digits



Date: mm/dd

Time: mm/ss

Code: Last 4 digits


0031-3291

7-38

JAM

INK CHK

Print item

01-05

01

04

05

02

03

06

07

08

JAM log (5 records)

Print content

Jam type

Media format

Jam timing

Width detection OFF mode

Head height

Cut mode

Media passing environment

09 Borderless/Bordered

10

11

Print mode label No.

Media size

12 Media type


Refill log

Print whether disable remaining ink detection was previously set

Chapter 7

Printed value


Date: mm/dd

Time: mm/ss

Jam code

1: CR error

2: Jam

3: Feed failure (delay)

4: Cut failure

*: Unknown

1: Roll media

2: Cut sheet

*: Unknown

1: Feed

2: Print

3: Eject

*: Unknown

1: ON

2: OFF

*: Unknown

0: SL (1.0mm)

1: L (1.3mm)

2: M1 (1.8mm)

3: M2 (2.0mm)

4: M3 (2.2mm)

5: H (2.6mm)

*: Unknown

1: Fully close

2: Only HP side open

3: 1/4 open

4: 1/2 open

5: 3/4 open

6: Fully open

*: Unknown

1: User cut

2: Eject cut

3: Auto cut

*: Unknown

0: A(temperature 15 to 25 degrees centigrade/humidity

40 to 60%)

1: B(temperature 25 to 30 degrees centigrade/humidity

40 to 60%)

2: C(temperature 15 to 30 degrees centigrade/humidity

10 to 40%)

3: D(temperature 15 to 30 degrees centigrade/humidity

60 to 80%)

4: E(temperature 15 to 30 degrees centigrade/humidity 0 to 10%, or 15 degrees centigrade or less and 30 degrees centigrade or more/humidity 0 to 50%[low humidity is out of guarantee.])

5: F(temperature 15 to 30 degrees centigrade/humidity

80 to 100%, or 15 degrees centigrade or less and 30 degrees centigrade or more/humidity 50 to 100%[high humidity is out of guarantee.])

*: Unknown

1: Bordered printing

2: Borderless printing

*: Unknown

Display print mode

*: Unknown

Display size

*: Unknown

Display media name

*: Unknown

0: Disable remaining ink detection was never set

1: Disable remaining ink detection was set at least once

7-39

Chapter 7

COUNTE

R

Print item

PRINTER LIFE-TTL

LIFE-ROLL

Print content

Total amount of cumulative number of sheets

Cumulative number of sheets of roll media

LIFE-CUTSHEET Cumulative number of sheets of cut sheet

LIFE A-F Cumulative number of sheets of each environment

POWER ON

SLEEP ON

Cumulative power-on time

Cumulative sleep-on time

CARRIA

GE

CUTTER

WIPE

W-INK

PDL

PRINT

DRIVE

CR-COUNT

CR-DIST.

PRINT-COUNT Cumulative print end count (count as 1 by capping)

PURGE CLN-A Cumulative number of automatic cleaning operations

1

2

Cumulative number of automatic cleaning 1 (normal suction) operations

Cumulative number of automatic cleaning 2 (ink level adjusting) operations

3

6

7

8

Cumulative number of automatic cleaning 3 (initial filling) operations

Cumulative number of automatic cleaning 6 (strong normal suction) operations

Cumulative number of automatic cleaning 7 (aging) operations

Cumulative number of automatic cleaning 8 (flashing) operations

10

11

15

16

17

TTL

CLN-M

1

Number of cutting operations

Number of wiping operations

Remaining capacity of the maintenance cartridge

Cumulative number of printed media according to PDL

Cumulative printing time

Cumulative carriage moving time

Cumulative carriage scan count (count as 1 by moving back and forth)

Cumulative carriage scan distance (count as 1 by moving

210mm)

Cumulative number of automatic cleaning 10 (ink filling after secondary transportation) operations

Cumulative number of automatic cleaning 11 (ink filling after head replacement) operations

Cumulative number of automatic cleaning 15 (dot count small suction) operations

Cumulative number of automatic cleaning 16 (sedimented ink agitation) operations

Cumulative number of automatic cleaning 17 (small suction) operations

Total number of automatic cleaning operations

Cumulative number of manual cleaning 1 operations

Cumulative number of manual cleaning 1 (normal suction) operations

Unit: times

Unit: times

Unit: %

GARO: xx sheets

HP-GL/2: xx sheets

Unit: hours

Unit: hours

Unit: times

Unit: times

Unit: times

Unit: times

Unit: times

Printed value

Unit: sheets (A4-equivalent paper)




Unit: hours

Unit: hours

4

5

6

TTL

Cumulative number of manual cleaning 4 (ink draining from head after head replacement) operations

Cumulative number of manual cleaning 5 (ink draining from head and tube before transportation ) operations

Cumulative number of manual cleaning 6 (normal strong suction) operations

Total number of manual cleaning operations

7-40

COUNTER

Print item

CLEAR INK

CONSUME

MTC EXC.

Print content

Cumulative count of ink section consumption amount clearing

Cumulative count of maintenance cartridge replacement count clearing

HEAD EXC.

Cumulative count of printhead replacement count clearing

PARTS CR1

EXC.

Cumulative count of unit CR-1(carriage unit bushing) replacement count clearing

PARTS CR2

EXC.

PARTS CR3

EXC.

Cumulative count of unit CR-2(fexible cable unit) replacement count clearing

Cumulative count of unit CR-3(linear encoder sensor/ linear scale/shaft cleaner) replacement count clearing

PARTS CR4

EXC.

PARTS CR5

EXC.

PARTS SP1

EXC.

PARTS PG1

EXC.

PARTS HMa1

EXC.

PARTS MT1

EXC.

PARTS PL1

EXC.

PARTS Mi1

EXC.

PARTS CT1

EXC.

PARTS WF1

EXC.

PARTS WF2

EXC.

FACTORY

CNT.

Cumulative count of unit CR-4(carriage height changing cam) replacement count clearing

Cumulative count of unit CR-5(multi sensor) replacement count clearing

Cumulative count of unit SP-1(ink tube unit) replacement count clearing

Cumulative count of unit PG-1(purge unit) replacement count clearing

Cumulative count of unit HMa-1(head management sensor) replacement count clearing

Cumulative count of unit MT-1(carriage motor) replacement count clearing

Cumulative count of unit PL-1(feed motor) replacement count clearing

Cumulative count of unit Mi-1(mist fan/mist exhaust duct) replacement count clearing

Cumulative count of unit CT-1(cutter) replacement count clearing

Cumulative count of unit WF-1(ink absorber under the maintenance cartridge unit) replacement count clearing

Cumulative count of unit WF-2(platen exhaust duct) replacement count clearing

For factory

Unit: times

Printed value

Chapter 7

7-41

Chapter 7

COUNTER

Print item Print content

EXCHANGE MTC EXC.

Maintenance cartridge replacement count

HEAD EXC.

Printhead replacement count

Main controller PCB replacement count BOARD

EXC.(M/B)

PARTS CR1

EXC.

CR-1(carriage unit bushing) replacement count

CR-2(fexible cable unit) replacement count PARTS CR2

EXC.

PARTS CR3

EXC.

PARTS CR4

EXC.

PARTS CR5

EXC.

CR-3(linear encoder sensor/linear scale/shaft cleaner) replacement count

CR-4(carriage height changing cam) replacement count

CR-5(multi sensor) replacement count

SP-1(ink tube unit) replacement count PARTS SP1

EXC.

PARTS PG1

EXC.

PARTS HMa1

EXC.

PARTS MT1

EXC.

PARTS PL1

EXC.

PARTS Mi1

EXC.

PARTS CT1

EXC.

PARTS WF1

EXC.

PG-1(purge unit) replacement count

HMa-1(head management sensor) replacement count

MT-1(carriage motor) replacement count

PL-1(feed motor) replacement count

Mi-1(mist fan/mist exhaust duct) replacement count

CT-1(cutter) replacement count

WF-1(ink absorber under the maintenance cartridge unit) replacement count

WF-2(platen exhaust duct) replacement count PARTS WF2

EXC.

DETAIL-CNT MOVE

PRINTER

MEDIACONF

IG-CNT

N-INKCHK


Count of secondary transportation

Count of media registered by media editor

Count of turning off the ink remaining level detection for each color

Unit: times

Unit: times

Printed value

7-42

COUNTER

Print item

INK-USE1

INK-USE2

INK-EXC

INK (The ink color is indicated)

TTL

LINK (The ink color is indicated)

TTL

Total amount of the cumulative consumption of generic ink

Cumulative consumption amount of generic large ink

Total amount of the cumulative consumption of generic large ink

Cumulative consumption amount of generic small ink SINK (The ink color is indicated)

TTL

Print content

Cumulative consumption amount of generic ink

Total amount of the cumulative consumption of generic small ink

Cumulative consumption amount of refilled ink NINK (The ink color is indicated)

TTL

INK (The ink color is indicated)

TTL

Total amount of the cumulative consumption of refilled ink

Consumption amount of generic ink of the currently installed ink tank.

NINK (The ink color is indicated)

TTL

Total consumption amount of generic ink of the currently installed ink tanks

Consumption amount of refilled ink of the currently installed ink tank

Total consumption amount of refilled ink of the currently installed ink tanks

Cumulative count of generic ink tank replacement INK (The ink color is indicated)

TTL Total amount of the cumulative count of generic ink tank replacement

Cumulative count of refilled ink tank replacement NINK (The ink color is indicated)

TTL Total amount of the cumulative count of refilled ink tank replacement

Unit: ml

Unit: ml

Unit: times

Printed value

Chapter 7

7-43

Chapter 7

COUNTE

R

Print item

MEDIA

1-7

MEDIA

OTHER

MEDIA

SIZE1

ROLL P-

SQ/P-

CNT

MEDIA

SIZE2

ROLL D-

SQ/D-

CNT

MEDIA

SIZE1

CUT P-

SQ/P-

CNT

MEDIA

SIZE2

CUT D-

SQ/D-

CNT

HEAD

DOT

CNT.1

HEAD

DOT

CNT.2

NAME

TTL

ROLL

CUTSHEET

NAME

TTL

ROLL

CUTSHEET

36-44

24-36

17-24

0-17

36-44

24-36

17-24

0-17

36-44

24-36

17-24

0-17

36-44

24-36

17-24

0-17

Print content

Media type

Total amount of cumulative print area of roll media and cut sheet

Cumulative print area of roll media

Cumulative print area of cut sheet

OTHER

Total amount of cumulative print area of roll media and cut sheet

Cumulative print area of roll media

Cumulative print area of cut sheet

Cumulative print area of roll media equal to or larger than 36 inches but less than 44 inches (physical size)



Cumulative print area of roll media less than 17 inches

(physical size)

Cumulative print area of roll media equal to or larger than 36 inches but less than 44 inches (data size)



Cumulative print area of roll media less than 17 inches (data size)

OTHER

Unit: square/meter, square/feet

Unit: square/meter, square/feet, sheets (equivalent of

A4)


A4)

Printed value

Unit: square/meter, square/feet

Cumulative print area of cut sheet equal to or larger than 36 inches but less than 44 inches (physical size)



Cumulative print area of cut sheet less than 17 inches

(physical size)


A4)

Cumulative print area of cut sheet equal to or larger than 36 inches but less than 44 inches (data size)



Cumulative print area of cut sheet less than 17 inches (data size)


A4)

Dot counts of each colors of the currently installed printhead Unit: (x 1,000,000) dots (The ink color is indicated)

TTL Total dot counts of each colors of the currently installed printhead

Cumulative dot counts of each colors (The ink color is indicated)

TTL Total cumulative dot counts of each colors

Unit: (x 1,000,000) dots

7-44

HEAD INF.1

[Installed head]

Print item

01

02

16

17

18

19

07

08

09

10

03

04

05

06

11

12

13

14

15

HEAD INF.2

[Head installed 2nd to last]

20

21

01

02

10

11

12

13

14

15

06

07

08

09

03

04

05

16

17

18

19

20

21

Chapter 7

Print content

Date & time installed (last 4 times)

Removal date & time (last 3 times)

Printed value

YY/MM/DD

Display order: Installed date (last) -> Installed date (2nd to last) -> Installed date (3rd to last) -> Installed date

(initial)

YY/MM/DD

Display order: Last -> 2nd to last -> 3rd to last


Unit: Times

Main unit serial No. (last 3 times)

CLN_A (auto) count

CLN_A (manual) count

Cleaning B (auto/left cap) count

Cleaning B (auto/right cap) count

CLN_B (manual) count

Head replacement ink drain count

Secondary transport ink drain count

Secondary transport ink fill count

Ink filling after head replacement count

Recovery suction

Number of sheets printed

Error log

Refill tank usage log (per chip)

Firmware version (last 3)

Head highest temperature (per chip)

Number of non-discharging nozzles (per nozzle row) chip A row A, chip A row B to chip F row A, chip F row B

Unit: Sheets (A4 equivalent sheets)

YY/MM/DD xxxx (last 4 digits)

01: Last, 02: 2nd to last, 03: 3rd to last, ..., 20: 20th to last

A: x, B: x, C: x, D: x, E: x, F: x

XX.XX YY/MM/DD


A: xxx, B: xxx, C: xxx, D: xxx, E: xxx, F: xxx

AA: xxx, AB: xxx, BA: xxx, BB: xxx, CA: xxx, CB: xxx, DA: xxx, DB: xxx, EA: xxx, EB: xxx, FA: xxx, FB: xxx

EEPROM format Ver (oldest version)

EEPROM format Ver (latest version)

Date & time installed (last 4 times)

Removal date & time (last 3 times)

YY/MM/DD

Display order: Installed date (last) -> Installed date (2nd to last) -> Installed date (3rd to last) -> Installed date

(initial)

YY/MM/DD



Unit: Times

Main unit serial No. (last 3 times)

CLN_A (auto) count

CLN_A (manual) count

Cleaning B (auto/left cap) count

Cleaning B (auto/right cap) count

CLN_B (manual) count

Head replacement ink drain count

Secondary transport ink drain count

Secondary transport ink fill count

Ink filling after head replacement count

Recovery suction

Number of sheets printed

Error log

Refill tank usage log (per chip)

Firmware version (last 3)

Head highest temperature (per chip)

Number of non-discharging nozzles (per nozzle row) chip A row A, chip A row B to chip F row A, chip F row B

A: xxx, B: xxx, C: xxx, D: xxx, E: xxx, F: xxx

AA: xxx, AB: xxx, BA: xxx, BB: xxx, CA: xxx, CB: xxx, DA: xxx, DB: xxx, EA: xxx, EB: xxx, FA: xxx, FB: xxx

EEPROM format Ver (oldest version)

EEPROM format Ver (latest version)

Unit: Sheets (A4 equivalent sheets)

YY/MM/DD xxxx (last 4 digits)

01: Last, 02: 2nd to last, 03: 3rd to last, ..., 20: 20th to last

A: x, B: x, C: x, D: x, E: x, F: x

XX.XX YY/MM/DD


7-45

Chapter 7

PARTS CNT.

COGFF

LF/SCALE

PV AUTO JUDGE

Print item

[Value of each parts counter]

CONDITION

Print content

Status

Number of days after set

Count

Life threshold

Usage

Cumulative count

Cogging FF result

ADJUSTMENT VALUE

PITCHERR-F

PITCHRR-B

PARAM0-F

PARAM0-B

PARAM1-F

PARAM1-B

MEDIA

LF-A

LF-B

SCALE-A

SCALE-B

OK/W1/W2/E

Unit: Days

Unit: %

Printed value

0: Disabled

1: Enabled

2: Check required

3: Adjust reruired

-400 to 400 (1/100000 mm) Pitch deviation in the forward path (FWD)

Pitch deviation of the return path (BWD)

Parameters 1

Parameters 2

Parameters 1

Parameters 2

REF: Motor error (6 digits)

PHASE: Phase (3 digits)

AMP: Amplitude (3 digits)

RATE: Decay rate (3 digits)













Type of paper that printed "PRINT INF"

User LF adjustment value A of the above

MEDIA (standard)

User LF adjustment value B of the above media

(low pass)

User scale adjustment value A of the above media (fine scale)

User scale adjustment value B of the above media (fast scale)

Ink reduction mode

Inrush number of times

LF adjustment value (up to 4 decimal places)

Scale adjustment value (integer)

ON (NORMAL/LOW only when ON)/OFF

*: NORMAL: normal mode, LOW: ink saving mode

Inrush number of times (0 to 254)

*: Times that swiched from NORMAL (normal mode) to LOW (ink saving mode)

MULTI SENSOR UNIT

DATA

Multi sensor version

Multi sensor data

7-46

Chapter 7

CRREG

JOB LOG

ADJUST LOG

DUTY

TEMP&HUM

MEDIA TYPE

DATE

TIME

GAP1

GAP2

UNIT: m2

UNIT: sq.f

A(xxx)

B(xxx)

C(xxx)

D(xxx)

E(xxx)

TTL(xxx)

A(xxx)

B(xxx)

UNIT: A4

Sheet

UNIT: Letter

Sheet

C(xxx)

D(xxx)

E(xxx)

TTL(xxx)

A(xxx)

B(xxx)

C(xxx)

D(xxx)

E(xxx)

TTL(xxx)

A(xxx)

B(xxx)

C(xxx)

D(xxx)

E(xxx)

TTL(xxx)

Print item

HRZ A

HRZ B

Print content

Adjustment value of the horizontal registration A and

B and C ink droplet landing position

HRZ C

VRT LATEST CALC POINTS As to the listed value, the number of effective value from the first

VRT a

VRT b

VRT c

No

Adjustment value when performing the vertical registration a and b amd c average adjustment value calculation

M

HEAD

TEMP&HUM

MEDIA TYPE

DATE

TIME

R

Job history (up to 5 events)

Print mode

Head height

Temperature and humidity

Media type

Date

Time

Registration condition

GAP

JOB NAME

No

ADJ. TYPE

HEAD

Printed value


A: The GAP used for printing and GAP of internal registration adjustment value is a match.

B: The GAP used for printing and GAP of internal registration adjustment value is a mismatch.

C: No registration adjustment value

Distance between head and nedia Gap information

Job name

No: Adjustment history (up to 5 events, lowest is the most recent)

D: Advanced registration history

E: Expansion registration history

Adjustment type

The history of D and E are each most recent one only.

Head height manual: Manual adjustment auto(d): Detail auto(s): Basic auto(e): Extension xx(y,Z) xx= A: automatic panel setting, H: fixed panel setting, AE: adjustment error occurred

(automatic), HE: adjustment error occurred

(fixed),

(y,z)=0: SLOW, 1: LO, 2: M1, 3: M2, 4: M3, 5:

H1 y: GAP1 z= GAP2

Temperature and humidity

Media type

Date

Time

1st kind GAP

2nd kind GAP

A: Cumulative print area of Duty A

B: Cumulative print area of Duty B

C: Cumulative print area of Duty C

D: Cumulative print area of Duty D

E: Cumulative print area of Duty E

TTL: Cumulative print area of all Duty xxx: Counter number of e-Maintenance/imageWARE

Remote

Unit: square/meter, square/feet, sheets (equivalent of A4/LTR)

7-47

Chapter 7

b) Layout

PRINT INF layout is shown below.

1/ 5

Canon imagePROGRAF iPFxxx PRINT IN F

Firm:xx.xx Boot:xx.xx MIT(DBF):x.xx MIT(DB):x.xx

S/N:xxxxxxxx Date:yyyy/mm/dd

SYSTEM

S/N:xxxxxxxx TYPE:12 -LF:1 TMP:xx RH:xx SIZE-LF:xxxxx.x -CR:xxxxx.x AFTER INST:xxxx x

HEAD INK

S/N:xxxxxxxx LOT:xxxxxxxx C:xxxxxx M:xxxxxx Y:xxxxxx MBK:xxxxxx MBK2:xxxxxx BK:xxxxxx

WARNING

01:MM/DD HH:MM xxxx 02:MM/DD HH:MM xxxx










ERROR











JAM

01:MM/DD HH:MM xxxx xxxxxxxx

01:x 02:x 03:x 04:x 05:xx 06:x 07:x 08:x

09:x 10:xxx 11:media_sizexxxxxx 12:media_namexxxxxx


01:x 02:x 03:x 04:x 05:xx 06:x 07:x 08:x



01:x 02:x 03:x 04:x 05:xx 06:x 07:x 08:x



01:x 02:x 03:x 04:x 05:xx 06:x 07:x 08:x


01:x 02:x 03:x 04:x 05:xx 06:x 07:x 08:x


F-7-64

7-48

2/5

Canon imagePROGRAF iPFxxx PRINT INF

Firm:xx.xx Boot:xx.xx MIT(DBF):x.xx MIT(DB):x.xx

S/N:xxxxxxxx Date:yyyy/mm/dd

INK CHECK

C:x M:x Y:x MBK:x MBK2:x BK:x

COUNTER

PRINTER

LIFE-TTL:xxxxxx LIFE-ROLL:xxxxxx LIFE-CUTSHEET:xxxxxx

LIFE A:xxxxxx B:xxxxxx C:xxxxxx D:xxxxxx E:xxxxxx F:xxxxxx

POWER-ON:xxxxxx SLEEP-ON:xxxxxx CUTTER:xxxxxx WIPE:xxxxxx W-INK:xxxxxx

PDL: GARO:xxxxxx HP-GL/2:xxxxxx

CARRIAGE

PRINT:xxxxxx DRIVE:xxxxxx CR-COUNT:xxxxxx CR-DIST.:xxxxxx PRINT-COUNT:xxxxxx

PURGE

CLN-A : 1:xxxxx 2:xxxxx 3:xx 6:xxxx 7:xxx 10:xxx 11:xxx 15:xxx 16:xxxxx 17:xxxxx TTL:xxxxxx

CLN-M : 1:xxxxx 4:xxx 5:xx 6:xxxxx TTL:xxxxx

CLEAR

INK CONSUME:xxx MTC EXC.:xxx HEAD EXC.:xxx

PARTS CR1 EXC.:xx PARTS CR2 EXC.:xx PARTS CR3 EXC.:xx PARTS CR4 EXC.:xx PARTS CR5 EXC.:xx

PARTS SP1 EXC.:xx PARTS PG1 EXC.:xx PARTS HMa1 EXC.:xx PARTS MT1 EXC.:xx PARTS PL1 EXC.:xx

PARTS Mi1 EXC.:xx PARTS CT1 EXC.:xx PARTS WF1 EXC.:xx PARTS WF2 EXC.:xx

FACTORY CNT.:xx

EXCHANGE

MTC EXC.:xxx HEAD EXC.:xxx BOARD EXC.(M/B):xx

PARTS CR1 EXC.:xx PARTS CR2 EXC.:xx PARTS CR3 EXC.:xx PARTS CR4 EXC.:xx PARTS CR5 EXC.:xx

PARTS SP1 EXC.:xx PARTS PG1 EXC.:xx PARTS HMa1 EXC.:xx PARTS MT1 EXC.:xx PARTS PL1 EXC.:xx

PARTS Mi1 EXC.:xx PARTS CT1 EXC.:xx PARTS WF1 EXC.:xx PARTS WF2 EXC.:xx

DETAIL-CNT

MOVE PRINTER:xxx MEDIACONFIG-CNT:xxx

N-INKCHK: C:xxxx M:xxxx Y:xxxx MBK:xxxx MBK2:xxxx BK:xxxx

INK-USE1

INK C:xxxxx.xml M:xxxxx.xml Y:xxxxx.xml MBK:xxxxx.xml MBK2:xxxxx.xml BK:xxxxx.xml

TTL:xxxxxx.xml

NINK C:xxxxx.xml M:xxxxx.xml Y:xxxxx.xml MBK:xxxxx.xml MBK2:xxxxx.xml BK:xxxxx.xml

TTL:xxxxxx.xml

INK-USE2

INK C:xxxxx.xml M:xxxxx.xml Y:xxxxx.xml MBK:xxxxx.xml MBK2:xxxxx.xml BK:xxxxx.xml

TTL:xxxxxx.xml

NINK C:xxxxx.xml M:xxxxx.xml Y:xxxxx.xml MBK:xxxxx.xml MBK2:xxxxx.xml BK:xxxxx.xml

TTL:xxxxxx.xml

INK-EXC

INK C:xxxx M:xxxx Y:xxxx MBK:xxxx MBK2:xxxx BK:xxxx

TTL:xxxxx

NINK C:xxxx M:xxxx Y:xxxx MBK:xxxx MBK2:xxxx BK:xxxx

TTL:xxxxx

F-7-65

Chapter 7

7-49

Chapter 7

3/5


Firm:xx.xx Boot:xx.xx MIT(DBF):x.xx MIT(DB):x.x x

S/N:xxxxxxxx Date:yyyy/mm/d d

MEDIA 1 MEDIA 2

NAME : xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx NAME : xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx x

TTL : xxxxxxx.x m2 xxxxxxx.x sq.f TTL : xxxxxxx.x m2 xxxxxxx.x sq.f

ROLL : xxxxxxx.x m2 xxxxxxx.x sq.f ROLL : xxxxxxx.x m2 xxxxxxx.x sq.f

CUTSHEET : xxxxxxx.x m2 xxxxxxx.x sq.f CUTSHEET : xxxxxxx.x m2 xxxxxxx.x sq.f

MEDIA 3 MEDIA 4





MEDIA 5 MEDIA 6





MEDIA 7 MEDIA OTHE R





MEDIA SIZE1 ROLL P-SQ/P-CN T

36-44: xxxxxxx.x m2 xxxxxxx.x sq.f 0




MEDIA SIZE2 ROLL D-SQ/D-CN T





MEDIA SIZE1 CUT P-SQ/P-CN T





MEDIA SIZE2 CUT D-SQ/D-CN T





F-7-66

7-50

4/5



S/N:xxxxxxxx Date:yyyy/mm/d d

HEAD DOT CNT. 1

C:xxxxxxxxx M:xxxxxxxxx Y:xxxxxxxxx MBK:xxxxxxxxx MBK2:xxxxxxxxx BK:xxxxxxxx x

TTL:xxxxxxxxxxxxxx x

HEAD DOT CNT. 2

C:xxxxxxxxx M:xxxxxxxxx Y:xxxxxxxxx MBK:xxxxxxxxx MBK2:xxxxxxxxx BK:xxxxxxxx x

TTL:xxxxxxxxxxxxxx x

HEAD INF. 1

1:YY/MM/DD YY/MM/DD YY/MM/DD YY/MM/DD 2:YY/MM/DD YY/MM/DD YY/MM/D D

3:xxxxxxxx xxxxxxxx xxxxxxx x

4:xxxxx 5:xxxxx 6:xxxxx 7:xxxxx 8:xxx 9:xxx 10:xxx 11:xxx 12:xx x

13:xxxxxxxx 19: 1

14: 1:YY/MM/DD xxxxxxxx-xxxx 2:YY/MM/DD xxxxxxxx-xxxx 3:YY/MM/DD xxxxxxxx-xxx x

4:YY/MM/DD xxxxxxxx-xxxx 5:YY/MM/DD xxxxxxxx-xxxx 6:YY/MM/DD xxxxxxxx-xxx x





19:YY/MM/DD xxxxxxxx-xxxx 20:YY/MM/DD xxxxxxxx-xxx x

15:A:x B:x C:x D:x E:x F: x

16:XX.XX YY/MM/DD XX.XX YY/MM/DD XX.XX YY/MM/D D

17:A:xxx B:xxx C:xxx D:xxx E:xxx F:xx x

18:AA:xxx AB:xxx BA:xxx BB:xxx CA:xxx CB:xxx DA:xxx DB:xxx EA:xxx EB:xxx FA:xxx FB:xx x

HEAD INF. 2

1:YY/MM/DD YY/MM/DD YY/MM/DD YY/MM/DD 2:YY/MM/DD YY/MM/DD YY/MM/D D

3:xxxxxxxx xxxxxxxx xxxxxxx x

4:xxxxx 5:xxxxx 6:xxxxx 7:xxxxx 8:xxx 9:xxx 10:xxx 11:xxx 12:xx x

13:xxxxxxxx 19: 1

14: 1:YY/MM/DD xxxxxxxx-xxxx 2:YY/MM/DD xxxxxxxx-xxxx 3:YY/MM/DD xxxxxxxx-xxx x






19:YY/MM/DD xxxxxxxx-xxxx 20:YY/MM/DD xxxxxxxx-xxx x

15:A:x B:x C:x D:x E:x F: x

16:XX.XX YY/MM/DD XX.XX YY/MM/DD XX.XX YY/MM/D D

17:A:xxx B:xxx C:xxx D:xxx E:xxx F:xx x

18:AA:xxx AB:xxx BA:xxx BB:xxx CA:xxx CB:xxx DA:xxx DB:xxx EA:xxx EB:xxx FA:xxx FB:xx x

F-7-67

Chapter 7

7-51

Chapter 7

5/5



S/N:xxxxxxxx Date:yyyyy/mm/d d

PARTS CNT .

PARTS CR1 : OK 0 0.0 0.0 0% 0. 0

PARTS CR2 : OK 0 0.0 0.0 0% 0. 0

PARTS CR3 : OK 0 0.0 0.0 0% 0. 0

PARTS CR4 : OK 0 0.0 0.0 0% 0. 0

PARTS CR5 : OK 0 0.0 0.0 0% 0. 0

PARTS SP1 : OK 0 0 0 0% 0

PARTS PG1 : OK 0 0 0 0% 0

PARTS HMa1 : OK 0 0 0 0% 0

PARTS MT1 : OK 0 0 0 0% 0

PARTS PL1 : OK 0 0 0 0% 0

PARTS Mi1 : OK 0 0 0 0% 0

PARTS CT1 : OK 0 0 0 0% 0

PARTS WF1 : OK 0 0 0 0% 0

PARTS WF2 : OK 0 0 0 0% 0

COGFF

CONDITION : 0

PARAM0-F : REF: xxxxxx xxxxxx xxxxxx xxxxxx PHASE: xxx xxx xxx xx x

AMP: xxx xxx xxx xxx RATE: xxx xxx xxx xx x

PARAM0-B : REF: xxxxxx xxxxxx xxxxxx xxxxxx PHASE: xxx xxx xxx xx x

AMP: xxx xxx xxx xxx RATE: xxx xxx xxx xx x

LF-A

ROLL LARGE : XXX.XXXX MIDDLE : XXX.XXXX SMALL : XXX.XXXX SMALLER : XXX.XXX X

CUT LARGE : XXX.XXXX MIDDLE : XXX.XXXX SMALL : XXX.XXXX SMALLER : XXX.XXX X

LF-B

ROLL LARGE : XXX.XXXX MIDDLE : XXX.XXXX SMALL : XXX.XXXX SMALLER : XXX.XXX X

CUT LARGE : XXX.XXXX MIDDLE : XXX.XXXX SMALL : XXX.XXXX SMALLER : XXX.XXX X

SCALE-A

ROLL LARGE : XXX MIDDLE : XXX SMALL : XXX SMALLER : XX X

CUT LARGE : XXX MIDDLE : XXX SMALL : XXX SMALLER : XX X

SCALE-B

ROLL LARGE : XXX MIDDLE : XXX SMALL : XXX SMALLER : XX X

CUT LARGE : XXX MIDDLE : XXX SMALL : XXX SMALLER : XX X

PV AUTO JUDGE : ON(NORMAL) , 0

F-7-68

7-52

Chapter 7

7.2 Special Mode

7.2.1 Special Modes for Servicing

This printer supports the following special modes in addition to the service mode:

0023-3043

- PCB replacement mode

- Download mode

- Counter display mode

1. PCB replacement mode

This mode is used when replacing the main PCB or MC relay PCB.

By executing this mode,

- Backup data of the settings and counter values stored in the MC relay PCB are moved to the new main PCB.

- The data such as the settings and counter values are copied to the MC relay PCB.

a) Entering the PCB replacement mode

Follow the same procedure as that for entering the service mode.

(With the [Load] button and [Navigate] button pressed down, turn on the [Power] button.)

When the printer starts up, compare the serial number memorized in the main PCB's EEPROM with that memorized in the MC relay PCB's EEPROM. If they do not match, or no serial number is memorized in either EEPROM, enter the PCB replacement mode.

b) Procedure

Select "CPU BOARD" or "MC BOARD" using the [ ] and [ ] buttons, and then press the [OK] button to determine it.

- CPU BOARD

Select this after replacing the main PCB.

The data in the MC relay PCB is copied to the main PCB.

- MC BOARD

Select this before replacing the MC relay PCB.

The data in the main controller PCB is copied to the MC relay PCB.

c) Exiting the PCB replacement mode

Turning off the [Power] button of the printer allows you to exit the PCB replacement mode.

For details on how to replace the PCB, see DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY > Points to Note on Disassembly and Reassembly > PCBs.

2. Download mode

Use this mode only when updating the firmware without performing initialization.

This mode can update the firmware even if the printhead and ink tanks have not been installed to the printer.

Reference:


a) Entering the download mode

1) Turning off the [Power] button of the printer.

2) With the [Stop] and [Navigate] buttons pressed down, turn on the [Power] button of the printer.

* Keep pressing the above buttons until "Initializing" appears on the display.

b) Procedure

When "Download Mode/Send Firmware" is shown on the display, transfer the firmware.

When downloading of the firmware is completed, the printer is turned off automatically.

3. Counter display mode

Use this mode to view only printer counter information.

a) Invoking counter display mode

1) Press the [MENU] button to keep [Printer Info] > [System Info] selected.

2) Press the [ ] button whole holding down the [MENU] button + [OK] button to invoke counter display mode.

b) How to view counter display mode

- S/N: Unit serial number

- CNT: Number of copies printed in A4 terms (unit: copies)

7-53

PARTS CATALOG

iPF786/785/781/780/765/

760/755/750

Mar 19 2014

PREFACE

This Parts Catalog contains listings of parts used

Diagrams are provided with the listings to aid the service technician in identifying clearly, the item to be orderd.

Whenever ordering parts, consult this Parts Catalog for all of the information pertaining to each item. Be sure to include, in the Parts Request, the full item description, the item part number, and the quantity.

COPYRIGHT (C) 1999 CANON INC.

Use of this manual should be strictly supervised to avoid disclosure of confidential information.

Contents

NUMERICAL INDEX iPF786/785/781/780/765/760/755/750(Numerical Index) .................. 1-1 iPF786/785/781/780/765/760/755/750(Parts Catalog)

05

06

07

08

01

02

03

04

PRINTER & ACCESSORIES .................................................2-1

COVERS ................................................................................2-4

ROLL UNIT ............................................................................2-7

ELECTRICAL PART ............................................................2-10

INK SUPPLY & PURGE UNIT .............................................2-12

LINEAR SCALE ...................................................................2-17

CARRIAGE UNIT .................................................................2-18

AIR FLOW FAN UNIT ..........................................................2-21

09

10

11

12

CUTTER UNIT .....................................................................2-23

PLATEN & GUIDE UNIT ......................................................2-25

PINCH ROLLER UNIT .........................................................2-27

FEED ROLLER UNIT ...........................................................2-28

13

R1

TOOL ...................................................................................2-30

STAND UNIT ST-33 .............................................................2-31

R2 STAND UNIT ST-34 .............................................................2-33

ZZA MECHANICAL STANDARD PARTS(HOW TO USE) ..........2-37

ZZB MECHANICAL STANDARD PARTS(SCREWS) .................2-38

ZZC MECHANICAL STANDARD PARTS(BOLTS) .....................2-45

ZZD MECHANICAL STANDARD PARTS(NUTS) .......................2-46

ZZE MECHANICAL STANDARD PARTS(RETAINING RINGS) .2-47

NUMERICAL INDEX iPF786/785/781/780/765/760/755/750(Numerical Index)

PARTS NUMBER

FIGURE

&

KEY NO.

- 1

- 2

- 3

- 4

- 18

- 19

- 23

- 24

-

-

-

-

- 16

- 5

- 13

- 14

- 8

- 7

- 20

- 12

- 32

- 5

- 14

- 34

- 19

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

- 2

- 2

- 3

- 3

-

- 2

- 1

- 2

- 2

- 2

- 8

- 22

- 23

- 3

- 9

- 15

- 23

07

08

09

10

03

04

05

06

01

01

01

02

01

01

01

01

11

12

13

R1

R2

07

04

05

01

04

R2

R1

R1

01

03

13

12

05

R1

R2

05

05

05

12

R1

R1

R2

R1

05

05

05

05

09

R1

01

05

AY3-4560-000

AY3-4573-000

AY3-4574-000

FB1-0733-000

FC7-7556-000

FC7-7556-000

FH2-7092-020

FK2-2416-000

FK2-6470-000

FY9-6022-000

NPN

NPN

NPN

NPN

NPN

NPN

NPN

NPN

NPN

NPN

NPN

NPN

NPN

NPN

NPN

NPN

NPN

NPN

NPN

NPN

NPN

QC1-0008-000

QC1-4850-000

QC1-5141-000

QC1-6912-000

QC2-0682-000

QC2-0687-000

QC2-0689-000

QC2-0690-000

QC2-0729-000

QC2-0736-000

QC2-0739-000

QC2-0832-000

QC2-0957-000

QC2-0998-000

QC2-1281-000

QC2-4116-000

QC2-4116-000

QC2-4346-000

QC2-5993-000

QC2-5993-000

QC2-6323-010

PARTS NUMBER

FIGURE

&

KEY NO.

- 17

- 18

- 19

- 20

- 25

- 33

- 34

- 35

- 7

- 13

- 5

- 6

- 22

- 1

- 14

- 15

- 13

- 16

- 20

- 12

- 5

- 30

- 17

- 13

- 22

- 29

- 28

- 27

- 32

- 33

- 21

- 36

- 23

- 28

- 17

- 8

- 18

- 8

- 10

- 6

- 4

- 35

- 4

- 5

- 6

- 3

- 25

- 24

- 9

- 29

- 15

- 35

07

07

07

07

07

07

07

07

R1

07

07

07

R1

10

12

11

07

07

05

05

08

02

R2

R1

R2

08

R2

02

01

R1

R1

08

03

03

03

03

05

05

05

07

03

03

03

03

08

08

08

05

09

08

08

08

QC2-6323-010

QC2-6633-000

QC2-6793-000

QC2-9785-000

QC2-9785-000

QC3-0133-000

QC3-0133-000

QC3-1437-000

QC3-1442-000

QC3-1445-000

QC3-1455-000

QC3-1458-010

QC3-1478-000

QC3-1480-000

QC3-1492-000

QC3-1511-000

QC3-1514-000

QC3-1515-000

QC3-1516-000

QC3-1519-000

QC3-1524-000

QC3-1525-000

QC3-1526-000

QC3-1527-000

QC3-1531-000

QC3-1532-000

QC3-1533-000

QC3-1534-010

QC3-1542-000

QC3-1550-000

QC3-1552-000

QC3-1553-000

QC3-1555-000

QC3-1568-000

QC3-1569-000

QC3-1570-000

QC3-1571-000

QC3-1572-000

QC3-1574-000

QC3-1612-000

QC3-1615-000

QC3-1616-000

QC3-1617-000

QC3-1621-000

QC3-1631-000

QC3-1633-000

QC3-1634-000

QC3-1635-000

QC3-1636-000

QC3-1638-000

QC3-1639-000

QC3-1647-000

PARTS NUMBER

FIGURE

&

KEY NO

- 16

- 26

- 1

- 8

- 14

- 15

- 2

- 7

- 8

- 28

- 10

- 30

- 3

- 9

- 7

- 27

- 23

- 18

- 18

- 6

- 1

- 6

- 24

- 1

- 1

- 2

- 3

- 4

- 5

- 44

- 45

- 5

- 6

- 11

- 2

- 19

- 9

- 16

- 9

- 10

- 6

- 7

- 8

- 9

- 10

- 21

- 33

- 52

- 34

- 35

- 6

- 10

01

01

01

01

02

03

03

01

02

02

02

02

03

02

07

07

01

R1

R2

R1

R2

R1

03

03

03

03

03

03

03

03

03

02

03

02

R2

06

03

09

08

03

12

02

R1

R2

R2

07

03

03

02

R1

R2

R1

QC3-1648-000

QC3-1649-000

QC3-1650-010

QC3-1651-000

QC3-1652-000

QC3-1654-000

QC3-1658-000

QC3-1659-000

QC3-1661-000

QC3-1668-000

QC3-1672-000

QC3-1683-000

QC3-1684-000

QC3-1686-010

QC3-1690-000

QC3-1695-000

QC3-1696-000

QC3-1697-000

QC3-1698-000

QC3-1706-000

QC3-1707-000

QC3-1709-000

QC3-1710-000

QC3-1711-000

QC3-1712-000

QC3-1713-000

QC3-1714-000

QC3-1731-000

QC3-1731-000

QC3-1732-000

QC3-1732-000

QC3-1739-000

QC3-1742-000

QC3-1746-000

QC3-1746-000

QC3-1747-000

QC3-1747-000

QC3-1751-000

QC3-1752-010

QC3-1759-000

QC3-1760-000

QC3-1766-000

QC3-1808-000

QC3-1818-000

QC3-1819-000

QC3-1829-000

QC3-1850-000

QC3-1878-000

QC3-1879-000

QC3-1900-000

QC3-1914-000

QC3-1914-000

1-1


PARTS NUMBER

FIGURE

&

KEY NO.

- 56

- 57

- 58

- 70

- 31

- 26

- 32

- 27

- 38

- 1

- 68

- 59

- 18

- 11

- 31

- 69

- 28

- 6

- 29

- 30

- 32

- 32

- 32

- 17

- 21

- 9

- 4

- 24

- 12

- 5

- 14

- 23

- 13

- 53

- 20

- 21

- 22

- 19

- 16

- 15

- 10

- 11

- 21

- 39

- 20

- 6

- 33

- 49

- 50

- 51

- 52

- 19

R2

R2

R1

R2

R2

R2

R2

R2

R2

R2

R2

R2

R2

R2

R2

R2

R1

R2

06

05

05

02

05

05

03

05

10

R2

05

05

R2

R2

02

02

02

02

02

02

02

02

02

02

07

01

05

05

05

02

R1

R2

05

05

QC3-1916-010

QC3-1921-000

QC3-1928-000

QC3-1929-000

QC3-1930-000

QC3-1931-000

QC3-1938-000

QC3-1939-000

QC3-1943-000

QC3-1944-000

QC3-1945-000

QC3-1946-000

QC3-1947-000

QC3-1948-000

QC3-1949-000

QC3-1950-000

QC3-1953-000

QC3-1955-000

QC3-1958-000

QC3-1959-000

QC3-1962-000

QC3-1963-000

QC3-1969-000

QC3-1971-000

QD1-0004-000

QD1-0004-000

QD1-0005-000

QD1-0005-000

QD1-0006-000

QD1-0270-000

QD1-0287-000

QD1-0438-000

QD1-1095-000

QD1-1095-000

QD1-1225-000

QD1-1230-000

QD1-1231-000

QD1-1232-000

QD1-1233-000

QD1-1234-000

QD1-1235-000

QD1-1238-000

QD1-1239-000

QD1-1240-000

QD1-1245-000

QD1-1253-000

QD1-1254-000

QD1-1278-000

QD1-1281-000

QD1-1282-000

QE1-2819-010

QH2-2732-000

PARTS NUMBER

FIGURE

&

KEY NO.

- 11

- 9

- 10

- 7

- 8

- 43

- 42

- 4

- 1

- 16

- 14

- 21

- 13

- 15

- 31

- 22

- 25

- 37

- 38

- 42

- 11

- 37

- 24

- 16

- 17

- 2

- 39

- 38

- 71

- 5

- 4

- 3

- 2

- 11

- 4

- 3

- 41

- 10

- 17

- 18

- 20

- 21

- 20

- 36

- 11

- 6

- 3

- 26

- 6

- 19

- 22

- 37

QK1-0440-000

QK1-0440-000

QK1-0550-000

QK1-0550-000

QK1-1392-000

QK1-1396-010

QK1-2081-000

QK1-2086-000

QK1-5066-000

QK1-5067-000

QK1-5068-000

QK1-5080-000

QK1-5097-000

QK1-5098-000

QK1-5099-000

QK1-5141-000

QK1-5143-000

QK1-9687-000

QK1-9860-000

QL2-3157-010

QL2-3158-010

QL2-3159-010

QL2-3160-010

QL2-3172-030

QL2-3173-010

QL2-3175-000

QL2-3175-000

QL2-3182-000

QL2-3183-000

QL2-3203-000

QM3-1355-010 05

QM3-3267-010 01

07

12

08

07

10

02

02

03

05

10

10

10

01

04

07

07

07

04

01

01

QM3-3269-010 01

QM3-4569-010 07

QM3-4574-000 07

QM3-4582-000 04

QM3-4583-000 09

QM3-4584-000 09

QM3-4585-020 04

QM3-4587-000 04

QM3-4590-000 07

QM3-4591-000 07

QM3-4592-000 03

QM3-4599-000 08

QM3-4600-000 05

QM3-4601-000 05

QM3-4602-000 03

QM3-4611-000 12

QM3-4613-000 07

QM3-4932-000 08

QM3-5803-010 12

QM3-5804-010 12

01

01

03

08

05

08

05

09

12

12

PARTS NUMBER

FIGURE

&

KEY NO

- 6

- 25

- 1

- 1

- 10

- 11

- 31

- 15

- 7

- 8

- 43

- 4

- 11

- 16

- 2

- 2

- 11

- 1

- 17

- 1

- 15

- 27

- 42

- 43

- 36

- 9

- 10

- 17

- 32

- 16

- 49

- 7

- 1

- 19

- 25

- 26

- 2

- 5

- 1

- 3

- 4

- 12

- 13

- 14

- 8

- 12

- 2

- 9

- 7

- 4

- 1

- 1

03

02

02

02

05

05

03

03

09

08

08

05

07

08

02

09

07

02

02

03

01

01

11

04

04

07

08

08

12

11

07

07

11

02

10

07

02

05

02

02

03

05

05

05

R2

02

08

02

01

R1

R2

R1

QM3-5805-000

QM3-5808-000

QM3-5815-000

QM3-5816-020

QM3-5817-000

QM3-5819-010

QM3-5820-010

QM3-5824-020

QM3-5826-010

QM3-5831-000

QM3-5833-000

QM3-5841-000

QM3-5842-000

QM3-5844-030

QM3-5846-030

QM3-5853-000

QM3-5854-000

QM3-5856-020

QM3-5861-010

QM3-5862-020

QM3-5870-000

QM3-5876-000

QM3-5877-010

QM3-5878-000

QM3-5879-000

QM3-5882-000

QM3-5883-020

QM3-5885-000

QM3-5886-000

QM3-5887-020

QM3-5889-000

QM3-5890-000

QM3-5893-000

QM3-5894-000

QM3-5894-000

QM3-5898-000

QM3-5898-000

QM3-5904-000

QM3-5905-000

QM3-5908-000

QM3-5909-000

QM3-5910-010

QM3-5911-000

QM3-5942-000

QM3-5946-000

QM3-5947-000

QM3-5949-020

QM3-5951-010

QM3-5953-010

QM3-5954-000

QM3-5955-000

QM3-5956-000

1-2

PARTS NUMBER

FIGURE

&

KEY NO.

- 63

- 1

- 1

- 26

- 2

- 7

- 7

- 27

- 61

- 65

- 1

- 1

- 31

- 7

- 8

- 62

- 28

- 12

- 26

- 25

- 31

- 29

- 32

- 24

- 2

- 72

- 66

- 54

- 1

- 1

- 7

- 8

- 3

- 11

- 11

- 1

- 1

- 19

- 73

- 67

- 55

- 17

- 1

- 60

- 64

- 12

- 15

- 11

- 11

- 18

- 17

- 41

09

02

02

05

02

02

02

02

05

05

05

05

04

07

05

05

05

05

05

04

04

07

R2

R2

03

02

05

09

10

05

02

04

01

03

03

03

05

09

05

05

03

03

03

06

04

04

08

11

04

04

05

05

QM3-5957-000

QM3-5961-000

QM3-5971-010

QM3-5988-010

QM3-5996-000

QM3-5997-000

QM3-7911-000

QM4-8157-000

QM4-8158-000

QM4-8159-000

QM4-8160-010

QM4-8458-000

QM4-8459-000

QM4-8460-000

QM4-8463-000

QM4-8464-000

QM4-8465-000

QM4-8467-000

QM4-8470-000

QM4-8471-000

QM4-8477-000

QM4-8478-000

QM4-8480-000

QM4-8483-000

QM4-8494-000

QM7-7077-000

QM7-7084-000

QM7-7100-000

QM7-7231-000

QM7-7289-000

QM7-7290-000

QM7-7291-000

QM7-7296-000

QM7-7297-000

QM7-7298-000

QM7-7299-000

QM7-7319-000

QM7-7320-000

QU1-0359-000

QU1-0360-000

QU1-0363-000

QU1-0365-000

QU1-0366-000

QU1-0367-000

QU1-0369-000

QU1-0370-000

QU1-0371-000

QU1-0372-000

QU1-0373-000

QU1-0374-010

QU1-0375-000

QU1-2437-000


PARTS NUMBER

FIGURE

&

KEY NO.

- 11

- 13

- 46

- 5

- 41

- 22

- 12

- 40

- 5

- 3

- 3

- 3

- 39

- 48

- 44

- 21

- 14

- 6

- 45

- 12

- 45

- 36

- 26

- 47

- 22

- 7

- 3

- 1

- 48

- 9

- 13

- 38

- 30

- 2

- 8

- 39

- 40

- 12

- 51

- 34

- 25

- 30

- 8

- 10

- 4

- 24

- 30

- 40

- 3

- 3

- 29

- 18

QU1-2438-000

QU1-2439-000

QU1-2440-000

QU1-2441-000

QU1-2442-000

QU1-2443-000

QU1-2445-000

QU1-2446-000

QU1-2447-000

QU1-2449-000

WT2-0204-000

WT2-5056-000

WT2-5056-000

WT2-5056-000

WT2-5056-000

WT2-5694-000

WT2-5694-000

WT2-5694-000

WT2-5694-000

WT2-5694-000

WT2-5737-000

WT2-5737-000

WT2-5738-000

WT2-5738-000

WT2-5738-000

WT2-5981-000

XA9-0949-000

XA9-1386-000

XA9-1386-000

XA9-1386-000

QU1-2450-000

QU1-2451-000

QU1-2456-000

QU1-8264-000

QU1-8279-000

QU1-8293-000

QY9-0037-000

QY9-0103-000

RK2-2884-000 03

WC4-5052-000 05

WC4-5052-000 08

WG8-5776-000 03

WG8-5776-000 05

WG8-5776-000 05

WG8-5776-000 09

WG8-5849-000 05

01

R2

13

13

03

07

03

07

WG8-5849-000 08

WG8-5849-000 12

WM2-5278-000 04

WM2-5280-000 04

WM2-5285-000 04

WT2-0136-000 05

11

05

07

12

07

07

07

07

05

03

04

05

12

07

08

09

05

12

R2

01

03

05

12

03

04

05

05

05

08

09

PARTS NUMBER

FIGURE

&

KEY NO

- 23

- 13

- 9

- 18

- 23

- 50

- 4

- 501

- 501

- 501

- 501

- 502

- 502

- 501

- 503

- 46

- 44

- 27

- 14

- 10

- 9

- 15

- 501

- 501

- 501

- 502

- 502

- 502

- 501

- 501

- 503

- 502

- 502

- 503

- 503

- 37

- 503

- 502

- 504

- 502

- 503

- 503

- 504

- 501

05

07

08

R1

03

05

04

02

12

05

09

04

09

10

11

12

R2

09

03

05

08

12

02

03

04

05

08

09

10

12

07

08

R1

R2

04

09

R2

R2

01

12

01

01

03

R2

XA9-1386-000

XA9-1386-000

XA9-1386-000

XA9-1386-000

XA9-1928-000

XA9-1928-000

XA9-1928-000

XA9-1928-000

XA9-1928-000

XA9-1928-000

XA9-1928-000

XA9-1928-000

XA9-1928-000

XA9-1928-000

XB1-2200-507

XB1-2260-409

XB1-2260-409

XB1-2300-407

XB1-2300-409

XB1-2300-607

XB1-2400-607

XB4-5300-807

XB4-5300-807

XB4-5300-807

XB4-5300-807

XB4-5300-807

XB4-5300-807

XB4-5400-807

XB4-5401-007

XB4-5401-007

XB4-5401-007

XB4-5401-007

XB4-6301-205

XB4-6302-505

XB6-7300-607

XB6-7300-607

XB7-2301-009

XB7-2301-009

XD1-4200-402

XD2-1100-242

XD2-1100-322

XD2-1100-502

XD2-1100-502

XZ9-0697-000

1-3

iPF786/785/781/780/765/760/755/

750(Parts Catalog)

iPF786

120/230V

230(CHN)

230(KOR)

Q51-2435-

000

Q51-2436-

000

Q51-2438-

000

iPF785

120/230V

100V

Q51-2434-

000

Q51-2437-

000

iPF781

120/230V

230(CHN)

230(KOR)

Q51-2425-

000

Q51-2426-

000

Q51-2428-

000

iPF780

120/230V

100V

Q51-2424-

000

Q51-2427-

000

iPF765

120/230V

230(CHN)

100V

230(KOR)

Q51-2364-

000

Q51-2366-

000

Q51-2367-

000

Q51-2368-

000

iPF760

120/230V

230(CHN)

100V

230(KOR)

Q51-2354-

000

Q51-2356-

000

Q51-2357-

000

Q51-2358-

000

iPF755

120/230V

230(CHN)

100V

230(KOR)

Q51-1894-

000

Q51-1896-

000

Q51-1897-

000

Q51-1898-

000

iPF750

120/230V

230(CHN)

Q51-1764-

000

Q51-1766-

000

100V

230(KOR)

Q51-1767-

000

Q51-1768-

000

STAND UNIT ST-33

Q51-2560-

000

STAND UNIT ST-34

Q51-2800-

000

Contents

05

06

07

08

01

02

03

04

PRINTER & ACCESSORIES ..............................................................................2-1

COVERS.............................................................................................................2-4

ROLL UNIT .........................................................................................................2-7

ELECTRICAL PART .........................................................................................2-10

INK SUPPLY & PURGE UNIT ..........................................................................2-12

LINEAR SCALE ................................................................................................2-17

CARRIAGE UNIT..............................................................................................2-18

AIR FLOW FAN UNIT .......................................................................................2-21

09

10

11

12

CUTTER UNIT ..................................................................................................2-23

PLATEN & GUIDE UNIT...................................................................................2-25

PINCH ROLLER UNIT ......................................................................................2-27

FEED ROLLER UNIT........................................................................................2-28

13 TOOL ................................................................................................................2-30

R1 STAND UNIT ST-33..........................................................................................2-31

R2 STAND UNIT ST-34..........................................................................................2-33

ZZA MECHANICAL STANDARD PARTS(HOW TO USE) .......................................2-37

ZZB MECHANICAL STANDARD PARTS(SCREWS)...............................................2-38

ZZC MECHANICAL STANDARD PARTS(BOLTS)...................................................2-45

ZZD MECHANICAL STANDARD PARTS(NUTS).....................................................2-46

ZZE MECHANICAL STANDARD PARTS(RETAINING RINGS) ..............................2-47

FIGURE 01

PRINTER & ACCESSORIES

17

18

19

SEE FIGURE R1, R2

STAND UNIT

20

501

13

14

24

15

503

7

5

9

6

1

25

3

21

2

22

4

23

16

502

26

11

26

502

8

12

10

503

2-1

FIGURE

& KEY

NO.

24

25

26

501

20

21

22

23

16

17

18

19

12

13

14

15

10

11

8

9

6

7

4

5

2

3

2

2

Fig.01

1

2

2

PARTS

NUMBER

QU1-0369-000

QM3-3267-010

QC1-6912-000

QM3-3269-010

QM3-5893-000

QK1-5097-000

QK1-5098-000

QK1-1392-000

QK1-5099-000

QH2-2732-000

QK1-1396-010

FH2-7092-020

QC2-6793-000

QU1-8279-000

XA9-1386-000

XB6-7300-607

NPN

NPN

NPN

NPN

NPN

NPN

NPN

FB1-0733-000

QM3-5889-000

QC3-1709-000

QC3-1710-000

QC3-1711-000

QC3-1712-000

QC3-1713-000

QC3-1714-000

QM3-5890-000

R

A

N

K

Q'TY

2

3

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

RF

RF

RF

1

RF

RF

RF

RF

DESCRIPTION

PRINTER & ACCESSORIES

PRINTHEAD

INK TANK (MBK)

INK TANK (PBK)

INK TANK (C)

INK TANK (M)

INK TANK (Y)

BRUSH, CLEANING

SPOOL SHAFT UNIT

LIMITER, TORQUE

ROLLER, LIMIT, LEFT

CLUTCH, ONE-WAY

ROLLER, LIMIT, RIGHT

CAP, SPOOL, LEFT

CAP, SPOOL, RIGHT

FLANGE UNIT (R)

GEAR, 15T

FLANGE UNIT (L)

LEVER, LOCK, FLANGE

ROLL HOLDER UNIT (L)

ROLL HOLDER UNIT (R)

CORD, POWER

CORD, POWER

CORD, POWER

CORD, POWER

CORD, POWER

CORD, POWER

WIRE, GROUND

SPACER, ROLL

LABEL,ROLL HOLDER

SCREW, RS, M3X8

SCREW, CROSS-RECESS, FCH

2-2

SERIAL NUMBER/

REMARKS

S

V

C

100V

120V UL

230V

230V AUS

230V KOR

230V CHN

100V

FIGURE

& KEY

NO.

502

503

PARTS

NUMBER

XD2-1100-322

XD2-1100-502

R

A

N

K

Q'TY

2

2

DESCRIPTION

RETAINING RING (E-TYPE)


SERIAL NUMBER/

REMARKS

S

V

C

2-3

FIGURE 02

COVERS

14 iPF686/685/681/680

1

6

23

15

17

501

16

501

18

23

3

1

4

2

5

7

10

23

20

12

19

25

21

24

11

9

22 iPF786/785/781/780

27

28

30 501

26

29

501

13

28

32

30 501

8

31

29

501

2-4

1

13

14

15

16

11

11

11

12

17

17

18

18

10

11

8

9

7

8

6

7

5

6

3

4

1

2

1

1

FIGURE

& KEY

NO.

Fig.02

1

PARTS

NUMBER

NPN

QM3-5842-000

R

A

N

K

Q'TY

RF COVERS

1

DESCRIPTION

OPERATION PANEL UNIT

QM3-5904-000

QM3-5942-000

QM4-8157-000

QM4-8158-000

QM3-5878-000

QM3-5879-000

QM3-5882-000

QM3-5911-000

QC3-1683-000

QM3-5947-000

QM4-8483-000

QC3-1829-000

QD1-0438-000

QM4-8471-000

QM4-8470-000

QM4-8494-000

QC3-1695-000

QC3-1696-000

QC3-1697-000

QC3-1698-000

QC3-1690-000

QD1-1245-000

QM3-5885-000

QM4-8477-000

QM3-5886-000

QM4-8478-000

QC3-1742-000

QM3-5908-000

QM3-5909-000





KEY, SCROLL

KEY, LOAD/CUT

KEY, OK

KEY, POWER

COVER, TOP, LEFT

COVER, TOP, LEFT

LEFT COVER UNIT

LEFT COVER UNIT

RIGHT COVER UNIT

RIGHT COVER UNIT

CAP, BLANKING

INK TANK COVER UNIT (L)

INK TANK COVER UNIT (R)




FRONT COVER UNIT (L)

FRONT COVER UNIT (R)

UPPER COVER UNIT

UPPER REAR COVER UNIT

DAMPER

FRONT COVER UNIT

FRONT COVER UNIT

COVER, CUTTER GUARD

COVER, CUTTER GUARD

1

1

3

1

1

1

1

1

1

3

3

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

SERIAL NUMBER/

REMARKS

S

V

C iPF765/760/755/

750:ENGLISH iPF765/760/755/

750:JAPANESE iPF785/780:ENGLISH iPF785/780:JAPANESE iPF786/781 iPF765/760/755/750 iPF765/760/755/750 iPF765/760/755/750 iPF765/760/755/750 iPF765/760/755/750 iPF786/785/781/780 iPF765/760/755/750 iPF786/785/781/780 iPF765/760/755/750 iPF786/785/781/780 iPF765/760/755/750 iPF750 iPF755 iPF760 iPF765 iPF765/760/755/750 iPF765/760/755/750 iPF765/760/755/750 iPF786/785/781/780 iPF765/760/755/750 iPF786/785/781/780

2-5

FIGURE

& KEY

NO.

31

32

32

32

27

28

29

30

32

501

23

24

25

26

19

20

21

22

PARTS

NUMBER

QC3-1668-000

QL2-3173-010

QL2-3172-030

QC3-1553-000

XA9-1928-000

QC3-1900-000

QC2-6633-000

QD1-1235-000

QD1-1239-000

QD1-1240-000

QD1-1253-000

QD1-1254-000

QD1-1234-000

QD1-1238-000

QD1-1281-000

QD1-1278-000

QD1-1282-000

XB4-5300-807

R

A

N

K

Q'TY

1

1

1

1

1

12

2

2

1

2

1

1

AR

1

1

1

3

2

DESCRIPTION

CAP, SCREW

COVER, DELIVERY

COVER, DELEVERY, RIGHT

COVER, MAINTENANCE CARTRIDGE

SCREW, TP, M3X8

PAD

LABEL

FRONT COVER (L)

INK TANK COVER TOP (L)

INK TANK COVER

PLATE, SUPPORT

JOINT, INK TANK COVER

FRONT COVER (R)

INK TANK COVER TOP (R)




SCREW, P, M3X8

SERIAL NUMBER/

REMARKS iPF786/785/781/780 iPF786/785/781/780 iPF786/785/781/780 iPF786/785/781/780 iPF786/785/781/780 iPF786/785/781/780 iPF780 iPF781 iPF785 iPF786

S

V

C

2-6

FIGURE 03

ROLL UNIT

502

A

19

47

20

502

8

9

47

12

A

502

47

18

502

48

502

44

46

16

50

47

14

502

2

50

5

2

7

2

45

7

SEE FIGURE 01

2

7

43

502

2

502

47

50

502

15

33

18

13 19

21

1

502

502

47

B

11

C

502

502

50

6

17

42

(J62)

(J55)

46

52

501

37

36

D

22

24

23

503

25

24

26

50

31

E

32

40

501

39

47

41

38

(J40)

49

35

(J36)

34

(J38)

51

27

(J56)

47

E

(J55)

(J54)

(J39)

1

3

(J50)

30

29

503

28

D

B

4

(J60)

10

502

2

1

502

C

2-7

FIGURE

& KEY

NO.

29

30

31

32

24

25

26

27

20

21

22

23

16

17

18

19

12

13

14

15

10

11

8

9

6

7

4

5

Fig.03

1

2

3

PARTS

NUMBER

QC3-1631-000

QC3-1638-000

QC3-1819-000

QC3-1938-000

QC3-1633-000

QC3-1648-000

QC3-1647-000

QC3-1818-000

QU1-0375-000

QU1-0371-000

QU1-0370-000

QM3-5953-010

QU1-0373-000

QC3-1636-000

QU1-0372-000

QU1-0374-010

NPN

QM3-5877-010

QC3-1661-000

FK2-6470-000

QM3-4592-000

QC3-1635-000

QC3-1654-000

QM3-5876-000

QC3-1752-010

QC3-1672-000

QC3-1658-000

QC3-1659-000

QC3-1634-000

QC3-1639-000

QC3-1759-000

QC3-1760-000

R

A

N

K

Q'TY

1

1

1

1

1

1

3

1

1

1

1

1

2

2

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

3

1

1

9

1

RF

3

DESCRIPTION

ROLL UNIT

FEED GUIDE UNIT (L)

ROLLER, GUIDE

PHOTO-SENSOR, KUA0055C

HARNESS, WIRE, PE

COVER, REAR, LEFT

COVER, REAR, RIGHT

FEED GUIDE UNIT (U)

COVER, ROLL, LEFT

SPRING, TORSION

COVER, ROLL, RIGHT

SPRING, TORSION

MOUNT, SPOOL, LEFT

MOUNT, SPOOL, RIGHT

RAIL, SPOOL, LEFT

RAIL, SPOOL, RIGHT

HOLDER, SPOOL, LEFT

HOLDER, SPOOL, RIGHT

COVER, SUPPORT

DAMPER, AIR

HOLDER, DAMPER, LEFT

HOLDER, DAMPER, RIGHT

COVER, SPOOL GEAR

COVER, GEAR

GEAR, 25T

GEAR, 17T/28T

GEAR, 18T/54T

ENCODER UNIT

GEAR, 50T

LIMITER, TORQUE

GEAR, 50T

GEAR, 32T/96T

2-8

SERIAL NUMBER/

REMARKS

S

V

C

FIGURE

& KEY

NO.

45

46

47

48

41

42

43

44

37

38

39

40

33

34

35

36

501

502

503

49

50

51

52

PARTS

NUMBER

QC3-1649-000

QC3-1651-000

QC3-1652-000

QL2-3175-000

QK1-2081-000

WG8-5776-000

QU1-2449-000

QU1-2450-000

QM3-7911-000

QM3-4602-000

QM3-5887-020

QC3-1706-000

QC3-1707-000

WT2-5694-000

XA9-1386-000

RK2-2884-000

QM3-5870-000

XA9-1928-000

QU1-2456-000

QC3-1650-010

XB1-2300-409

XB4-5401-007

XD2-1100-502

R

A

N

K

Q'TY

10

1

1

3

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

4

19

2

1

1

1

AR

DESCRIPTION

CAP, ROLL, RIGHT

FLAG, SENSOR

ARM, SENSOR FLAG

SOLENOID

MOTOR, STEPPING

PHOTO-INTERRUPTER, SG2481

SPRING, TENSION

SPRING, COMPRESSION

HARNESS, WIRE, ROLL

HARNESS, WIRE, MOTOR

ROLL COVER UNIT

GUIDE, SLIDE

LOCK, SLIDE GUIDE

CLIP CLAMP, WIRE

SCREW, RS, M3X8

ENVIRONMENT SENSOR PCB ASS'Y

GEAR UNIT

SCREW, TP, M3X8

SPRING, TORSION

HOLDER, SENSOR FLAG

SCREW, MACHINE M3X4

SCREW, M4X10


SERIAL NUMBER/

REMARKS

S

V

C

2-9

FIGURE 04

ELECTRICAL PART

1

6

5

5 iPF786/785

/765/755

9

9

4

6 iPF786/785

/765/755

10

6

(CN1)

(CN1)

A

5

11

A iPF765/760/755/750

503

502

(J39)

(J54)

(J42)

(J50)

(J52)

(J47)

(J31)

(J37)

(J51)

(J24)

(J53)

(J41)

8

(J3201)

(J3202)

(J2601)

2

4

3

(J2801)

(J2951)

(J3001)

501

(J8)

(J11)

(J4)

(J5)

(J21)

(J14)

(J20)

(J4102)

(J3901)

(J3302)

(J9)

(J13)

(J10)

(J3301)

(J4501)

(J30) iPF786/785/781/780

(J47)

(J31)

(J52)

(J37)

(J51)

(J24)

(J53)

(J39)

(J54)

(J42)

(J50)

(J41)

8

(J3201)

(J2701)

(J2601)

(J23)

(J2801)

(J2951)

(J3001)

(J8)

(J11)

(J4)

(J5)

(J21)

(J14)

(J15)

(J4102)

(J3901)

(J4501)

(J3301)

(J9)

(J10)

(J13)

7

7

4

2-10

FIGURE

& KEY

NO.

10

11

8

9

7

8

6

7

501

502

503

4

5

3

3

3

3

1

2

1

1

1

1

Fig.04

1

1

1

PARTS

NUMBER

WT2-5738-000

QM3-4585-020

QM7-7296-000

QM3-4587-000

QM7-7297-000

FC7-7556-000

QK1-5080-000

QM3-4582-000

XB1-2300-407

XB1-2400-607

XD1-4200-402

NPN

QM3-5820-010

QM3-5819-010

QM4-8159-000

QM4-8160-010

QM7-7289-000

QM7-7319-000

QM7-7290-000

QM7-7320-000

QK1-5141-000

FK2-2416-000

WM2-5278-000

WM2-5280-000

WM2-5285-000

XA9-1928-000

WT2-5694-000

R

A

N

K

Q'TY

1

1

1

2

1

1

7

1

4

1

1

AR

3

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

RF

1

DESCRIPTION

ELECTRICAL PART

MAIN CONTROLLER ASS'Y








POWER SUPPLY ASS'Y

HDD, WD800BEVT-22ZCT0

HDD, MK1676GSX(HDD2J96QSL)

HDD, MK2575GSX(HDD2L05QSL)

HDD, MQ01ABF032

SCREW, TP, M3X8

CLIP CLAMP, WIRE

CLAMP, CABLE

HARNESS, WIRE, LEFT

HARNESS, WIRE, LEFT

HARNESS, WIRE, RIGHT

HARNESS, WIRE, RIGHT

SADDLE, WIRE

HARNESS, WIRE, HDD

HARNESS, INLET

SCREW, MACH, TRUSS HEAD, M3X4


WASHER, TOOTHED LOCK, M4

SERIAL NUMBER/ iPF750 iPF755 iPF760 iPF765 iPF780 iPF781 iPF785 iPF786

REMARKS iPF755(80GB) iPF755(160GB) iPF765(250GB) iPF786/785(320GB) iPF765/760/755/750 iPF786/785/781/780 iPF765/760/755/750 iPF786/785/781/780 iPF765/755 iPF765/755

S

V

C

2-11

FIGURE 05

INK SUPPLY & PURGE UNIT

19

A

21

34

35

33

20

37

(J20)

(J14)

18

503

503

503

503

A

(J19)

(J16)

(J15)

(J17)

503

43

503

30

26

27

25

501

24

23

28

29

31

33

B

21

34

35

19

504 504

16

20

18

38

B

(J29)

(J27)

(J30)

(J25)

(J24)

(J26)

503

503

503

503

503

30

42

503

26

27

25

501

24

23

28

29

32

5

8

7

17

10

41

48

45

10

41

46

22

9

502

39

6

40

41

39

2

41

4

3

1

11

46

12

503

44

36

501

13

10

15

49

50

52

13

53

51

46 46

2-12

iPF786/785/781/780

60

59

(FT206)

(FT204)

(FT201)

(FT205)

(FT200)

(FT202)

(J14)

(J15)

(FT203)

62

64

(J203)

(J16)

(J17)

(J19)

503

69

71

30

66

503

56

57

58

501

70

68

54

56

57

58

61

46

72

46

59

(FT206)

(FT205)

65

(FT200)

(FT203)

(FT202)

(J14)

(J15)

(J16)

(J17)

(J203)

63

(J19)

503

69

71

30

67

503

501

70

68

55

5

8

7

10

73

41

48

45

10

41

46

22

9

502

39

6

40

41

39

2

41

4

3

1

11

46

12

503

44

36 501

13

10

15

49

50

52

13

53

51

46 46

2-13

FIGURE

& KEY

NO.

29

30

30

31

25

26

27

28

21

22

23

24

17

18

19

20

12

13

15

16

10

11

8

9

6

7

4

5

Fig.05

1

2

3

PARTS

NUMBER

QM3-5856-020

QC2-0729-000

QC2-0736-000

QC2-1281-000

QM3-1355-010

XA9-1386-000

QC2-0739-000

QC2-0832-000

QC3-1612-000

QK1-0550-000

QU1-0366-000

QU1-0367-000

QU1-2443-000

WG8-5776-000

WG8-5776-000

QM3-5910-010

NPN

QC2-0682-000

QC2-0687-000

QC2-0689-000

QC2-0690-000

QC3-1550-000

QK1-0440-000

QU1-0363-000

QU1-2447-000

WC4-5052-000

WG8-5849-000

QM3-5988-010

QM3-5957-000

QC3-1542-000

FC7-7556-000

QM3-5862-020

R

A

N

K

Q'TY

2

1

2

4

2

4

2

2

2

2

2

2

6

6

1

6

1

1

1

3

3

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

RF

1

DESCRIPTION

INK SUPPLY & PURGE UNIT

RING

GEAR, LIFT, IDLER B

GEAR, LIFT, DOUBLE B

GEAR, LIFT, DOUBLE C

COUPLING

MOTOR, STEPPING DC 10W UNDER

GEAR, LIFT, 30T

SPRING, COMPRESSION

MICRO SWITCH

PHOTOINTERRUPTER, GP1S173LCS0F

PURGE UNIT

MOTOR, DC

ABSORBER, INK

SADDLE, WIRE

INK SUPPLY UNIT (L)

INK SUPPLY UNIT (R)

HOLDER, INK TANK

GUIDE, LIGHT

LEVER, INK TANK

INK TANK ROM PCB UNIT

SCREW, RS, M3X8

GEAR, VALVE 2

BELT, TIMING

CAM GEAR, 38T

MOTOR, 24V, DC

GEAR, 22T/70T

GEAR, 14T

SPRING, TORSION



INK SUPPLY MOUNT UNIT (L)

SERIAL NUMBER/

REMARKS iPF765/760/755/750 iPF765/760/755/750 iPF765/760/755/750 iPF765/760/755/750 iPF765/760/755/750 iPF765/760/755/750 iPF765/760/755/750 iPF765/760/755/750 iPF765/760/755/750 iPF765/760/755/750 iPF765/760/755/750 iPF765/760/755/750 iPF765/760/755/750 iPF765/760/755/750 iPF786/785/781/780 iPF765/760/755/750

S

V

C

2-14

FIGURE

& KEY

NO.

61

62

63

64

57

58

59

60

53

54

55

56

49

50

51

52

44

45

46

48

40

41

42

43

36

37

38

39

32

33

34

35

PARTS

NUMBER

QC3-1928-000

QC3-1929-000

QC3-1930-000

QC3-1931-000

QC3-1939-000

QM4-8467-000

QM4-8463-000

QD1-1230-000

QD1-1231-000

QD1-1232-000

QD1-0287-000

QM7-7077-000

QM7-7100-000

QM7-7298-000

QM7-7299-000

QM7-7084-000

QM3-5861-010

QC3-1615-000

QC3-1616-000

QC3-1617-000

QM3-5956-000

QM3-4600-000

QM3-4601-000

WT2-0136-000

WT2-5737-000

WT2-5694-000

QM3-5954-000

QM3-5955-000

WT2-5056-000

WT2-5738-000

XA9-1928-000

WT2-0204-000

R

A

N

K

Q'TY

1

1

1

1

5

1

4

4

1

2

1

1

1

1

1

1

AR

1

2

1

1

1

3

8

1

4

1

1

4

6

1

2

DESCRIPTION

INK SUPPLY MOUNT UNIT (R)

ABSORBER, INK

ABSORBER, INK

ABSORBER, INK

HEAD MANAGEMENT SENSOR UNIT

HARNESS, WIRE, TANK, LEFT

HARNESS, WIRE, TANK (R)

CLAMP, CORD

CLIP, CABLE

CLIP CLAMP, WIRE

INK SUPPLY TANK UNIT (R)

INK SUPPLY TANK UNIT (L)

CLIP, CORD

CLAMP, CABLE

SCREW, TP, M3X8

CLAMP, CORD

MOUNT, JOINT, INK

JOINT A, INK

JOINT B, INK

CLAMP

TAPE, MOUNT, JOINT, INK

INK SUPPLY MOUNT UNIT (L)

INK SUPPLY MOUNT UNIT (R)

ABSORBER, INK

ABSORBER, INK

ABSORBER, INK

LEVER, INK TANK

INK TANK ROM PCB UNIT (L)

INK TANK ROM PCB UNIT (R)

HARNESS, WIRE, TANK (L)

HARNESS, WIRE, TANK (R)

HARNESS, WIRE, INK SENSOR (L)

SERIAL NUMBER/

REMARKS iPF765/760/755/750 iPF765/760/755/750 iPF765/760/755/750 iPF765/760/755/750 iPF765/760/755/750 iPF765/760/755/750 iPF765/760/755/750 iPF765/760/755/750 iPF786/785/781/780 iPF786/785/781/780 iPF786/785/781/780 iPF786/785/781/780 iPF786/785/781/780 iPF786/785/781/780 iPF786/785/781/780 iPF786/785/781/780 iPF786/785/781/780 iPF786/785/781/780 iPF786/785/781/780

S

V

C

2-15

FIGURE

& KEY

NO.

69

70

71

72

65

66

67

68

73

501

502

503

504

PARTS

NUMBER

QM7-7231-000

QM4-8465-000

QM4-8460-000

QD1-0270-000

QD1-1225-000

QD1-1233-000

QK1-9860-000

QM4-8464-000

QM4-8459-000

XB1-2260-409

XB1-2300-607

XB4-5300-807

XB4-5401-007

R

A

N

K

Q'TY

2

1

2

2

1

2

1

1

2

27

1

6

8

DESCRIPTION

HARNESS, WIRE, INK SENSOR (R)

INK SUPPLY TANK UNIT (L)

INK SUPPLY TANK UNIT (R)

GEAR, VALVE

CAM, VALVE 6T/52T

GEAR, VALVE 22T/80T

MOTOR, 24V, DC

INK SUPPLY UNIT (L)

INK SUPPLY UNIT (R)

SCREW, BINDING HEAD, M2.6X4

SCREW, BH3X6

SCREW, P, M3X8

SCREW, M4X10

SERIAL NUMBER/

REMARKS iPF786/785/781/780 iPF786/785/781/780 iPF786/785/781/780 iPF786/785/781/780 iPF786/785/781/780 iPF786/785/781/780 iPF786/785/781/780 iPF786/785/781/780 iPF786/785/781/780

S

V

C

2-16

FIGURE 06

LINEAR SCALE

2

1

FIGURE

& KEY

NO.

Fig.06

1

1

2

PARTS

NUMBER

NPN

QC3-1878-000

QD1-0006-000

QU1-2437-000

N

K

R

A

Q'TY

1

1

RF

1

DESCRIPTION

LINEAR SCALE

SCALE, LINEAR

SCALE, LINEAR

SPRING, TENSION

SERIAL NUMBER/

REMARKS

S

V

C iPF765/760/755/750 iPF786/785/781/780

2-17

FIGURE 07

CARRIAGE UNIT

(J4)

(J5)

42

44

41

(J64)

(J63)

8

44

10

11

(J63)

(J64)

12

(J6)

43

9

B

C

7

5

45

B

6

44

1

44

4

3

23

15

35

C

37

16

13

36

2

26

A

17

16

24

39

25

27

28

30

38

29

22

501

21

501

40

A

34

30

28

27

32

33

31

14

18

19

2-18

FIGURE

& KEY

NO.

28

29

30

31

24

25

26

27

19

21

22

23

16

17

18

19

12

13

14

15

10

11

8

9

6

7

4

5

Fig.07

1

2

3

PARTS

NUMBER

QC1-0008-000

QE1-2819-010

QU1-2445-000

QM3-5824-020

QM4-8458-000

QC3-1524-000

QM3-4574-000

QC3-1526-000

QU1-2438-000

QM3-5826-010

QM3-5831-000

QC3-1515-000

QC3-1514-000

QC3-1511-000

QU1-2439-000

QM3-4569-010

NPN

QC3-1751-000

QM3-5833-000

QU1-2441-000

QC3-1531-000

QC3-1532-000

QC3-1533-000

QC3-1534-010

QM3-5883-020

QC3-1684-000

QC3-1686-010

QL2-3175-000

QU1-2451-000

QC3-1621-000

QL2-3203-000

QM3-5951-010

R

A

N

K

Q'TY

4

1

4

2

1

2

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

2

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

RF

1

DESCRIPTION

CARRIAGE UNIT

COVER, PROTECTION

PULLEY UNIT

SPRING, COMPRESSION

RETAINER, PULLEY

HOLDER, FLEXIBLE CABLE

COVER, FLEXIBLE CABLE

GUIDE, FLEXIBLE CABLE

COVER LOCK UNIT

PLATE, SWITCH

LEVER, LOCK

SOLENOID

SPRING, TENSION

SUPPORT, TUBE

GUIDE, TUBE

INK TUBE UNIT

JOINT LEVER B

JOINT LEVER A

SPRING, TENSION

CARRIAGE UNIT

CARRIAGE UNIT

COVER, LINEAR ENCODER

ENCODER SENSOR UNIT

BELT, CARRIAGE

SPRING, TENSION

HEAD LEVER UNIT

MULTI SENSOR UNIT

RETAINER, PAD

PAD

SLIDER, RAIL

SPRING, TENSION

CARRIAGE PCB UNIT

SERIAL NUMBER/

REMARKS iPF765/760/755/750 iPF786/785/781/780

S

V

C iPF765/760/755/750

2-19

FIGURE

& KEY

NO.

43

44

45

501

39

40

41

42

35

36

37

38

31

32

33

34

PARTS

NUMBER

QM7-7291-000

QC3-1516-000

QC3-1519-000

QU1-8264-000

QC3-1527-000

QC3-1525-000

QM3-4613-000

QK1-9687-000

QK1-5143-000

QU1-2440-000

QK1-5068-000

QM3-4591-000

QM3-4590-000

XA9-1928-000

WT2-5981-000

XB4-5300-807

R

A

N

K

Q'TY

2

7

1

6

1

1

1

2

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

DESCRIPTION

CARRIAGE PCB UNIT

LEVER, SLANT

COUPLING

LABEL, SLANT

HOLDER, FLEXIBLE CABLE

FILM, FLEXIBLE CABLE

FLEXIBLE CABLE UNIT

CABLE, FLEXIBLE

CABLE, FLEXIBLE

SPRING, COMPRESSION

MOTOR, DC

HARNESS, WIRE, INTERLOCK RELAY

HARNESS, WIRE, INTERLOCK

SCREW, TP, M3X8

CLAMP, CORD

SCREW, P, M3X8

SERIAL NUMBER/

REMARKS iPF786/785/781/780

S

V

C

2-20

FIGURE 08

AIR FLOW FAN UNIT

502

11

502

22

10

9

22

21

20

19

21

13

(J65)

23

(J21)

25

23

15

14

23

18

13

21

21

17

22

16

22

12

27 1

2

27

(J45)

(J44)

(J43)

4

26

8

28

501

3

6

7

(J22)

(J23)

501

24

21

5

27

2-21

FIGURE

& KEY

NO.

28

501

502

24

25

26

27

20

21

22

23

16

17

18

19

12

13

14

15

10

11

8

9

6

7

4

5

Fig.08

1

2

3

PARTS

NUMBER

QL2-3183-000

QC3-1570-000

QC3-1571-000

QC3-1572-000

QC3-1574-000

WT2-5056-000

WT2-5694-000

XA9-1386-000

QM3-4932-000

QM3-4599-000

QU1-0359-000

XA9-1928-000

QC3-1437-000

XB4-5300-807

XB4-5401-007

NPN

QM3-5905-000

QM3-5808-000

QK1-0440-000

WG8-5849-000

QM3-5841-000

QC3-1552-000

QC3-1808-000

QC3-1445-000

QM3-5853-000

QM3-5854-000

QK1-2086-000

QM3-5805-000

WC4-5052-000

QC3-1568-000

QC3-1569-000

R

A

N

K

Q'TY

1

4

5

1

AR

1

1

6

20

1

6

4

1

1

1

1

1

1

2

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

RF

1

DESCRIPTION

AIR FLOW FAN UNIT

SUCTION FAN UNIT

PLATEN SHUTTER DRIVE UNIT

MOTOR, STEPPING DC 10W UNDER


M/C HOLDER UNIT

ABSORBER, INK

ABSORBER, INK

GEAR, SHUTTER

MIST FAN DUCT UNIT

FAN UNIT

FAN

WASTE INK BOX UNIT

MICRO SWITCH

COVER, FRONT DUCT

COVER, FRONT DUCT, LEFT

COVER, FRONT DUCT, RIGHT

ABSORBER, INK

ABSORBER, INK

ABSORBER, INK

SEAL, FRONT DUCT

CLIP, CORD

CLIP CLAMP, WIRE

SCREW, RS, M3X8

M/C RELAY PCB ASS'Y

HARNESS, WIRE, TANK COVER L

GEAR, 20T/72T

SCREW, TP, M3X8

JOINT, TUBE, COLOR

SCREW, P, M3X8

SCREW, M4X10

SERIAL NUMBER/

REMARKS

S

V

C

2-22

FIGURE 09

CUTTER UNIT

14

A

14

12

11

8

14

(J11)

(J7)

(J12) 9

501

5

7

502

A

6

1

13

13

2

3

4

503

15

8

(J33)

10

(J34)

(J31)

2-23

FIGURE

& KEY

NO.

11

12

13

14

9

10

7

8

15

501

502

503

5

6

3

4

Fig.09

1

2

3

PARTS

NUMBER

NPN

QC3-1555-000

QC3-1766-000

QM3-5844-030

QM4-8480-000

QM3-5846-030

QC1-4850-000

QK1-0550-000

QU1-0365-000

WG8-5776-000

QM3-4583-000

QM3-4584-000

WT2-5056-000

WT2-5694-000

XA9-1386-000

XA9-1928-000

QM3-5961-000

XB1-2260-409

XD2-1100-242

XB4-5400-807

R

A

N

K

Q'TY

2

AR

1

2

1

1

1

2

1

1

1

2

1

1

1

1

1

1

RF

1

DESCRIPTION

CUTTER UNIT

COVER, PLATE

COVER, CUTTER DRIVE

CUTTER UNIT

CUTTER UNIT

CUTTER

BELT, TIMING

MOTOR, 24V, DC

GEAR, 30T


HARNESS, WIRE, CUTTER, LEFT

HARNESS, WIRE, CUTTER, RIGHT

CLIP, CORD

CLIP CLAMP, WIRE

SCREW, RS, M3X8

SCREW, TP, M3X8

CUTTER SUPPORT UNIT

SCREW, BINDING HEAD, M2.6X4

WASHER, RETAINING

SCREW, P, M4X8

SERIAL NUMBER/

REMARKS iPF765/760/755/750 iPF786/785/781/780

S

V

C

2-24

FIGURE 10

PLATEN & GUIDE UNIT

10

2

6

1

3

9

4

5

8 10

10

11

9

2-25

FIGURE

& KEY

NO.

6

8

4

5

Fig.10

1

2

3

9

10

11

PARTS

NUMBER

NPN

QM3-5949-020

QL2-3160-010

QL2-3159-010

QL2-3158-010

QL2-3157-010

QC3-1916-010

QC3-1458-010

XA9-1386-000

XA9-1928-000

QM3-5971-010

R

A

N

K

Q'TY

2

2

1

1

1

1

RF

1

9

AR

1

DESCRIPTION

PLATEN & GUIDE UNIT

TUBE GUIDE UNIT

MOUNT, MULTI SENSOR REFERENCE

PLATEN, LEFT

PLATEN

PLATEN, RIGHT

GUIDE, DELIVERY, UPPER

GUIDE, DELIVERY

SCREW, RS, M3X8

SCREW, TP, M3X8

GUIDE, DELIVERY, UPPER, HP

SERIAL NUMBER/

REMARKS

S

V

C

2-26

FIGURE 11

PINCH ROLLER UNIT

4

9

6

7

3 2

1

FIGURE

& KEY

NO.

7

9

4

6

Fig.11

1

2

3

PARTS

NUMBER

NPN

QM3-5946-000

QU1-0360-000

QU1-2442-000

QM3-5817-000

QC3-1480-000

QM3-5816-020

XA9-1928-000

N

K

R

A

Q'TY

9

18

9

AR

1

1

RF

1

DESCRIPTION

PINCH ROLLER UNIT

RELEASE LEVER UNIT

GEAR, RELEASE, 14T

SPRING, TENSION

PAPER GUIDE ROLLER UNIT

SPRING, TORSION

HOLDER, PINCH ROLLER

SCREW, TP, M3X8

SERIAL NUMBER/

REMARKS

S

V

C

2-27

FIGURE 12

FEED ROLLER UNIT

10

9

10

(J4101)

(J4201)

(J2)

(J3)

11

3

15

2

502

4

13

5

501

1

15

6

2

7

8 15

14

12

13

12

503

16

18

2-28

18

503

17

FIGURE

& KEY

NO.

12

13

14

15

10

11

8

9

6

7

4

5

Fig.12

1

2

3

16

17

18

501

502

503

PARTS

NUMBER

NPN

QL2-3182-000

QU1-2446-000

QK1-5067-000

QK1-5066-000

WG8-5849-000

QC3-1879-000

QC2-0998-000

QC2-0957-000

QM3-5815-000

QC3-1478-000

QM3-4611-000

WT2-5738-000

WT2-5056-000

WT2-5737-000

XA9-1928-000

QM3-5803-010

QM3-5804-010

XA9-1386-000

XB1-2200-507

XB6-7300-607

XB4-5401-007

R

A

N

K

Q'TY

2

4

2

3

2

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

2

1

RF

1

4

2

1

1

2

6

DESCRIPTION

FEED ROLLER UNIT

COVER, CODE WHEEL

SPRING, TENSION

MOTOR, DC

ENCODER ASS'Y


WHEEL, CODE

FLANGE, PULLEY

BELT, DRIVE, PAPER TRANSPORT

FEED ROLLER ASS'Y

BUSHING

HARNESS, WIRE, MOTOR

CLAMP, CABLE

CLIP, CORD

CLIP, CABLE

SCREW, TP, M3X8

BOTTOM COVER UNIT, L

BOTTOM COVER UNIT, R

SCREW, RS, M3X8

SCREW, BH 2X5, S


SCREW, M4X10

SERIAL NUMBER/

REMARKS

S

V

C

2-29

FIGURE 13

TOOL

1

3

2

FIGURE

& KEY

NO.

Fig.13

1

2

3

PARTS

NUMBER

NPN

QY9-0103-000

FY9-6022-000

QY9-0037-000

R

A

N

K

Q'TY

1

1

RF

1

DESCRIPTION

TOOL

COVER SWITCH TOOL

LUBE, FLOIL G-5000H, GREASE

GREASE, EU-1

SERIAL NUMBER/

REMARKS

S

V

C

2-30

FIGURE R1

STAND UNIT ST-33

501

16

6

C

7

502

13

7

C

502

6

7

502

6

14 13

501

5

18

A

4

19

21

15

23

3 19 21

2

8

12

10

11

A

13

17

9

11

10

B

10

1

11

4

22

19

20

3

5

18

15

20

19

B

13

11

14

9

10

2-31

FIGURE

& KEY

NO.

12

13

14

15

10

11

8

9

6

7

4

5

Fig.R1

1

2

3

20

21

22

23

16

17

18

19

501

502

PARTS

NUMBER

NPN

QC3-1914-000

QM3-5894-000

QC3-1739-000

QC3-1492-000

QC2-4346-000

QM3-5898-000

QC3-1746-000

QC3-1731-000

QC2-9785-000

QC3-1732-000

QD1-1095-000

QC2-4116-000

QC1-5141-000

QC2-5993-000

QC3-0133-000

QC3-1747-000

QC3-1442-000

QC3-1455-000

QC2-6323-010

QD1-0005-000

QD1-0004-000

AY3-4573-000

AY3-4574-000

XB7-2301-009

XB4-5300-807

R

A

N

K

Q'TY

4

2

1

16

4

4

1

2

3

3

2

2

1

2

RF

1

1

1

1

1

4

12

2

2

1

1

DESCRIPTION

STAND UNIT ST-33

BASKET

SUPPORT ROD UNIT

SUPPORT, ROD

GUIDE, BASKET

JOINT, ROD

PAPER GUIDE UNIT

PAPER STOPPER UNIT

BOX, ACCESSORY

HOOK, BASKET

CAP, STAND

CASTER, W/STOPPER

SCREW, HEX SOCKET M4X10

SCREW,ALLEN,M8X20

SCREW, HEX SOCKET, M4X30

SCREW, STEPPED, M4

ROD, STOPPER 36

ROD, AL 36

ROD, SIDE AL

SUPPORT, ROD

HOLDER, ROD, R

HOLDER, ROD, L

ROD SUPPORT KIT, R

ROD SUPORRT KIT, L

NUT

SCREW, P, M3X8

SERIAL NUMBER/

REMARKS

S

V

C

2-32

FIGURE R2

STAND UNIT ST-34

501

26

25

C

25

27

502

27

502

C

33

501

27

502

25

34

33

36

29

32

30

28

503

F

4

6

2

5

504

3

A

39

36

37

35

503

504

35

30

36

31

A

33

36

8

37

F

7

5

4

36

38

B

3

6

31

B

30

31

36

34

36

29

33

31

36

30

2-33

32

14

1

F

19

503

9

9

504

16

503

22

504

18

504

23 504

D

503

503

19

504

21

10

10

10

504

10

504

10

503

504

10

10

20

11

9

32

9

15

503

D

504

12

504

12

504

12

504

504

503

F

503

19

22

13

E

503

19

24

17

503

E

2-34

FIGURE

& KEY

NO.

28

29

30

31

24

25

26

27

20

21

22

23

16

17

18

19

12

13

14

15

10

11

8

9

6

7

4

5

Fig.R2

1

2

3

PARTS

NUMBER

QC3-1947-000

QM3-5997-000

QM3-5996-000

QC3-1946-000

QC3-1943-000

QC3-1944-000

QC3-1945-000

QC3-1963-000

QC3-1955-000

QM3-5898-000

QC3-1747-000

QC3-1746-000

QC3-1731-000

QC2-9785-000

QC3-1732-000

QD1-1095-000

NPN

QC3-1914-000

QM3-5894-000

QC2-6323-010

QC3-1953-000

QC3-1959-000

QC3-1850-000

QU1-8293-000

AY3-4560-000

QC3-1950-000

QC3-1949-000

QC3-1971-000

QC3-1958-000

QC3-1969-000

QC3-1962-000

QC3-1948-000

R

A

N

K

Q'TY

4

4

1

2

1

3

1

3

2

1

1

1

1

4

1

1

1

1

3

1

8

1

1

4

2

1

2

2

1

2

RF

1

DESCRIPTION

STAND UNIT ST-34

BASKET

SUPPORT ROD UNIT

SUPPORT, ROD

GUIDE, BASKET

ROD, SIDE AL

PROTECTOR, ROD

LABEL, UNLOCK

GUIDE, BASKET, R

TRAY

STOPPER, TRAY

HANDLE, BASKET

SPACER, BASKET

JOINT, C, R

JOINT, C, L

JOINT, SLIDE, R

JOINT, SLIDE, L

LINK ARM UNIT (R)

LINK ARM UNIT (L)

JOINT, ROD

ROD, AL, A, 36

ROD, AL, B, 36

ROD, AL, C

ROD, AL, D, 36

ROD, STOPPER, AL 36

PAPER GUIDE UNIT

ROD, STOPPER 36

PAPER STOPPER UNIT

BOX, ACCESSORY

HOOK, BASKET

CAP, STAND

CASTER, W/STOPPER

SERIAL NUMBER/

REMARKS

S

V

C

2-35

FIGURE

& KEY

NO.

36

37

38

39

32

33

34

35

501

502

503

504

PARTS

NUMBER

QC2-4116-000

QC3-1921-000

QC2-5993-000

QC3-0133-000

XA9-0949-000

XZ9-0697-000

QD1-0005-000

QD1-0004-000

XB7-2301-009

XB4-5300-807

XB4-6301-205

XB4-6302-505

R

A

N

K

Q'TY

1

1

22

2

4

2

3

16

12

27

4

6

DESCRIPTION

SCREW, HEX SOCKET M4X10

SCREW, ALLEN, M8X16

SCREW, HEX SOCKET, M4X30

SCREW, STEPPED, M4

SCREW, RS, M4X10

BUSHING

HOLDER, ROD, R

HOLDER, ROD, L

NUT

SCREW, P, M3X8

SCREW,TAPPING,PAN HEAD,M3X12

SCREW,TAPPING,PAN HEAD,M3X25

SERIAL NUMBER/

REMARKS

S

V

C

2-36

FIGURE ZZA

MECHANICAL STANDARD PARTS(HOW TO USE)

Mechanical standard parts

About a mechanical standard parts

A Mechanical standard parts is a mechanical part which not parts peculiar to a product.

They are parts which are common to a Canon product and are used, such as a screw and a washer.

The Fig No. and parts number of the mechanical standard parts are not listed in the product parts catalog.

Refer to the parts catalog of mechanical standard parts when checking the parts number for screw or washer etc. and identify them by part shape or size.

Material and surface treatment of a mechanical standard parts

Material and surface treatment of mechanical standard parts are assigned commonly for each part.

Refer to the Table 1 for the parts which material and surface treatment are assigned as numbers.

Table 1 Material and Surface treatment

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

No.

Material Surface treatment

Stainless steel

Stainless steel black coloring (BC4) not to be given

Regular nickel plating (NL)

Brass

Black nickel plating (BN)

White zinc trivalent chromate treating (ZC3)

Regular nickel chromium plating (NC)

Steel Regular nickel plating (NL)

Iron and steel phosphating (P1)

Black zinc trivalent chromate treating (BZ3)

Color

Black

White

White

Black

White

White

White

Black

Black

2-37

FIGURE ZZB

MECHANICAL STANDARD PARTS(SCREWS)

1. Screws

How to read Parts Numbers

Screws

XB1-2400-609

Type No.

Normal designation d

Length L

Material and Surface treatment

XB1-2 expresses Binding head machine screw.

40 expresses M4.0.

0-60 expresses a length of 6.0mm.

9 expresses Steel (Black zinc trivalent chromate treating) from Table 1.

1-1. Cross Recessed Head Screws for Precision Equipments

XA1-1, 6, 7

H L

K H

L

XA1-3

H

L

Pan head Class 1

Countersunk head Class 1

Oval countersunk head Class 1

Pan head Class 3

Pan head Class 2

XA1-4

Head size (mm)

M1.4 M1.6 M1.7 M2 M2.5 M2.6

2 2.4

2.5

3 3.8

4

0.5 0.55

0.5

0.6

0.9 0.8

2 2.4

2.5

3 3.8

4

0.48 0.55 0.58 0.73 0.85 0.93

2 2.4

2.5

3 3.8

4

0.68

0.8 0.88

2.5

2.8

3

1 1.25 1.3

3.5

4.3 4.5

0.8 0.85

0.9

2.5

2.8

3

1

3.5

1.3 1.2

4.3 4.5

0.5 0.55

0.5

0.6

0.9 0.8

2-38

1-2. Precision Tapping Screws

H

H

H

L

L

L

With tatered end pan head Class 1


With tatered end countersunk head


With parallel end ultra thin head

With parallel end pan head Class 1


With parallel end countersunk head


XA4-1, 2, 4

XA4-3

H L

H

L

XA4-5

XA4-6, 7, 9

XA4-8

Head size (mm)

M1.4 M1.6 M1.7 M2 M2.5 M2.6

2 2.4

2.5

3 3.8

4

0.5 0.55

0.5

0.6

0.9 0.8

2.5

2.8

3 3.5

4.3 4.5

0.8 0.85

0.9

1 1.3 1.2

2 2.4

2.5

3 3.8

4

0.48 0.55 0.58 0.73 0.85 0.93

2.5

2.8

3 3.5

4.3 4.5

0.5 0.55

0.5

0.6

0.9 0.8

2.5

2.8

3

0.2

0.2

0.2

-

-

-

-

2 2.4

2.5

3 3.8

4

0.5 0.55

0.5

0.6

0.9 0.8

2.5

2.8

3 3.5

4.3 4.5

0.8 0.85

0.9

1 1.3 1.2

-

-

2 2.4

2.5

3 3.8

4

0.48 0.55 0.58 0.73 0.85 0.93

2.5

2.8

3 3.5

4.3 4.5

0.5 0.55

0.5

0.6

0.9 0.8

2-39

2-40

1-3. Cross Recessed Head Screws

XB1-1 k L

XB1-2 f k L

Pan head

Binding head

Countersunk head

Oval countersunk head

XB1-3 k

L

XB1-4 f k

L

Head size (mm)

Screw part length b

M2 M2.5 M2.6 M3 M4 M5

3.5 4.5

4.5

5.5

7 9

1.3

1.7

1.7

2 2.6 3.3

4.3

5.3

5.5

6.3

8.3 10.3

1.2

1.5

1.6

1.9

2.5 3.1

4 5 6 8 10

1.2 1.45

4 5

1.6

2

- 1.75

6

- 2.45

2.3 2.8

8

3.2

10

4

8 12 12 12 16 20

1-4. Cross Recessed Head Screws with Captive Washer

L

XB2-1

L

XB2-5

L

XB2-2

L

XB2-6

Pan head + Plain washer (circular bright)

Pan head + Spring washer

Pan head + Toothed lock washer

Pan head + Spring washer and plain washer (circular bright)

Binding head + Plain washer (circular bright)

Binding head + Spring washer

Binding head + Toothed lock washer

Binding head + Spring washer and

plain washer (circular bright)

L

XB2-3

L

XB2-7

L

XB2-4

L

XB2-8

2-41

2-42

1-5. Hexagon Head Tapping Screws for Matallic Materials

B H L

For metallic materials

For metallic materials with clawed

1-6. Special Tapping Screws

f k L

Binding head

Head size (mm)

M3

8

5.5

3.1

3.2

M4

10

5.5

3.1

3.2

Head size (mm)

M3

6.3

1.3

1.9

M4

8.3

1.7

2.5

1-7. General Head Tapping Screws

k L f k L

XB4-6

XB4-7

Pan head

Binding head

Countersunk head

1-8. Tapping Screws for Metallic Materials

XB5-1 k L

XB5-2 f k L

Pan head

Binding head

Flanged pan head k L k L

XB4-8

Head size (mm)

M2 M2.5 M2.6 M3 M4 M5

3.5 4.5

4.5

5.5

7 9

1.3

1.7

1.7

2 2.6 3.3

4.3

5.3

5.5

6.3

8.3 10.3

1.2

1.5

1.6

1.9

2.5 3.1

4 5 5.2

6 8 10

1.2 1.45

1.5 1.75

2.3 2.8

XB5-6

Head size (mm)

M2.5 M2.6 M3 M4 M5

4.5

4.5

5.5

7 9

1.7

1.7

2 2.6 3.3

5.5

5.5

6.3

8.3 10.3

1.6

1.6

1.9

2.5 3.1

6.5

6.5

8 10 12

2.1

2.1 1.75

3.2

4

2-43

1-9. Hexagon Socket Set Screws

S t

L

XB6-1

L

XB6-2

L

XB6-3

Cone point

Double point

Flat point

1-10. Flanged Pan Head Machine Screws

Head size (mm)

M1.6

M1.7 M2

M2.5

M2.6 M3

M5 M5 M6

0.7 0.9

1.3

1.5

1.5

1.7

2 2

2 2.5

2.5

3

0.4

0.5 0.65 0.75

1 1.25

1.2

1.5

1.7

2.2 2.8

1 1.2

1.4

1.9 2.4

3

3.5

1.5

3.3

2.9

0.8

1 1.5

2 2.5 3.5

4

0.55 0.75 1.25 1.75 2.25 3.2

3.7

k L

Flanged pan head

Head size (mm)

M2

M2.5

M2.6 M3

M5 M5

5 6.5

8 10 12

1.7

2.1

2.5

3.2

4

2-44

FIGURE ZZC

MECHANICAL STANDARD PARTS(BOLTS)

2. Bolts (Socket head cap screw)


Bolt (Socket head cap screw)

XB7-1080-409

Type No.


Length L


XB7-1 expresses Hexagon socket head cap screws.

080 expresses M8.0.

40 expresses a length of 40mm.


2-1. Hexagon socket head cap screws

S

K L b

Hexagon socket head cap screws

Head size (mm)

S d k

K

Screw part length b max

M3 M4 M5 M6 M8 M10 M12

2.5

3 4 5 6 8 10

5.5

3

7

4

8.5

5

10

6

13

8

16

10

18

12

18 20 22 24 28 32 36

2-45

FIGURE ZZD

MECHANICAL STANDARD PARTS(NUTS)

3. Nuts


Nuts

XB7-2100-309

Type No.



XB7-210 expresses Hexagon nut class 1.

0-30 expresses M3.0.


3-1. Hexagon Nuts and Hexagon Thin Nuts

S m m

Hexagon nut Class 1

Hexagon nut Class 3

Hexagon nut Style 1 double chamfered

Hexagon nut Style 1 washer faced

Hexagon nut Style 2 double chamfered

Hexagon nut Style 2 washer faced

Hexagon nut

Hexagon thin nut double chamfered

Hexagon thin nut not chamfered

Head size (mm)

M2 M2.5 M3 M4 M5 M6 M8

4 5 5.5

7 8 10 13

1.6

2 2.4

3.2

4 5 6.5

1.2

1.6

1.8

2.4

3.2 3.6

5

1.6

-

2 2.4

3.2

4.7 5.2

6.8

5.1 5.7

7.5

5.6 6.1

7.9

1.2

1.6

1.8

2.2

2.7 3.2

1.2

1.6

1.8

2.2

2.7 3.2

4

4

2-46

FIGURE ZZE

MECHANICAL STANDARD PARTS(RETAINING

RINGS)

5. Retaining Rings


Retaining Rings

XD2-1100-202

Type No.

Nominal designation

XD2-110 expresses retaining ring-E type (Type1).

0-20 expresses a 020 of nominal designation.

(See Table 5)

Material and Surface treatment 2 expresses Stainless steel (Surface treatment is not to be given) from Table 1.

5-1. Retaining Rings - E type

D d t

Retaining ring - E type (Type 1)

Retaining ring - E type (Type 2)

2-47

5-2. Grip Rings

d

3

Grip ring

5-3. Toothed Retaining Rings

t

D t

Toothed retaining ring

Table 5

Nominal designation d

3

(mm) t (mm) b (mm) a (mm) d

0

(mm)

045

050

060

070

080

090

100

020

025

030

035

040

1.9

2.35

2.85

3.3

3.8

4.25

4.75

5.7

6.7

7.7

8.65

9.65

0.8

0.8

1

1

1

1.2

1.2

0.5

0.5

0.6

0.6

0.8

2

2.2

2.4

2.7

3

3.3

3.5

1

1.2

1.4

1.6

1.8

2.9

2.9

3.1

3.3

3.5

4.7

4.7

1.8

1.9

1.9

2

2.8

1.3

1.3

1.4

1.4

1.4

1.5

2

0.8

0.9

0.9

0.9

1.2

Table 5


2

(mm) D (mm) t (mm)

No of teeth

015

020

024

030

040

050

060

080

100

1.4

1.9

2.3

2.8

3.8

4.8

5.8

7.8

9.8

5.2

6

6.4

8

9

10

11

13

15.4

0.25

0.25

0.25

0.25

0.25

0.25

0.25

0.25

0.25

5

5

6

4

5

3

3

3

4

2-48

5-4. Retaining Rings - C Type

d

3 d 3 t

Retaining ring - C type for shaft t

Retaining ring - C type for hole

Table 5


3


0

(mm)

018

020

022

025

028

030

032

035

010

012

014

015

016

017

9.3

11.1

12.9

13.8

14.7

15.7

16.5

18.5

20.5

23.2

25.9

27.9

29.6

32.2

1.2

1.2

1.2

1.2

1.5

1.5

1.5

1.5

1

1

1

1

1

1

3.8

3.9

4.1

4.3

4.6

4.8

5

5.4

3

3.2

3.4

3.5

3.6

3.7

2.6

2.7

2.7

3.1

3.1

3.5

3.5

4

1.6

1.8

2

2.1

2.2

2.2

1.7

2

2

2

2

2

2.5

2.5

1.2

1.5

1.7

1.7

1.7

1.7

79.5

85.5

90.5

95.5

100.5

43.5

45.5

48.5

50.5

54.2

56.2

59.2

64.2

66.2

72.5

76.5

19.5

20.5

21.5

23.5

26.9

30.1

32.1

34.4

37.8

39.8

10.7

11.8

13

15.1

17.3

040

042

045

047

050

052

055

060

062

068

072

075

080

085

090

095

018

019

020

022

025

028

030

032

035

037

010

011

012

014

016

Table 5


3


0

(mm)

5.7

5.8

5.9

6.1

6.5

6.5

6.5

6.8

6.9

7.4

7.4

7.8

8

8

8.3

8.5

4.7

5.2

5.2

5.2

4

4.1

4.4

4.6

4

4

3.1

3.2

3.3

3.6

3.7

2.5

2.5

2.5

2.5

2.5

2.5

2.5

2.5

2.5

2.5

2.5

2.5

2.5

3

3

3

2

2.5

2.5

2.5

1.7

2

2

2

2

2

1.2

1.2

1.5

1.7

1.7

1.8

1.8

1.8

1.8

2

2.5

2.5

2

2

2

2

2.5

2.5

3

3

3

1.2

1.2

1.5

1.5

1.2

1.2

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

4.5

4.5

4.5

4

4

5.1

5.1

5.1

5.5

6

6.6

6.6

7

7

7.6

8

3

3.5

3.5

3.5

2.5

2.5

2.5

2.5

3

3

1.8

1.8

1.8

2

2

2-49